The Voice in Speech and Song

The Voice in Speech and
Song
Ellen G. White
1988
Copyright © 2014
Ellen G. White Estate, Inc.
Information about this Book
Overview
This eBook is provided by the Ellen G. White Estate. It is included
in the larger free Online Books collection on the Ellen G. White
Estate Web site.
About the Author

Ellen G. White (1827-1915) is considered the most widely translated
American author, her works having been published in more than 160
languages. She wrote more than 100,000 pages on a wide variety of
spiritual and practical topics. Guided by the Holy Spirit, she exalted
Jesus and pointed to the Scriptures as the basis of one’s faith.
Further Links
A Brief Biography of Ellen G. White
About the Ellen G. White Estate
End User License Agreement

The viewing, printing or downloading of this book grants you only
a limited, nonexclusive and nontransferable license for use solely
by you for your own personal use. This license does not permit
republication, distribution, assignment, sublicense, sale, preparation
of derivative works, or other use. Any unauthorized use of this book
terminates the license granted hereby.
Further Information
For more information about the author, publishers, or how you
can support this service, please contact the Ellen G. White Estate
at mail@whiteestate.org. We are thankful for your interest and
feedback and wish you God’s blessing as you read.
i
ii
Introduction
Ellen White’s formal education ended when she was only nine
years old, so she never had the privilege of studying under the speech
or voice professionals of her day. Nevertheless, taught by the Lord,
she became one of America’s outstanding women preachers. For
more than 70 years, long before the days of microphones and public
address systems, she spoke to large audiences of up to 20,000 people.
Always ready to speak, especially on the subject of temperance,
she declared, “When asked to speak on temperance, I have never hes-
itated” (MS. 31, 1911). Once she met the competition of Barnum’s
Circus in Battle Creek, Michigan, with a 90-minute temperance
lecture delivered to 5,000 eager listeners. She spoke in a city hall
in Haverhill, Massachusetts; in a prison in Salem, Oregon; on an
improvised platform composed of beer tables in Norway; and at
open-air meetings and in churches, halls, and tents on three con-
tinents. She was in constant demand as a camp meeting speaker.
Ellen White was a powerful evangelist.
Were it not for her books, Ellen White no doubt would be best
remembered today for her pulpit ministry. But she did more than
preach; she wrote— prolifically. Some 70 books currently carry her [6]
byline. Nearly all have sold in the tens of thousands, some even in
the millions. The present work joins this long line of best sellers. It
will be welcomed by ministers, teachers, musicians, and all others
who are especially concerned with the use of the voice.
The counsels published here are God-given; they are trustworthy
and reliable. This volume is sent forth with the prayer that it will
bring a blessing to all who seek to improve their voice talent for the
glory of God and the benefit of humanity.
The Trustees of the

Ellen G. White Estate
[7]
iii
Contents
Information about this Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Section 1—A Gift From God . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Chapter 1—A Heavenly Talent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Chapter 2—Design for Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Chapter 3—A Tool for Evangelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Chapter 4—Importance of Speech Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 5—The Role of Parents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 6—The Role of Teachers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 7—Students and Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 8—The Influence of Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Chapter 9—Persuasion Through Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 10—Misuse of the Gift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Section 2—Christ the Ideal Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 11—Nature of His Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Chapter 12—Effectiveness of Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Chapter 13—Love, Sympathy, and Kindness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Chapter 14—Patient Calmness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 15—Simplicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 16—Power, Authority, and Earnestness . . . . . . . . . . 58
Chapter 17—Words of Truth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Chapter 18—No Complicated Reasoning nor Argument . . . 64
Chapter 19—Christ’s Study of Countenances . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Chapter 20—Adaptation to His Listeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Chapter 21—Illustrations, Symbols, and Figures of Speech 69
Chapter 22—The Worker’s Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Section 3—Christian Attitudes in Speaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 23—Revelation of Christ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Chapter 24—Modesty, Truthfulness, and Discretion . . . . . . . 79
Chapter 25—Kinds of Negative Speaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 26—Love and Kindness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Chapter 27—Effect of Words on Oneself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Chapter 28—Discernment in Reproof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Chapter 29—Praise and Thanksgiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
iv
Contents v
Chapter 30—Care in Speaking of Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Chapter 31—Hope and Encouragement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 32—Faith a Topic of Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 33—Simplicity in Our Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Section 4—Voice Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Chapter 34—Importance of the Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Chapter 35—Clarity and Purity of Utterance . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Chapter 36—Importance of General Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Chapter 37—Proper Use of the Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Section 5—Effective Methods of Public Speaking . . . . . . . . . 133
Chapter 38—Love and Kindness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Chapter 39—Simplicity and Clarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Chapter 40—Pure Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 41—Earnestness and Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Chapter 42—Conversational Manner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Chapter 43—No Harsh Words nor Debating Spirit . . . . . . . 154
Chapter 44—Brevity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Chapter 45—Speed and Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Chapter 46—Anecdotes and Humor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Chapter 47—Illustrations and Visual Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Chapter 48—Oratorical and Theatrical Display . . . . . . . . . . 182
Chapter 49—Danger of Excessive Emotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Chapter 50—Being Heard, but Not by Shouting . . . . . . . . . 189
Chapter 51—Refinement and Solemnity of Demeanor . . . . 192
Chapter 52—Every Person an Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Chapter 53—The Real Proof of Preaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Section 6—Content of Our Discourses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 54—Christ the Sum and Substance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Chapter 55—Promise of the Holy Spirit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Chapter 56—Eternal Truth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Chapter 57—Testing Truths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Chapter 58—Soon Coming of Christ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Chapter 59—The Way of Salvation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Chapter 60—Practical Godliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Section 7—Examples of Effective Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Chapter 61—Men and Women of the Bible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Enoch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Jochebed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
vi The Voice in Speech and Song
Moses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
King Saul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Abigail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Elijah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Children of Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
John the Baptist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Mary, the Mother of Jesus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
The Apostles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
John the Apostle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Stephen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Paul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Timothy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Chapter 62—Medieval Reformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Wycliffe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Huss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Jerome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Luther . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
The Wesleys and Whitefield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Humble Men of Reformation Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Chapter 63—Adventist Pioneers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
William Miller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
James White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
W. W. Prescott . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
God’s Modern Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Section 8—Use of the Voice in Singing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Chapter 64—The Power of Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Chapter 65—Christ’s Singing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Chapter 66—Voice Culture and Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Chapter 67—Wrong Use of the Voice in Music . . . . . . . . . . 271
Chapter 68—Singing That Is to God’s Glory . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Chapter 69—Song a Part of Worship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Chapter 70—Singing a Means of Witness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Chapter 71—Singing in Israel’s Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Chapter 72—Song at Christ’s Resurrection and Ascension 297
Chapter 73—Song in the Last Great Crisis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Chapter 74—Songs of the Redeemed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Section 1—A Gift From God
Chapter 1—A Heavenly Talent
A Supreme Blessing for Good—The power of speech is a talent

that should be diligently cultivated. Of all the gifts we have received
from God, none is capable of being a greater blessing than this. With
the voice we convince and persuade, with it we offer prayer and
praise to God, and with it we tell others of the Redeemer’s love.
How important, then, that it be so trained as to be most effective for
good.—Christ’s Object Lessons, 335.
Voice and Tongue Divine Gifts—The voice and tongue are
gifts from God, and if rightly used, they are a power for God. Words
mean very much. They may express love, devotion, praise, melody
to God, or hatred and revenge. Words reveal the sentiments of the
heart. They may be a savor of life unto life or of death unto death.
The tongue is a world of blessing, or a world of iniquity.—The
S.D.A. Bible Commentary 3:1159.
A Power in the Communication of Knowledge—We may
have knowledge, but unless we know how to use the voice cor-
rectly, our work will be a failure. Unless we can clothe our ideas in
[14] appropriate language, of what avail is our education? Knowledge
will be of little advantage to us unless we cultivate the talent of
speech; but it is a wonderful power when combined with the ability
to speak wise, helpful words, and to speak them in a way that will
command attention.—Testimonies for the Church 6:380.
Impression by Deep Feeling and Pathos—However great a
man’s knowledge, it is of no avail unless he is able to communicate
it to others. Let the pathos of your voice, its deep feeling, make an
impression on hearts.—Testimonies for the Church 7:268.
A Sacred Trust—The gift of speech is a valuable talent. Never
despise or demit this gift. Thank God for entrusting it to you. It is a
precious gift, to be sanctified, elevated, and ennobled. As a sacred
trust, the voice should be used to honor God. It should never utter
harsh, impure words or words of faultfinding. The gospel of Christ
is to be proclaimed by the voice.
8
Chapter 1—A Heavenly Talent 9
With the talent of speech we are to communicate the truth as

we have opportunity. It should ever be used in God’s service; but
this talent is grievously abused. Words are spoken which do great
harm. Christ declared, “Every idle word that men shall speak, they
shall give account thereof in the day of judgment. For by thy words
thou shalt be justified, and by thy words thou shalt be condemned”
[Matthew 12:36, 37].—Manuscript 21, 1899.
Holy Spirit’s Power in the Cultivation of the [15]
Voice—Encourage all to use simple, pure, elevated language.
Speech, pronunciation, and voice—cultivate these talents, not under
any great elocutionist of the world, but under the power of the Holy
Spirit of God.—Lt 83, 1898.
Courage, Cheer, and Hope—Talk of the goodness and love of
Jesus. You and I have been granted the blessing of speech, which is a
talent of great value. It is to be used in talking of those things which
increase love for Jesus. Let us talk of His mercy, of the gracious
words He spoke to encourage and comfort, to bring hope and joy
and love to our hearts.... Let us brighten the remaining years of our
lives with words that bring courage and cheer and hope. The enemy
will cast his shadow between Christ and our souls. He will tempt us
to talk in a doubting, faithless way. But when disagreeable thoughts
seek for utterance, do not give expression to them. Talk faith. Talk
of the grace of our Lord and Saviour, of His love and mercy, of the
beauty of His character. Let it become natural for the lips to give
utterance to precious, inspiring thoughts.—Lt 14, 1900.
Conversion of the Tongue—The tongue is an unruly member,
but it should not be so. It should be converted; for the talent of
speech is a very precious talent. Christ is ever ready to impart of His
riches, and we should gather the jewels that come from Him, that,
when we speak, these jewels may drop from our lips.—Testimonies
for the Church 6:173, 174. [16]
A Means in the Advancement of His Kingdom—Speech is a
talent, and can be used to honor or dishonor God. We are accountable
for our use of the talent of words.... The talent of speech, of memory,
of property, all are to accumulate for the glory of God, to advance
His kingdom.—Lt 44, 1900. [17]
Chapter 2—Design for Communication
Words the Expression of Thought—Our words index the state

of our heart; and whether men talk much or little, their words ex-
press the character of their thoughts. A man’s character may be
quite accurately estimated by the nature of his conversation. Sound,
truthful words have the right ring in them.—Sons and Daughters of
God, 180.
Communication With God and Man—Speech is one of the
great gifts of God. It is the means by which the thoughts of the heart
are communicated. It is with the tongue that we offer prayer and
praise to God. With the tongue we convince and persuade. With the
tongue we comfort and bless, soothing the bruised, wounded soul.
With the tongue we may make known the wonders of the grace of
God. With the tongue also we may utter perverse things, speaking
words that sting like an adder.
The tongue is a little member, but the words it frames have great
power. The Lord declares, “The tongue can no man tame.” It has
set nation against nation, and has caused war and bloodshed. Words
[18] have kindled fires that have been hard to quench. They have also
brought joy and gladness to many hearts. And when words are
spoken because God says, “Speak unto them My words,” they often
cause sorrow unto repentance.
Of the unsanctified tongue the apostle James writes: “The tongue
is a fire, a world of iniquity; so is the tongue among our members,
that it defileth the whole body, and setteth on fire the course of
nature; and it is set on fire of hell.” Satan puts into the mind thoughts
which the Christian should never utter. The scornful retort, the
bitter, passionate utterance, the cruel, suspicious charge, are from
him. How many words are spoken that do only harm to those
who utter them and to those who hear! Hard words beat upon the
heart, awaking to life its worst passions. Those who do evil with
their tongues, who sow discord by selfish, jealous words, grieve the
10
Chapter 2—Design for Communication 11
Holy Spirit; for they are working at cross-purposes with God.—The

Review and Herald, May 12, 1910.
A Power for Good—The apostle, seeing the inclination to abuse
the gift of speech, gives direction concerning its use. “Let no corrupt
communication proceed out of your mouth,” he says, “but that which
is good to the use of edifying.” The word “corrupt” means here any
word that would make an impression detrimental to holy principles
and undefiled religion, any communication that would eclipse the
view of Christ, and blot from the mind true sympathy and love.
It includes impure hints, which, unless instantly resisted, lead to
great sin. Upon everyone is laid the duty of barring the way against [19]
corrupt communications....
Guard well the talent of speech; for it is a mighty power for evil
as well as for good. You cannot be too careful of what you say;
for the words you utter show what power is controlling the heart.
If Christ rules there, your words will reveal the beauty, purity, and
fragrance of a character molded and fashioned by His will. But if
you are under the guidance of the enemy of all good, your words
will echo his sentiments.
The great responsibility bound up in the use of the gift of speech
is plainly made known by the Word of God. “By thy words thou
shalt be justified, and by thy words thou shalt be condemned,” Christ
declared. And the psalmist asks, “Lord, who shall abide in Thy
tabernacle? who shall dwell in Thy holy hill? He that walketh
uprightly, and worketh righteousness, and speaketh the truth in his
heart. He that backbiteth not with his tongue, nor doeth evil to his
neighbor, nor taketh up a reproach against his neighbor. In whose
eyes a vile person is contemned; but he honoreth them that fear the
Lord. He that sweareth to his own hurt, and changeth not. He that
putteth not out his money to usury, nor taketh reward against the
innocent. He that doeth these things shall never be moved” [Psalm
15:1-5].
“Keep thy tongue from evil, and thy lips from speaking guile”
[Psalm 34:13]. The wild beast of the forest may be tamed, “but
the tongue can no man tame” [James 3:8]. Only through Christ
can we gain the victory over the desire to speak hasty, unChristlike [20]
words. When in His strength we refuse to give utterance to Satan’s
suggestions, the plant of bitterness in our hearts withers and dies.
12 The Voice in Speech and Song
The Holy Spirit can make the tongue a savor of life unto life.—The
An Index of Character—Your words are an index of your char-
acter, and they will testify against you. Here we see the importance
of carefulness in the employment of speech. This talent is a great
power for good when it is used aright, but it is just as great a power
for evil when the words spoken are poisonous. If this talent is abused,
out of the heart proceed evil things. The words are either a savor of
life unto life or of death unto death....
Shall we not all, old and young, learn to converse in the language
that is spoken by those who are translated into God’s kingdom? Shall
not our words be such as will be heard with pleasure by our Heavenly
Father?
As those who claim to be Christians, we are under solemn obliga-
tions to reveal the truth of our profession by our words. The tongue
is a little member, but what an amount of good it can do if the heart
is pure! If the heart is stored with good things, if it is stored with
Christlike tenderness, sympathy, and politeness, this will be shown
by the words spoken and the actions performed. The light shining
from the Word of God is our guide. Nothing so weakens a church as
a wrong use of the talent of speech. We dishonor our Leader when
[21] our words are not such as should come from the lips of a Christian.
“Work out your own salvation with fear and trembling. For it
is God which worketh in you both to will and to do of His good
pleasure” [Philippians 2:12, 13]. The quality of our works is shown
by our words. When our words and works harmonize in Christ, we
show that we are consecrated to God, perfecting holiness in His fear.
As we give ourselves, soul, body, and spirit, to Him, He works in us,
both to will and to do of His good pleasure.
The love of Christ in the heart is revealed by the expression of
praise. Those who are consecrated to God will show this by their
sanctified conversation. If their hearts are pure, their words will be
pure, showing an elevated principle working in a sanctified direction.
The mind will be absorbed in holy contemplation, and there will be
a sense of the presence of God.—The Review and Herald, January
18, 1898.
Means of Declaring God’s Love—Speech is a talent. Of all the
gifts bestowed on the human family, none should be more appreci-
Chapter 2—Design for Communication 13
ated than the gift of speech. It is to be used to declare God’s wisdom

and wondrous love. Thus the treasures of His grace and wisdom are
to be communicated.—Counsels on Stewardship, 115.
Words Seasoned With Wisdom and Purity—By our words
we are to be justified or condemned. When in the final judgment we
stand before the tribunal of God, it is our words that will justify or
condemn us. Much more than we realize is involved in the matter [22]
of speech Let your lips be touched with a live coal from the divine
altar. Utter only words of truth. Watch and pray, that your words and
deeds may ever confess Christ. Let your words be seasoned with
wisdom and purity.—Lt 283, 1904.
Impartation of Christ’s Grace—The riches of the grace of
Christ which He is ever ready to bestow upon us, we are to impart
in true, hopeful words. “Rejoice in the Lord alway: and again I say,
Rejoice.” If we would guard our words, so that nothing but kindness
shall escape our lips, we will give evidence that we are preparing
to become members of the heavenly family. In words and works
we shall show forth the praises of Him who has called us out of
darkness into His marvelous light. Oh, what a reformative influence
would go forth if we as a people would value at its true worth the
talent of speech and its influence upon human souls!—.
Counsel, Encouragement, and Reproof—The talent of speech
was given to us that we might speak, not words of faultfinding, but
words of counsel, words of encouragement, words of reproof.—The
Review and Herald, July 20, 1905. [23]
Chapter 3—A Tool for Evangelism
Speech for Witnessing—God has given us the gift of speech

that we may recite to others His dealing with us, that His love and
compassion may touch other hearts, and that praise may arise from
other souls also to Him who has called them out of darkness into His
marvelous light. The Lord has said, “Ye are My witnesses” (Isaiah
43:10). But all who are called to be witnesses for Christ must learn
of Him, that they may be efficient witnesses. As children of the
heavenly King, they should educate themselves to bear testimony in
a clear, distinct voice, and in such a manner that no one may receive
the impression that they are reluctant to tell of the mercies of the
Lord.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 243.
Communication of the Truth—The gospel of Christ is to be
proclaimed by the voice. With the talent of speech we are to com-
municate the truth as we have opportunity. It should ever be used in
God’s service.—The Review and Herald, September 12, 1899.
Correct Language and Cultivated Voices—Oh, that all might
[24] search diligently to know what is truth, to study earnestly that
they might have correct language and cultivated voices, that
they might present the truth in all its elevated and ennobling
beauty.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 256.
A Channel for the Knowledge of God—The faculty of speech
is a precious gift, and if the noblest of our faculties, reason, is set
to the task of knowing God, then the gift of speech may become a
means of grace to others, a channel through which the knowledge of
God may be communicated.—Lt 59, 1895.
The Way to Present Christ—God gave men eyes, that they
might behold wondrous things out of His law. He gave them the
hearing ear, that they might listen to His message, spoken by the
living preacher. He gave men the talent of speech, that they might
present Christ as the sin-pardoning Saviour. With the heart man
believeth unto righteousness, and with the mouth confession is made
unto salvation.—The Adventist Home, 401.
14
Chapter 3—A Tool for Evangelism 15
Means of Exalting Sacred Themes—He who teaches the Word

of God should cultivate his powers of speech, that the sacred themes
upon which he dwells may be presented in the very best manner,
that the precious golden oil may cause his lamp to reflect clear and
distinct rays. The truth should lose none of its power and attractive
loveliness because of the channel through which it is communicated.
We should seek to cultivate the purest, highest, noblest qualifications, [25]
that we may rightly represent the sacred, holy character of the work
and cause of God.—The Review and Herald, April 20, 1897.
The Advancement of His Glory—Your speech is a talent, given
you by God, not for your amusement, but for God’s service, to
be used for the advancement of His glory by being rightly em-
ployed.—Lt 89, 1897.
A Power in the Winning of Souls—There is great pathos and
music in the human voice, and if the learner will make determined
efforts, he will acquire habits of talking and singing that will be to
him a power to win souls to Christ.—Evangelism, 504.
Privilege of Speech—Christians are to be Christlike in their
earnest desire to save souls. They should regard it as the highest
honor to be enlisted in Christ’s army. They should thank God for
the privilege of using the talent of speech to win souls to Christ.
They should look upon no privilege as more precious than that of
imparting to others the knowledge they have received.—The Review
and Herald, December 24, 1901.
Salvation for Your Neighbors—Church members, let the light
shine forth. Let your voices be heard in humble prayer, in witness
against intemperance, the folly and the amusements of this world,
and in the proclamation of the truth for this time. Your voice, your
influence, your time—all these are gifts from God and are to be used [26]
in winning souls to Christ.
Visit your neighbors and show an interest in the salvation of their
souls. Arouse every spiritual energy to action. Tell those whom
you visit that the end of all things is at hand. The Lord Jesus Christ
will open the door of their hearts and will make upon their minds
lasting impressions.... Your warm, fervent words will convince them
that you have found the Pearl of great price. Let your cheerful,
encouraging words show that you have certainly found the higher
way.—Testimonies for the Church 9:38.
Purity of Language—As you seek to draw others within the

circle of His love, let the purity of your language, the unselfishness
of your service, the joyfulness of your demeanor, bear witness to the
power of His grace. Give to the world so pure and righteous a repre-
sentation of Him, that men shall behold Him in His beauty.—The
Ministry of Healing, 156.
Manner of Speaking a Representation of Christ—From the
light I have had, the ministry is a sacred and exalted office, and
those who accept this position should have Christ in their hearts
and manifest an earnest desire to represent Him worthily before the
people in all their acts, in their dress, in their speaking, and even
in their manner of speaking.—Testimonies for the Church 2:615.
(Italics supplied.)
God’s Mouthpiece—The messenger who bears the word of life
[27] to a perishing world is bound to speak the truth. The Lord Jesus is by
his side, ready to enlarge the narrow confines of human knowledge,
that all may see that the teacher is presenting the gift of imperishable
wealth to all who will believe on Christ. There is power in Christ to
redeem the mental and moral character, and to mold the man after
the divine likeness.—The Review and Herald, July 19, 1898.
Need of Tact in Telling of the Saviour—Wherever we are, we
should watch for opportunities of speaking to others of the Saviour.
If we follow Christ’s example in doing good, hearts will open to us
as they did to Him. Not abruptly, but with tact born of divine love,
we can tell them of Him who is the “Chiefest among ten thousand”
and the One “altogether lovely.” This is the very highest work in
which we can employ the talent of speech. It was given to us that we
might present Christ as the sin-pardoning Saviour.—Christ’s Object
Lessons, 339.
Right Expression in Words of Truth—To learn to tell convinc-
ingly and impressively that which one knows is of especial value
to those who desire to be workers in the cause of God. The more
expression we can put into the words of truth, the more effective
these words will be on those who hear. A proper presentation of the
Lord’s truth is worthy of our highest effort.—Counsels to Parents,
Teachers, and Students, 217.
Hope to the Soul—He who is your neighbor is to be earnestly
sought for and labored for. Is he ignorant? Let your communication
Chapter 3—A Tool for Evangelism 17
make him more intelligent. Is he downcast and discouraged? Let [28]

your words speak hope to his soul.... By the influence of words
spoken from a heart full of love, the discouraged ones may be-
come trophies of grace—heirs of God, and joint heirs with Jesus
Christ.—The Review and Herald, February 16, 1897.
Thoughts Suggested by God—If you will only follow on to
know the Lord, and do His bidding, you will know by your experi-
ence that God will suggest thoughts to you as you attempt to speak
words to those who are around you, to restrain them from doing
wrong, and to point out to them the way of life.—Manuscript 61,
1907.
Tender Words, Not Harsh—Talk to souls in peril and get them
to behold Jesus upon the cross, dying to make it possible for Him to
pardon. Talk to the sinner with your own heart overflowing with the
tender, pitying love of Christ. Let there be deep earnestness; but not
a harsh, loud note should be heard from the one who is trying to win
the soul to look and live....
Christ crucified—talk it, pray it, sing it, and it will break and
win hearts. This is the power and wisdom of God to gather souls for
Christ. Formal, set phrases, the presentation of merely argumentative
subjects, is productive of little good.—Testimonies for the Church
6:67.
The Law of Kindness on Your Lips—Find access to the people
in whose neighborhood you live. As you tell them of the truth, use
words of Christlike sympathy.... Utter not one unkind word. Let [29]
the love of Christ be in your hearts, the law of kindness on your
lips.—Testimonies for the Church 9:41.
Gentle Words As Still Showers—We need to have close com-
munion with God lest self rise up, as it did in Jehu, and we pour
forth a torrent of words that are unbefitting, that are not as dew, nor
as the still showers, which revive the withering plants. Let our words
be gentle as we seek to win souls. God will be wisdom to him who
seeks for wisdom from a divine source. We are to seek opportunities
on every hand. We are to watch unto prayer, and be ready always to
give an answer to everyone who asks a reason for the hope that is in
us. Lest we shall impress unfavorably one soul for whom Christ has
died, we should keep our hearts uplifted to God, so that when the
opportunity presents itself, we may have the right word to speak at

the right time.—The Review and Herald, October 7, 1902.
Deeds Combined With Words—God desires that the bounties
He has freely given to His children be communicated to those who
do not possess so many temporal blessings. By this communication,
by the utterance of kindly words, accompanied with deeds of love,
those who work for God will find entrance to hearts, and win others
to Christ. This part of religion we are not to forget; “for with such
sacrifices God is well pleased.”—The Review and Herald, February
[30] 18, 1902.
Chapter 4—Importance of Speech Education
Most Important Branch—The talent of speech is to be care-

fully studied and carefully guarded. This is the most important
branch of education, but one which is sadly neglected in all our
associations. The power to communicate to our associates may be a
great blessing or a great curse.—Manuscript 77, 1897.
Essential Subject for Our Schools—The education of the
speech must not be neglected in our schools. Those who go into
society with a desire and a determination to be as Christ commanded
them to be, will not condescend to unchristian conversation. They
will seek to represent Christ by their spirit and words.—The Review
and Herald, January 25, 1898.
Sanctified Conversation—The light given me by the word of
God is that the speech needs to be converted and sanctified. The
Lord requires that education should be given in the science of con-
versation. This faculty has been much abused and perverted. It has
not been held as a precious gift from God, to be used to glorify His
name. The words are a power for good or evil, a savor of life unto
life, or of death unto death. Choice words must be spoken by those [31]
who would do service for Christ. Haphazard words, hasty, common
words, talking for the sake of talking, when silence would be better,
is a sin. Those who are the most wordy exercise no wholesome in-
fluence upon the society in which they live and move. Bible religion
is not to be boastfully paraded, but quietly practiced in good words
and works.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
Evil Speaking a Misdemeanor—Notice these words: “And let
the peace of God rule in your heart.” If you do this, a flood of words
that have in them no virtue or goodness, will not pour from your lips.
“To the which also ye are called in one body, and be ye thankful.
Let the word of God dwell in you richly in all wisdom, teaching and
admonishing one another in psalms, and hymns, and spiritual songs,
singing with grace in your hearts to the Lord. And whatsoever ye do
19
in word or deed, do all in the name of the Lord Jesus, giving thanks
to God and the Father by Him.”
This is the education we need in our schools. The hasty, reckless
use of the faculty of speech lies at the foundation of nearly all the
church troubles that exist. Evilspeaking should be dealt with as
a misdemeanor that is subject to church trial and separation from
church membership if persisted in; for the church cannot be set in
order in any other way.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
[32] Science of Conversation As Related to the Study of God’s
Word—Our education in regard to the science of conversation will
be in every way improved if we make the Word of God our study.
This branch of education has been woefully neglected. Many receive
diplomas from colleges who have not earned them by gaining an all-
round education. Teachers and pupils are apt to skip the important
matter of the education of speech. For want of training in this line,
students lose much. They go from school to be deficient all through
[33] their life experience.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
Chapter 5—The Role of Parents
Home a School for Speech Culture—It is the work of parents

to train their children to proper habits of speech. The very best
school for this culture is the home life. From the earliest years the
children should be taught to speak respectfully and lovingly to their
parents and to one another. They should be taught that only words
of gentleness, truth, and purity must pass their lips. Let the parents
themselves be daily learners in the school of Christ. Then by precept
and example they can teach their children the use of “sound speech,
that cannot be condemned.” Titus 2:8. This is one of the greatest
and most responsible of their duties.—Christ’s Object Lessons, 337,
338.
The Parents’ Part and God’s Part—Fathers and mothers, you
have a solemn work to do. The eternal salvation of your children
depends upon your course of action. How will you successfully
educate your children? Not by scolding, for it will do no good. Talk
to your children as if you had confidence in their intelligence. Deal
with them kindly, tenderly, lovingly. Tell them what God would
have them do. Tell them that God would have them educated and [34]
trained to be laborers together with Him. When you act your part,
you can trust the Lord to act His part.—Child Guidance, 33.
The Teaching of Correct Speech Habits—Instruction is to be
constantly given to encourage the children in the formation of cor-
rect habits in speech, in voice, in deportment.—Fundamentals of
Christian Education, 267.
Sunshine or Shadows—It is important that children and youth
should be trained to guard their words and deeds; for their course
of action causes sunshine or shadow, not only in their own home,
but also with all with whom they come in contact.—The Adventist
Home, 437.
Organs of Speech a Living Machinery—One of the finest and
most elevating branches of education is that of knowing how to
address members of the household, that the influence of the words
21
spoken will be pure and incorruptible. The proper conversation of a

Christian is that which will enable him to interchange ideas. Loud-
voiced words, that help and bless no one, might better be changed
for words of good, elevated, enlightened common sense. This line of
work is the greatest missionary enterprise in which any Christian can
engage. Those who use the organs of speech as the living machinery
of God, become living stones in His temple, emitting light and
knowledge.
The warnings and instruction of the Word of God are least heeded
[35] on the subject of speech. If students would live according to the
Bible rule, the glory of God would be their aim in the exercise of
the God-given faculty of speech. They would diligently educate
the tongue, so that it would not utter strange and perverse things.
Thus they would indeed be overcomers in this exercise, which it
is so difficult to practice. Great advancement would be made in
garrisoning the citadel of the soul, that Satan should not enter to take
[36] possession.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
Chapter 6—The Role of Teachers
A Message of Eternal Import—Every Christian is called to

make known to others the unsearchable riches of Christ; therefore
he should seek for perfection in speech. He should present the Word
of God in a way that will commend it to the hearers. God does not
design that His human channels shall be uncouth. It is not His will
that man shall belittle or degrade the heavenly current that flows
through him to the world.
We should look to Jesus, the perfect Pattern; we should pray for
the aid of the Holy Spirit, and in His strength we should seek to train
every organ for perfect work.
Especially is this true of those who are called to public service.
Every minister and every teacher should bear in mind that he is
giving to the people a message that involves eternal interests. The
truth spoken will judge them in the great day of final reckoning.
And with some souls the manner of the one delivering the message
will determine its reception or rejection. Then let the word be so
spoken that it will appeal to the understanding and impress the heart.
Slowly, distinctly, and solemnly should it be spoken, yet with all [37]
the earnestness which its importance demands.—Christ’s Object
Lessons, 336.
Obedience to God’s Word—In every line of instruction, teach-
ers are to seek to impart light from the Word of God, and to show the
importance of obedience to a “Thus saith the Lord.” The education
should be such that the students will make right principles the guide
of every action. This is the education that will abide through the
eternal ages.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 516.
The Cleansed Life an Effective Example—The teacher whose
soul is stayed upon Christ will speak and act like a Christian. Such
a one will not be satisfied until the truth cleanses his life from every
unessential thing. He will not be satisfied unless his mind is day
by day molded by the holy influences of the Spirit of God. Then
Christ can speak to the heart, and His voice, saying, “This is the
23
way; walk ye in it,” will be heard and obeyed.—Fundamentals of

Encouraging Words—Show sympathy and tenderness in deal-
ing with your pupils. Reveal the love of God. Let the words you
speak be kind and encouraging. Then as you work for your students,
what a transformation will be wrought in the characters of those
who have not been properly trained in the home! The Lord can
make even youthful teachers channels for the revealing of His grace,
if they will consecrate themselves to Him.—Counsels to Parents,
[38] Teachers, and Students, 152.
Force and Enthusiasm—The teacher should constantly aim at
simplicity and effectiveness. He should teach largely by illustration,
and even in dealing with older pupils should be careful to make
every explanation plain and clear. Many pupils well advanced in
years are but children in understanding.
An important element in educational work is enthusiasm. On
this point there is a useful suggestion in a remark once made by a
celebrated actor. The archbishop of Canterbury had put to him the
question why actors in a play affect their audiences so powerfully by
speaking of things imaginary, while ministers of the gospel often af-
fect theirs so little by speaking of things real. “With due submission
to your grace,” replied the actor, “permit me to say that the reason is
plain: It lies in the power of enthusiasm. We on the stage speak of
things imaginary as if they were real, and you in the pulpit speak of
things real as if they were imaginary.”
The teacher in his work is dealing with things real, and he should
speak of them with all the force and enthusiasm which a knowledge
of their reality and importance can inspire.—Education, 233.
A Few Words, Not Long Speeches—Those who instruct chil-
dren should avoid tedious remarks. Short remarks and to the point
will have a happy influence. If much is to be said, make up for
briefness by frequency. A few words of interest now and then will
[39] be more beneficial than to have it all at once. Long speeches burden
the small minds of children. Too much talk will lead them to loathe
even spiritual instruction, just as overeating burdens the stomach
and lessens the appetite, leading even to a loathing of food. The
minds of the people may be glutted with too much speechifying.
Labor for the church, but especially for the youth, should be line
Chapter 6—The Role of Teachers 25
upon line, precept upon precept, here a little, and there a little. Give
minds time to digest the truths you feed them. Children must be
drawn toward heaven, not rashly, but very gently.—Testimonies for
the Church 2:420.
Every Word Distinctly Spoken—The teacher of truth is to take
heed how he presents the truth. He is to speak every word plainly
and distinctly, with that earnest conviction which carries conviction
to hearts. If the words spoken are crowded upon each other, the
impression that should be made is lost. The talent of speech needs
to be cultivated, that the truth be spoken not excitedly, but slowly
and distinctly, that not a syllable may be lost.—The Southern Work,
October 27, 1903.
Correct Use of Language—One of the most essential qualifi-
cations of a teacher is the ability to speak and read distinctly and
forcibly. He who knows how to use the English language fluently
and correctly can exert a far greater influence than one who is unable
to express his thoughts readily and clearly.—Counsels to Parents,
Teachers, and Students, 216. [40]
Intelligent Articulation—The teacher should cultivate his pow-
ers, cultivate his speech so as to speak distinctly, giving intelligent
articulation.—Counsels on Sabbath School Work, 97.
Simplicity of Christ’s Words—The Pharisees scoffed at Christ;
they criticized the simplicity of His language, which was so plain that
the child, the aged, the common people heard Him gladly, and were
charmed by His words. The Sadducees also derided Him because
His discourses were so unlike anything delivered by their rulers and
scribes. Those Jewish teachers spoke in monotonous tones, and
the plainest and most precious scriptures were made uninteresting
and unintelligible, buried under such a mass of tradition and learned
lore that after the rabbis had spoken, the people knew less of the
meaning of the Scriptures than before they listened. There were
many souls starving for the Bread of Life, and Jesus fed them with
pure, simple truth. In His teaching He drew illustrations from the
things of nature and the common transactions of life, with which
they were familiar. Thus the truth became to them a living reality;
the scenes of nature and the affairs of daily life were ever repeating to
them the Saviour’s precious teachings. Christ’s manner of teaching
was just what He desires His servants to follow.—Fundamentals of

Christian Education, 242, 243.
Kindness in Reproof—Let the teacher bring peace and love and
cheerfulness into his work. Let him not allow himself to become
[41] angry or provoked. The Lord is looking upon him with intense
interest, to see if he is being molded by the divine Teacher.
The child who loses his self-control is far more excusable than
the teacher who allows himself to become angry and impatient.
When a stern reproof is to be given, it may still be given in kindness.
Let the teacher beware of making the child stubborn by speaking to
him harshly. Let him follow every correction with drops of the oil
of kindness. He should never forget that he is dealing with Christ in
the person of one of Christ’s little ones.
Let it be a settled maxim that in all school discipline, faithfulness
and love are to reign. When a student is corrected in such a way
that he is not made to feel that the teacher desires to humiliate him,
love for the teacher springs up in his heart.—Counsels to Parents,
[42] Teachers, and Students, 212.
Chapter 7—Students and Speech
Speech As Influenced by the Truth Within—If students will

have the moral courage to live the truth day by day, its sanctifying
power will have a wonderful influence on their speech. They may
make some alteration in their ways and manners, but no fruit is
produced until the speech is sanctified. They may hear the truth, but
they will make no decided change unless they eat the Word of God.
Until the truth becomes a part of them, they may assent to it till it
is opposed, but they show by their speech that the Word is not to
them the bread of life. God has given to everyone the opportunity
and privilege of becoming a partaker of the divine nature, thus
becoming one with Jesus Christ. But many show by their words that
they do not feed on Jesus Christ, and therefore they cannot shine,
they cannot communicate that which is not their meat and drink.
Their use of the talent of speech shows that they have gathered only
chaff.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
Cultivation of the Voice—Young men and women, has God
placed in your hearts a desire to do service for Him? Then by all
means cultivate the voice to the utmost of your ability, so that you [43]
can make plain the precious truth to others. Do not fall into the
habit of praying so indistinctly and in so low a tone that your prayers
need an interpreter. Pray simply, but clearly and distinctly. To let
the voice sink so low that it cannot be heard, is no evidence of
humility.—Gospel Workers, 89.
Power to Communicate—The extent of a Christian’s useful-
ness is measured by his power to communicate that which he has
received, and which has become experience to him. Education falls
short if students do not obtain a knowledge of how to use the faculty
of speech, and how to use to the best advantage the education they
have obtained. The youth are to commence when young to learn the
proper manner of speech.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
Thorough Training in Correct Language—If your students,
besides studying God’s Word, learn no more than how to use cor-
27
rectly the English language in reading, writing, and speaking, a

great work will have been accomplished. Those who are trained for
service in the Lord’s cause should be taught how to talk properly in
ordinary conversation and before congregations. Many a laborer’s
usefulness is marred by his ignorance in regard to correct breathing
and clear, forcible speaking. Many have not learned to give the right
emphasis to the words they read and speak. Often the enunciation is
[44] indistinct. A thorough training in the use of the English language is
of far more value to a youth than a superficial study of foreign lan-
guages, to the neglect of his mother tongue.—Counsels to Parents,
Teachers, and Students, 207, 208.
Reading and Speaking With Ease—A great injury is often
done our young men by permitting them to commence to preach
when they have not sufficient knowledge of the Scriptures to rep-
resent our faith in an intelligent manner. Some who enter the field
are mere novices in the Scriptures. In other things also they are
incompetent and inefficient. They cannot read the Scriptures without
hesitating, miscalling words, and jumbling them together in such a
manner that the Word of God is abused. Those who are not qualified
to present the truth in a proper manner need not be perplexed with re-
gard to their duty. Their place is that of learners, not teachers. Young
men who wish to prepare for the ministry are greatly benefited by
attending our college; but advantages are still needed that they may
be qualified to become acceptable speakers. A teacher should be
employed to educate the youth to speak without wearing the vocal
organs. The manners also should receive attention.—Testimonies
for the Church 4:405, 406.
Perfection of Speech and Voice—The teachers in our schools
should not tolerate in the students ungainly attitudes and uncouth
gestures, wrong intonations in reading, or incorrect accents or em-
phasis. Perfection of speech and voice should be urged upon every
[45] student. Because of carelessness and bad training, habits are often
contracted which are great hindrances in the work of a minister who
has otherwise educated talent. The student must be impressed that he
has it in his power, by combining grace with effort, to make himself
a man. The mental and physical capabilities with which God has
adorned him may by cultivation and painstaking effort become a
power to benefit his fellow men.—Evangelism, 668, 669.
Chapter 7—Students and Speech 29
Need of Improving Tones of the Voice—Students, God has

given you the talent of speech. He desires you to improve this talent.
You can improve the tones of the voice. Be determined to make
yourself, through the grace of God, as perfect as possible. If you
are correct in speech and action, those who associate with you will
be blessed by the association. Those who are hasty and impetuous
in speech say a great many things they will not wish to meet in the
judgment.
Do not let a word fall from your lips that will stir up strife in
another heart. God desires your words to be of such a character
that they will bring sunshine instead of gloom, harmony instead of
animosity.—Manuscript 65, 1901.
Ability to Speak Plainly—Unless students who are preparing
for work in the cause of God are trained to speak in a clear, straight-
forward manner, they will be shorn of half their influence for good.
Whatever his calling is to be, the student should learn to control
the voice. The ability to speak plainly and distinctly, in full, round [46]
tones, is invaluable in any line of work, and it is indispensable to
those who desire to become ministers, evangelists, Bible workers,
or canvassers.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 217.
Watchfulness of Manner, Tone, and Language—The work-
man for God should make earnest efforts to become a representative
of Christ, discarding all uncomely gestures and uncouth speech.
He should endeavor to use correct language. There is a large class
who are careless in the way they speak, yet by careful, painstaking
attention these may become representatives of the truth. Every day
they should make advancement. They should not detract from their
usefulness and influence by cherishing defects of manner, tone, or
language. Common, cheap expressions should be replaced by sound,
pure words. By constant watchfulness and earnest discipline the
Christian youth may keep his tongue from evil and his lips from
speaking guile.
We should be careful not to give an incorrect pronunciation of
our words. There are men among us who in theory know better
than to use incorrect language, yet who in practice make frequent
mistakes.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 238, 239.
Speaking With Respect to All—The talent of speech is a very
precious talent, and should in no case be perverted. The tongue
is an unruly member, but it should not be so. That member which

is improperly used in profane speech should be converted to utter
[47] praise to God. If all the students would make decided efforts to
change their mode of thinking, of speaking, and of acting, in the
family circle restraining all words that are not kind and courteous,
and speaking with respect to all; if they would bear in mind that they
are here preparing to become members of the family in heaven, what
a reformatory influence would go forth from every home! ...
The natural inclinations followed will work out in inconsistencies
of conduct, in wrong speech, in disregard of God’s Word, in profane
language, in the thoughts.—Manuscript 77, 1897.
Scale of Usefulness—The young men and women who join the
church should have a special education in the work for which they
are adapted. But if one continues to choose a low, common train of
conversation, receive him not as a worker. He will do more than can
be counteracted to spoil the other workers.... The words, the spirit,
the attitude, determine the scale of usefulness.—The Review and
[48] Herald, March 22, 1898.
Chapter 8—The Influence of Words
Tongue Control by Divine Grace—My brethren and sisters,

how are you employing the gift of speech? Have you learned so to
control the tongue that it shall ever obey the dictates of an enlight-
ened conscience and holy affections? Is your conversation free from
levity, pride and malice, deceit and impurity? Are you without guile
before God? Words exert a telling power. Satan will, if possible,
keep the tongue active in his service. Of ourselves we cannot control
the unruly member. Divine grace is our only hope.—Testimonies
for the Church 5:175.
An Influence to Balance Souls—Words spoken in season, how
good are they! How much strength a word of hope, courage, and
determination in a right course will give one who is inclined to slide
into habits that are demoralizing! The firm purpose you may possess
in carrying out good principles will have an influence to balance
souls in the right direction.—Messages to Young People, 125.
Choice of Words in Light of the Judgment—If you cherish
a habitual impression that God sees and hears all that you do and [49]
say, and keeps a faithful record of all your words and actions, and
that you must meet it all, then in all you do and say you will seek
to follow the dictates of an enlightened and wakeful conscience.
Your tongue will be used to the glory of God and will be a source of
blessing to yourself and to others. But if you separate from God, as
you have been doing, take heed lest your tongue shall prove a world
of iniquity and bring upon you fearful condemnation; for souls will
be lost through you.—Testimonies for the Church 4:244.
Links in the Chain of Human Events—You may think that
what you do or say is of little consequence, when the most important
results for good or evil are the consequence of our words and actions.
The words and actions looked upon as so small and unimportant
are links in the long chain of human events.—Testimonies for the
Church 3:542.
31
Christ’s Way—God’s servants in this age have been given most

solemn truths to proclaim, and their actions and methods and plans
must correspond to the importance of their message. If you are
presenting the word in Christ’s way, your audience will be deeply
impressed with the truths you teach. The conviction will come to
them that this is the word of the living God.—Testimonies for the
Church 9:143.
Importance of Every Word—Every uttered word exerts an in-
fluence, every action involves a train of responsibility. No one can
[50] live to himself in this world, even if he would. Each one forms a part
of the great web of humanity, and through our individual threads of
influence, we are linked to the universe. Christ used His influence
to draw men to God, and He has left us an example of the way in
which we should speak and act. A person who is molded by the
Spirit of God will know how to speak a “word in season to him
that is weary,” and will realize the highest human blessedness—the
joy of imparting to others the precious treasures of the wisdom and
grace of Christ. But those who permit themselves to be controlled
by the enemy of all good will speak words which should never be
uttered.—The Review and Herald, February 16, 1897.
Impress of Every Word and Act—“We are laborers together
with God.” 1 Corinthians 3:9. He will use you and me and each hu-
man being who enters His service, if we will submit to His guidance.
Each one is to stand in his watchtower, listening attentively to that
which the Spirit has to say to him, remembering that his every word
and act makes an impression, not only on his own character, but on
the characters of those with whom he is connected.—Testimonies
Words of Love—Our duty is to live in the atmosphere of Christ’s
love, to breathe His love deeply, and to reflect its warmth around
us. Oh, what a sphere of influence is open before us! How carefully
we should cultivate the garden of the soul, so that it may bring forth
[51] only pure, sweet, fragrant flowers! Words of love, tenderness, and
charity sanctify our influence over others.—Our High Calling, 175.
A Savor of Life or Death—The words we utter today in the
ears of the people, the works we are doing, the spirit of the message
we are bearing, will be a savor of life unto life or of death unto
death.—Testimonies for the Church 5:716.
Chapter 8—The Influence of Words 33
Blessing or Curse—Day by day we are sowing seeds for the

future harvest. We cannot be too careful of the seed we sow by our
words. Often words are carelessly spoken and forgotten, but these
words, for good or ill, will bring forth a harvest. Sow one unkind,
harsh word, and this seed, finding soil in the minds of the hearers,
will spring up to bear fruit after its kind. Sow one seed in loving,
gentle, Christlike words, and it will bring you rich returns. Let us
guard ourselves, lest we speak words that are not a blessing, but a
curse.—Our High Calling, 294.
Which Controlling Power?—You cannot be too careful of what
you say, for the words you utter show what power is controlling
your mind and heart. If Christ rules in your heart, your words will
reveal the purity, beauty, and fragrance of a character molded and
fashioned by His will. But since his fall, Satan has been an accuser
of the brethren, and you must be on guard lest you reveal the same
spirit.—Mind, Character, and Personality 2:579, 580.
Effective Living and Speaking—By the calmness of our con- [52]
versation we can bear good witness for Him [God]. Correct living
and correct speaking have a greater influence for good than all the
sermons that can be preached.—Manuscript 65, 1901.
Righteous words and deeds have a more powerful influence for
good than all the sermons that can be preached.—My Life Today,
114.
Judicious Conversation—Judicious conversation and right ac-
tions exert an influence which is a power in the right direction. But
generally those who talk most are those who do the least deep,
earnest thinking, the least work for the Master. They think that by
talking they can make up for their deficiencies. But it is doers of the
Word that are justified before God.—Manuscript 53, 1899.
Connection Between Our Hearts and Our Words—We shall
reveal what is in our hearts by the words we speak. The connection
between the heart and the words of our mouth is very intimate, and
by our words we shall be individFually judged in the last day....
Our thoughts produce our words, and our words react upon our
thoughts.—Lt 16a, 1895.
An Indication of Character—The words are more than an in-
dication of character; they have power to react on the character.
Men are influenced by their own words. Often under a momentary
impulse, prompted by Satan, they give utterance to jealousy or evil

[53] surmising, expressing that which they do not really believe; but
the expression reacts on the thoughts. They are deceived by their
words and come to believe that true which was spoken at Satan’s
instigation. Having once expressed an opinion or decision, they are
often too proud to retract it, and try to prove themselves in the right,
until they come to believe that they are.
It is dangerous to utter a word of doubt, dangerous to question
and criticize divine light. The habit of careless and irreverent criti-
cism reacts upon the character in fostering irreverence and unbelief.
Many a man indulging this habit has gone on unconscious of dan-
ger until he was ready to criticize and reject the work of the Holy
Spirit.—The Desire of Ages, 323.
Influence Outside the Church—The professed followers of
Christ should realize that the influence of their words and acts not
only has a bearing upon themselves, but extends outside the church.
If they could see the mischief wrought by their careless words,
the repetition of vague reports, the unjust censures, there would
be far less talking and more praying when Christians assemble
together.—The Review and Herald, October 19, 1886.
Impact on Nonbelievers—The life, the words, and the deport-
ment are the most forcible argument, the most solemn appeal, to the
careless, irreverent, and skeptical. Let the life and character be the
strong argument for Christianity; then men will be compelled to take
[54] knowledge of you that you have been with Jesus and have learned
of Him.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 478.
Influence Even After Death—There are few who realize how
far-reaching is the influence of their words and acts. How often
the errors of parents produce the most disastrous effects upon their
children and children’s children, long after the actors themselves
have been laid in the grave. Everyone is exerting an influence upon
others, and will be held accountable for the result of that influence.
Words and actions have a telling power, and the long hereafter
will show the effect of our life here. The impression made by our
words and deeds will surely react upon ourselves in blessing or in
cursing. This thought gives an awful solemnity to life, and should
draw us to God in humble prayer that He will guide us by His
wisdom.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 556.
A Thoughtless Word, a Soul’s Eternal Destiny—Let none

venture to speak lightly of the cautions given by those whose duty it
is to guard their moral and spiritual welfare. The words may seem
to be of little consequence, producing only a momentary impres-
sion on the minds of the hearers. But this is not all. In many cases
these words find a response in the unsanctified hearts of youth who
have never submitted to caution or restraint. The influence of a
thoughtless word may affect a soul’s eternal destiny. Every person
is exerting an influence upon the lives of others.—Testimonies for
the Church 4:654.
Words Fitly Spoken—The world is indeed full of hurry, and
of pride, selfishness, avarice, and violence; and it may seem to us [55]
that it is a waste of time and breath to be ever in season and out of
season, and on all occasions to hold ourselves in readiness to speak
words that are gentle, pure, elevating, chaste, and holy, in the face
of the whirlwind of confusion, bustle, and strife. And yet words fitly
spoken, coming from sanctified hearts and lips, and sustained by a
godly, consistent Christian deportment, will be as apples of gold in
pictures of silver....
You are not to wait for great occasions, or to expect extraordinary
abilities, before you work in earnest for God. You need not have a
thought of what the world will think of you. If your intercourse with
them and your godly conversation are a living testimony to them of
the purity and sincerity of your faith, and they are convinced that
you desire to benefit them, your words will not be wholly lost upon
them, but will be productive of good.—Testimonies for the Church
3:247.
Behavior Consistent With Words—If we desire to reform oth-
ers we must ourselves practice the principles which we would en-
force upon them. Words, however good, will be powerless if contra-
dicted by the daily life. Ministers of Christ, I admonish you: “Take
heed unto thyself, and unto the doctrine.” Do not excuse sins in
yourselves which you reprove in others. If you preach on meekness
and love, let these graces be exemplified in your own life. If you
urge others to be kind, courteous, and attentive at home, let your
own example give force to your admonitions.—Testimonies for the [56]
Church 5:160.
Denial of Christ by Evil Speaking—He who would confess

Christ must have Christ abiding in him. He cannot communicate
that which he has not received. The disciples might speak fluently
on doctrines, they might repeat the words of Christ Himself; but
unless they possessed Christlike meekness and love, they were not
confessing Him. A spirit contrary to the spirit of Christ would deny
Him, whatever the profession. Men may deny Christ by evilspeaking,
by foolish talking, by words that are untruthful or unkind.—The
Desire of Ages, 357.
The Cause of Nine-Tenths of Church Difficul-
ties—Unchristlike speech lies at the foundation of nine-tenths
of all the difficulties that exist in the church. Satan’s agents are
industriously trying to get professed Christians to speak unadvisedly.
When they succeed, Satan exults, because God’s followers have hurt
their influence.—The Review and Herald, November 24, 1904.
Disparaging Remarks—Many today feel at liberty to use the
talent of speech recklessly, without thinking of the influence their
words will have upon others. The Lord sends His messages by whom
He will, and those who make disparaging remarks of the messengers
and the message need to remember that they would speak in the
same way of Christ if He should come to them as He came to the
[57] Jews, with a message that did not suit their unrenewed hearts. Those
who use their speech to mimic the one who is speaking the words
of God are charged with having done this to Christ; for it is done to
Him in the person of His saints.—The Review and Herald, January
18, 1898.
Influence of Angry Words—Oh, that those who are proclaim-
ing the most solemn message ever given to the world would realize
how greatly their influence is weakened when they are suspicious of
their brethren, when they allow angry words to pass their lips! The
displeasure of God rests upon everyone who speaks harsh, unkind
words.—The Review and Herald, July 21, 1903.
Confidence in Brethren—By sowing evil in the minds of the
weak, who have no vital connection with God, by telling them how
little confidence you have in others, you tear away the hold their
brethren have on them, because you destroy their confidence in them.
But do not allow the enemy so to use your tongue; for at the day
of final reckoning, God will call you to give an account of your
words. Do not exert an influence that will break the hold of any
trembling soul from God. Even though you are not treated as you
think you should be, do not allow the root of bitterness to spring
up; for thereby many will be defiled. By your words you may cause
others to become suspicious.—The Review and Herald, August 24,
1897.
Ruin of the Weak in the Faith—Do not allow the devil to use
your tongue and your voice to ruin those weak in the faith; for at the [58]
day of final reckoning God will call upon you to give an account of
your work.—The S.D.A. Bible Commentary 3:1161.
Permanent Effect of Foolish Words—As professed Christians,
we should consider the influence our words have upon those with
whom we come into association, whether they are believers or unbe-
lievers. Our words are watched, and mischief is done by thoughtless
utterances. No after association with believers or unbelievers will
wholly counteract the unfavorable influence of thoughtless, foolish
words. Our words evidence the manner of food upon which the soul
feeds.—The S.D.A. Bible Commentary 3:1159, 1160.
Power of Example—When a crisis comes in the life of any soul,
and you attempt to give counsel or admonition, your words will have
only the weight of influence for good that your own example and
spirit have gained for you.—Thoughts from the Mount of Blessing,
127. [59]
Chapter 9—Persuasion Through Speech
Sanctified Speech the Greatest Blessing—Of all the gifts

which God has given to man, none is more noble or a greater blessing
than the gift of speech, if it is sanctified by the Holy Spirit. It is with
the tongue we convince and persuade; with it we offer prayer and
praise to God; and with it we convey rich thoughts of the Redeemer’s
love.—Testimonies to Ministers and Gospel Workers, 316, 317.
Peace in the Heart—We should show by our daily lives that
we have peace and rest in God. His peace in the heart will shine
forth in the countenance. It will give to the voice a persuasive power.
Communion with God will impart a moral elevation to the character
and to the entire course of action.—Testimonies for the Church 6:47.
Kindly, Cheerful Approach—Approach the people in a persua-
sive, kindly manner, full of cheerfulness and love for Christ.... No
human tongue can express the preciousness of the ministration of the
Word and the Holy Spirit. No human expression can portray to the fi-
[60] nite mind the value of understanding and by living faith receiving the
blessing that is given as Jesus of Nazareth passes by.—Evangelism,
444.
Persuasion for Soul Winning—The power of persuasion is a
wonderful gift. It means much to those who would win souls to
Christ.—Lt 32, 1911.
Power of the Personal Experience—When one has received
the truth in the love of it, he will make this manifest in the persuasion
of his manner and the tones of his voice. He makes known that
which he himself has heard, seen, and handled of the word of life,
that others may have fellowship with him through the knowledge
of Christ. His testimony, from lips touched with a live coal from
off the altar, is truth to the receptive heart, and works sanctification
upon the character.—The Desire of Ages, 142.
Love and Sympathy—The most persuasive eloquence is the
word that is spoken in love and sympathy. Such words will bring
light to confused minds and hope to the discouraged, brightening
38
Chapter 9—Persuasion Through Speech 39
the prospect before them. The time in which we live calls for vital,
sanctified energy; for earnestness, zeal, and the tenderest sympathy
and love; for words that will not increase misery, but will inspire
faith and hope. We are homeward bound, seeking a better country,
even an heavenly. Instead of speaking words which will rankle in the
breasts of those that hear, shall we not speak of the love wherewith
God hath loved us? Shall we not try to lighten the hearts of those [61]
around us by words of Christlike sympathy?—Our High Calling,
295.
A Reservoir of Persuasion—A conscience void of offense to-
ward God and man, a heart that feels the tenderest sympathy for
human beings, especially that they may be won for Christ, will have
the attributes that Christ had. All such will be imbued with His
Spirit. They will have a reservoir of persuasion and a storehouse of
simple eloquence.—Testimonies to Ministers and Gospel Workers,
120.
Weight of Evidence—God is presenting to the minds of men
divinely appointed precious gems of truth, appropriate for our
time. God has rescued these truths from the companionship of
error, and has placed them in their proper framework. When these
truths are given their rightful position in God’s great plan, when
they are presented intelligently and earnestly, and with reveren-
tial awe, by the Lord’s servants, many will conscientiously believe
because of the weight of evidence, without waiting for every sup-
posed difficulty which may suggest itself to their minds, to be re-
moved.—Evangelism, 122.
Greatest Rebuke to Error—People cannot be expected to see
at once the advantage of truth over the error they have cherished.
The best way to expose the fallacy of error is to present the evidences
of truth. This is the greatest rebuke that can be given to error. Dispel
the cloud of darkness resting on minds by reflecting the bright light [62]
of the Sun of Righteousness.—Evangelism, 170.
Reasoning From the Scriptures—It is not excitement we wish
to create, but deep, earnest consideration, that those who hear shall
do solid work, real, sound, genuine work that will be enduring as
eternity. We hunger not for excitement, for the sensational; the less
we have of this, the better. The calm, earnest reasoning from the
Scriptures is precious and fruitful. Here is the secret of success,
in preaching a living personal Saviour in so simple and earnest a

manner that the people may be able to lay hold by faith of the power
of the Word of life.—Evangelism, 170.
One Point at a Time—While the teacher of truth should be
faithful in presenting the gospel, let him never pour out a mass of
matter which the people cannot comprehend because it is new to
them and hard to understand. Take one point at a time, and make
that one point plain, speaking slowly and in a distinct voice. Speak
in such a way that the people shall see what is the relation of that
one point to other truths of vital importance.—Evangelism, 202.
The Sabbath School Worker—Sabbath school worker, which
will you meet, the standard of Christ or that of the world? Oh, will
you say, “I will lift the cross and follow Jesus”? Will you not cul-
tivate His tenderness in persuasion, His earnestness in exhortation,
and exemplify the exalted principles of the truth, manifesting in life
[63] and character what the religion of Christ has done for you? Shall
we not all heed the exhortation of the apostle, “Put ye on the Lord
Jesus Christ, and make not provision for the flesh, to fulfill the lusts
thereof”?—Counsels on Sabbath School Work, 95.
The Message, Not the Man—The minister who has learned
of Christ will ever be conscious that he is a messenger of God,
commissioned by Him to do a work both for time and eternity. It
should not be any part of his object to call attention to himself,
his learning, or his ability. But his whole aim should be to bring
sinners to repentance, pointing them, both by precept and example,
to the Lamb of God that taketh away the sins of the world. Self
should be hidden in Jesus. Such men will speak as those conscious
of possessing power and authority from God, being a mouthpiece
for Him. Their discourses will have an earnestness and fervor of
persuasion that will lead sinners to see their lost condition, and take
[64] refuge in Christ.—Evangelism, 134.
Chapter 10—Misuse of the Gift
Influence of Harsh Words—Do you dislike to have harsh

words spoken to you? Remember that when you speak such words
others feel the sting. Let your praiseworthy example, your peaceable
words and unselfish deeds, be a savor of life unto life.
The talent of speech was given to be used for the benefit of all.
Pleasant, cheery words cost no more than unpleasant, moody words.
Sharp words wound and bruise the soul. In this life everyone has
difficulties with which to wrestle. Everyone meets with grievances
and disappointments. Shall we not bring sunshine instead of gloom
into the lives of those with whom we come in contact? Shall we not
speak words that will help and bless? They will be just as much a
blessing to us as to those to whom they are spoken.—Manuscript
93, 1901.
Provoking Words—Speech is a precious talent. You can speak
fretfully, or you can speak pleasantly. Remember that it will not
hurt your influence to speak pleasantly, but that it will sweeten your
influence. If provoking words are spoken to you, do not utter a [65]
word. The best rebuke you can give the one who has uttered the
provoking word is to keep silent until you can speak in a calm,
pleasant voice.—The Review and Herald, July 6, 1905.
Idle Words—With the talent of speech we are to communicate
the truth as we have opportunity. It should ever be used in God’s
service. But this talent is grievously abused. Words are spoken that
do great harm. Christ declared, “Every idle word that men shall
speak, they shall give account thereof in the day of judgment. For
by thy words thou shalt be justified, and by thy words thou shalt be
condemned.”—The Review and Herald, September 12, 1899.
Useless, Meaningless Chit-Chat—The talent of speech is a gift
of God, and when we hear so much useless, meaningless chit-chat,
we may be assured that those who thus use this precious gift are not
Christians. They are not abiding in Christ, nor is Christ abiding in
them. Every tree is known by its fruits. “A good man out of the
41
good treasure of the heart, bringeth forth good things: and an evil
man out of the evil treasure bringeth forth evil things.” What a flood
of evil and rubbish flows forth because of the talent of speech. And
how many are denying Christ by their speech! Instead of making a
good confession of Christ by their manner of conversation they say,
“I know not the Man.” It is easy enough to have a form of godliness;
but to make a whole-sided confession of our faith in Christ, means
[66] that our words, and dress, and spirit shall testify to the fact.—Lt 19,
1897.
Frivolous Conversation—Cultivate the precious gift of speech
as an agency entrusted to you by God. Do not introduce frivolous,
nonsensical subjects of conversation. Talk so that minds not of
our faith will receive the impression that sound speech and sound
principles have been brought into your education. “Ye are the light
of the world.” Who are thus honored? All who have improved
their opportunities to learn how to serve the Lord in the gift of
speech.—Manuscript 93, 1901.
Jesting and Joking—It is the duty of the youth to encourage
sobriety. Lightness, jesting, and joking will result in barrenness of
soul and the loss of the favor of God. Many of you do not exert a bad
influence upon others, and thus feel in a measure satisfied; but do
you exert an influence for good? Do you seek in your conversation
and acts to lead others to the Saviour, or, if they profess Christ, to
lead them to a closer walk with Him?—Testimonies for the Church
2:236, 237.
Cheap Talk—My young friends, will you begin your Christian
life as those whose hearts are warmed with the love of Jesus? You
will never know how much good you may do by speaking tenderly
sensible, serious words regarding their souls’ salvation to those who
do not claim to be children of God. On the other hand, you may
[67] never know until the judgment how many opportunities to be Christ’s
witnesses you have left unimproved. You may never know in this
world the mischief you have done to some soul by your little acts of
frivolity, your cheap talk, your levity, which was wholly inconsistent
with your holy faith.—Messages to Young People, 201.
Scathing Remarks—An indwelling Saviour is revealed by the
words. But the Holy Spirit does not abide in the heart of him who is
peevish if others do not agree with his ideas and plans. From the lips
Chapter 10—Misuse of the Gift 43
of such a man there come scathing remarks, which grieve the Spirit
away, and develop attributes that are satanic rather than divine. The
Lord desires those connected with His work to speak at all times
with the meekness of Christ. If you are provoked, do not become
impatient. Manifest the gentleness of which Christ has given us an
example in His life.
As Christians we should speak as Christ would speak were He in
our place. We long to see reforms, but often because things do not
move just as we wish them to move, an evil spirit puts drops of gall
into our cup, and other souls are poisoned. By our ill-advised words
they are chafed and stirred to rebellion. Make it your aim to speak
the truth in love. Then the Lord Jesus by His Spirit will supply the
force and power. Do not mingle self with anything done for God.
Ever reveal the meek and lowly spirit of the Master.—The Review
and Herald, April 9, 1901. [68]
[69]
[70]
[71]
Section 2—Christ the Ideal Speaker
Chapter 11—Nature of His Voice
Distinct Enunciation—Jesus is our example. His voice was

musical, and was never raised in high, strained notes while He was
speaking to the people. He did not speak so rapidly that His words
were crowded one upon another in such a way that it made it difficult
to understand Him. He distinctly enunciated every word, and those
that heard His voice bore the testimony that “never man spake like
this man.”—The Review and Herald, March 5, 1895.
A Calm, Earnest, Musical Voice—By loving words and by
works of mercy, Christ bore down old traditions and man-made
commandments, and presented the love of the Father in its exhaust-
less fullness. His calm, earnest, musical voice fell like balm on the
wounded spirit.—The Review and Herald, March 5, 1901.
Love in His Tone—His tender compassion fell with a touch of
healing upon weary and troubled hearts. Even amid the turbulence of
angry enemies He was surrounded with an atmosphere of peace. The
beauty of His countenance, the loveliness of His character, above
[72] all, the love expressed in look and tone, drew to Him all who were
not hardened in unbelief. Had it not been for the sweet, sympathetic
spirit that shone out in every look and word, He would not have
attracted the large congregations that He did.—The Desire of Ages,
254.
As Music to the Ear—The Saviour’s voice was as music to
the ears of those who had been accustomed to the monotonous,
spiritless preaching of the scribes and Pharisees. He spoke slowly
and impressively, emphasizing those words to which He wished His
hearers to give special heed. Old and young, ignorant and learned,
could catch the full meaning of His words. This would have been
impossible had He spoken in a hurried way, and rushed sentence
upon sentence without a pause. The people were very attentive to
Him, and it was said of Him that He spoke not as the scribes and
Pharisees, for His word was as of one who had authority.—Counsels
to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 240.
46
Chapter 11—Nature of His Voice 47
Natural Key—Had He raised His voice to an unnatural key, ...

the pathos and melody of the human voice would have been lost,
and much of the force of the truth destroyed.—Evangelism, 56.
Sweet Melody in His Voice—In my younger days I used to talk
too loud. The Lord has shown me that I could not make the proper
impression upon the people by getting the voice to an unnatural
pitch. Then Christ was presented before me, and His manner of
talking; and there was a sweet melody in His voice. His voice, in [73]
a slow, calm manner, reached those who listened, and His words
penetrated their hearts, and they were able to catch on to what He
said before the next sentence was spoken. Some seem to think they
must race right straight along or else they will lose the inspiration
and the people will lose the inspiration. If that is inspiration, let
them lose it, and the sooner the better.—Evangelism, 670.
Christ a Speech Teacher for His Disciples—If the voice is
toned right, if it has solemnity, and is so modulated as to be even
pathetic, it will produce a much better impression. This was the
tone in which Christ taught His disciples. He impressed them with
solemnity; He spoke in a pathetic manner.—Testimonies for the
Church 2:615.
Tears in His Voice—He fearlessly denounced hypocrisy, un-
belief, and iniquity, but tears were in His voice as He uttered His
scathing rebukes.—The Desire of Ages, 353.
Voice As the Trump of God—Into the busy world, filled with
the din of commerce and the altercation of trade, where men were
trying selfishly to get all they could for self, Christ came; and
above the confusion, His voice, like the trump of God, was heard:
“What shall it profit a man, if he shall gain the whole world, and
lose his own soul? Or what shall a man give in exchange for his
soul?”—Evangelism, 559.
Clear, Ringing Voice in the Temple—His eye sweeps over the [74]
multitude, taking in every individual. His form seems to rise above
them in commanding dignity, and a divine light illuminates His
countenance. He speaks, and His clear, ringing voice—the same that
upon Mount Sinai proclaimed the law that priests and rulers were
transgressing—is heard echoing through the arches of the temple:
“Take these things hence; make not My Father’s house an house of
merchandise.”—The Desire of Ages, 158.
A Unique Voice—They beheld the hands and feet marred by the

cruel nails. They recognized His voice, like no other they had ever
heard. “And while they yet believed not for joy, and wondered, He
[75] said unto them, Have ye here any meat?”—The Desire of Ages, 803.
Chapter 12—Effectiveness of Presentation
Every Word a Savor of Life—Wherever He was, in the syna-

gogue, by the wayside, in the boat thrust out a little from the land,
at the Pharisee’s feast or the table of the publican, He spoke to men
of the things pertaining to the higher life. The things of nature, the
events of daily life, were bound up by Him with the words of truth.
The hearts of His hearers were drawn to Him; for He had healed
their sick, had comforted their sorrowing ones, and had taken their
children in His arms and blessed them. When He opened His lips to
speak, their attention was riveted upon Him, and every word was to
some soul a savor of life unto life.—Christ’s Object Lessons, 338.
Christ’s Speech As a Child—As soon as He could talk, Christ
used the talent of speech, in the family circle and among friends
and acquaintances, in a way that was without fault. Not one impure
word escaped His lips.—Welfare Ministry, 286, 287.
A Charm for the Learned—After Joseph and Mary had
searched for Him [Jesus] for three days, they found Him in the
court of the temple, sitting in the midst of the doctors, both hearing [76]
them, and asking them questions. And all that heard Him were as-
tonished at His understanding and answers. He asked His questions
with a grace that charmed these learned men.... His mother could
not but mark His words, His spirit, His willing obedience to all her
requirements.—Sons and Daughters of God, 134.
His Audience Spellbound—Unlearned peasants and fishermen
from the surrounding country; the Roman soldiers from the barracks
of Herod; chieftains with their swords at their sides, ready to put
down anything that might savor of rebellion; the avaricious tax-gath-
erers from their toll-booths; and from the Sanhedrin the phylactered
priests—all listened [to John the Baptist] as if spellbound; and all,
even the Pharisee and Sadducee, the cold, unimpressible scoffer,
went away with the sneer silenced, and cut to the heart with a sense of
their sins. Herod in his palace heard the message, and the proud, sin-
49
hardened ruler trembled at the call to repentance.—Gospel Workers,

55.
Authority in His Voice—He could say to whom He pleased,
“Follow Me,” and the one addressed arose and followed Him. The
spell of the world’s enchantment was broken. At the sound of His
voice the spirit of greed and ambition fled from the heart, and men
arose, emancipated, to follow the Saviour.—The Ministry of Healing,
25.
[77] His Life an Example for His Words—What He taught, He
lived. “I have given you an example,” He said to His disciples, “that
ye should do as I have done.” “I have kept My Father’s command-
ments.” John 13:15; 15:10. Thus in His life, Christ’s words had
perfect illustration and support. And more than this; what He taught,
He was. His words were the expression, not only of His own life
experience, but of His own character.—Education, 78, 79.
His Spirit a Revelation of His Teaching—Christ’s teachings
were not impressed upon His hearers by any outward gestures,
but by the words and acts of His daily life, by the spirit He re-
vealed.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 399.
Powerful and Attractive Teaching—There is an eloquence far
more powerful than the eloquence of words in the quiet, consistent
life of a pure, true Christian. What a man is has more influence than
what he says.
The officers who were sent to Jesus came back with the report
that never man spoke as He spoke. But the reason for this was that
never man lived as He lived. Had His life been other than it was,
He could not have spoken as He did. His words bore with them a
convincing power, because they came from the heart pure and holy,
full of love and sympathy, benevolence and truth.—The Ministry of
Healing, 469.
Gracious Words—The Pharisees were filled with a frenzy of
hatred against Him, because they could see that His teaching had a
[78] power and an attractiveness that their words were utterly devoid of.
They decided that the only way to cut off His influence was to pass
sentence of death upon Him, and therefore they sent officers to take
Him. But when the officers came within hearing of His voice, and
listened to His gracious words, they were charmed into forgetting
their errand.—Manuscript 33, 1911.
Chapter 12—Effectiveness of Presentation 51
Impression of His Appearance and Words—The appearance

and words of Jesus during His trial made a deep impression upon the
minds of many who were present on that occasion.—Early Writings,
174.
A Living Power—The Saviour’s face was irradiated with a ce-
lestial brightness. He seemed to be in the very presence of the
Unseen, and there was a living power in His words as of one who
spoke with God.—Thoughts from the Mount of Blessing, 102. [79]
Chapter 13—Love, Sympathy, and Kindness
Tact, Not Severity—The Saviour never suppressed the truth,

but He uttered it always in love. In His intercourse with others, He
exercised the greatest tact, and He was always kind and thoughtful.
He was never rude, never needlessly spoke a severe word, never
gave unnecessary pain to a sensitive soul. He did not censure human
weakness. He fearlessly denounced hypocrisy, unbelief, and iniquity,
but tears were in His voice as He uttered His scathing rebukes. He
never made truth cruel, but ever manifested a deep tenderness for
humanity.—Gospel Workers, 117.
Words Like a Balm—Multitudes who were not interested in the
harangues of the rabbis were attracted by His teaching. They could
understand His words, and their hearts were warmed and comforted.
He spoke of God, not as an avenging judge, but as a tender father,
and He revealed the image of God as mirrored in Himself. His words
were like balm to the wounded spirit. Both by His words and by His
works of mercy He was breaking the oppressive power of the old
[80] traditions and man-made commandments, and presenting the love
of God in its exhaustless fullness.—The Desire of Ages, 205.
Sympathy in Both Speaking and Listening—The life of
Christ was filled with words and acts of benevolence, sympathy,
and love. He was ever attentive to listen to and relieve the woes of
those who came to Him. Multitudes carried in their own persons
the evidence of His divine power. Yet after the work had been ac-
complished, many were ashamed of the humble yet mighty Teacher.
Because the rulers did not believe on Him, the people were not will-
ing to accept Jesus. He was a man of sorrows and acquainted with
grief. They could not endure to be governed by His sober, self-deny-
ing life. They wished to enjoy the honor which the world bestows.
Yet many followed the Son of God and listened to His instructions,
feasting upon the words which fell so graciously from His lips. His
words were full of meaning, yet so plain that the weakest could
understand them.—Early Writings, 160.
52
Chapter 13—Love, Sympathy, and Kindness 53
Assurance of Truth—The words of the Master were clear and

distinct, and were spoken in sympathy and tenderness. They carried
with them the assurance that here was truth. It was the simplicity
and earnestness with which Christ labored and spoke that drew so
many to Him.—Evangelism, 53.
Comfort and Tenderness—Even in His childhood He spoke
words of comfort and tenderness to young and old.... He was an
example of what all children may strive to be.... In His words and ac- [81]
tions He manifested tender sympathy for all. His companionship was
a healing, soothing balm to the disheartened and depressed.—Sons
and Daughters of God, 151. [82]
Chapter 14—Patient Calmness
No Hasty, Angry Words—Through the help that Christ can

give, we shall be able to learn to bridle the tongue. Sorely as He
was tried on the point of hasty and angry speech, He never once
sinned with His lips. With patient calmness He met the sneers, the
taunts, and the ridicule of His fellow workers at the carpenter’s
bench. Instead of retorting angrily, He would begin to sing one
of David’s beautiful psalms; and His companions, before realizing
what they were doing, would unite with Him in the hymn. What a
transformation would be wrought in this world if men and women
today would follow Christ’s example in the use of words!—The
Gentleness of Disposition—Love will do that which argument
will fail to accomplish. But a moment’s petulance, a single gruff
answer, a lack of Christian politeness and courtesy in some small
matter, may result in the loss of both friends and influence.
What Christ was on this earth, the Christian worker should strive
to be. He is our example, not only in His spotless purity, but in His
[83] patience, gentleness, and winsomeness of disposition. His life is an
illustration of true courtesy. He had ever a kind look and a word
of comfort for the needy and the oppressed. His presence brought
a purer atmosphere into the home. His life was as leaven working
[84] amid the elements of society.—Gospel Workers, 121.
54
Chapter 15—Simplicity
Most Simple Language—Christ always used the most sim-

ple language, yet His words were received by deep, unprejudiced
thinkers; for they were words that tested their wisdom. Spiritual
things should always be presented in simple language, even though
learned men are being addressed; for such are generally ignorant
regarding spiritual things. The simplest language is the most elo-
quent. Educated and uneducated need to be addressed in the plainest,
simplest manner, so that the truth may be comprehended, and find
lodgment in the heart. So Christ addressed the vast crowds that
thronged about Him; and all, learned and unlearned, were able to
comprehend His lessons.—The Review and Herald, May 18, 1897.
Simplicity for Learned and Common People—The greatest
Teacher the world ever knew was admired for His simplicity; for
He presented divine truth in such a way that even children could
comprehend His words, and at the same time He drew the attention
of the best educated and deepest thinkers of the world. By the use
of familiar illustrations He made truth plain to the minds of the [85]
common people. In simplicity He sowed the seed of the gospel truth
in the minds and hearts of His hearers, and it sprang up and yielded
a harvest unto everlasting life.—Sons and Daughters of God, 86.
Appropriate Illustrations—He spoke to them in language so
simple that they could not fail of understanding. By methods pe-
culiarly His own, He helped all who were in sorrow and affliction.
With tender, courteous grace He ministered to the sin-sick soul,
bringing healing and strength.
The Prince of teachers, He sought access to the people by the
pathway of their most familiar associations. He presented the truth
in such a way that ever after it was to His hearers intertwined with
their most hallowed recollections and sympathies. He taught in
a way that made them feel the completeness of His identification
with their interests and happiness. His instruction was so direct,
His illustrations were so appropriate, His words so sympathetic
55
and cheerful, that His hearers were charmed. The simplicity and
earnestness with which He addressed the needy, hallowed every
word.—The Ministry of Healing, 23, 24.
Spiritual Truth Simply Told—Christ never flattered men. He
never spoke that which would exalt their fancies and imaginations,
nor did He praise them for their clever inventions; but deep, un-
prejudiced thinkers received His teaching and found that it tested
[86] their wisdom. They marveled at the spiritual truth expressed in the
simplest language.—The Desire of Ages, 254.
Truth Clear Even to a Child—The words of life were pre-
sented in such simplicity that a child could understand them. Men,
women, and children were so impressed with His manner of ex-
plaining the Scriptures that they would catch the very intonation of
His voice, place the same emphasis on their words, and imitate His
gestures.—Counsels on Health, 498, 499.
Simplest Terms and Plainest Symbols—The Saviour came “to
preach the gospel to the poor.” Luke 4:18. In His teaching He used
the simplest terms and the plainest symbols. And it is said that “the
common people heard Him gladly.” Mark 12:37. Those who are
seeking to do His work for this time need a deeper insight into the
lessons He has given.—The Ministry of Healing, 443.
As the Balm of Gilead—The people listened to the words of
mercy flowing so freely from the lips of the Son of God. They heard
the gracious words, so simple and so plain that they were as the
balm of Gilead to their souls.—The Desire of Ages, 365.
Forcible, but Simple Language—Christ reached the people
where they were. He presented the plain truth to their minds in
the most forcible, simple language. The humble poor, the most
unlearned, could comprehend, through faith in Him, the most ex-
[87] alted truths. No one needed to consult the learned doctors as to His
meaning. He did not perplex the ignorant with mysterious infer-
ences or use unaccustomed and learned words, of which they had
no knowledge. The greatest Teacher the world has ever known, was
the most definite, simple, and practical in His instruction.—Gospel
Workers, 49, 50.
Great Moral Truths in Freshness and Power—Jesus, the
great Teacher, laid open in the simplest language, the great moral
Chapter 15—Simplicity 57
truths, clothing them with freshness and power.—The Review and

Herald, March 21, 1893.
Simple, Pointed Truths—He [Jesus] labored constantly for one
object; all His powers were employed for the salvation of men, and
every act of His life tended to that end. He traveled on foot, teaching
His followers as He went. His garments were dusty and travel-
stained, and His appearance was uninviting. But the simple, pointed
truths which fell from His divine lips soon caused His hearers to
forget His appearance, and to be charmed, not with the Man, but
with the doctrine He taught.—Testimonies for the Church 4:373.
Nothing Nonessential—Christ’s words contain nothing that is
nonessential. The Sermon on the Mount is a wonderful production,
yet so simple that a child can study it without misunderstanding.
The mount of beatitudes is a symbol of the spiritual elevation on
which Christ ever stood. Every word He uttered came from God,
and He spoke with the authority of heaven. “The words that I
speak unto you,” He said, “they are spirit, and they are life.” John [88]
6:63.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 439.
No Parade of Eloquence—But in these words spoken by the
greatest Teacher the world has ever known there is no parade of
human eloquence. The language is plain, and the thoughts and
sentiments are marked with the greatest simplicity. The poor, the
unlearned, the most simple-minded, can understand them. The Lord
of heaven was in mercy and kindness addressing the souls He came
to save. He taught them as one having authority, speaking the words
of eternal life.—Testimonies for the Church 5:254. [89]
Chapter 16—Power, Authority, and Earnestness
Positive Authority—The practical truths He uttered had a con-

vincing power, and arrested the attention of the people. Multitudes
lingered at His side, marveling at His wisdom. His manner corre-
sponded with the great truths He proclaimed. There was no apology,
no hesitancy, not the shadow of a doubt or uncertainty that it might
be other than He declared. He spoke of the earthly and the heav-
enly, of the human and the divine, with positive authority; and the
people “were astonished at His doctrine; for His word was with
power.”—The Review and Herald, July 6, 1911.
Authority Exclusively His Own—Christ taught with author-
ity. The Sermon on the Mount is a wonderful production, yet so
simple that a child can study it without being misled. The mount
of beatitudes is an emblem of the high elevation on which Christ
ever stood. He spoke with an authority which was exclusively His
own.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 407.
Kingly Authority Over Temple Priests—Christ spoke with the
[90] authority of a king, and in His appearance, and in the tones of His
voice, there was that which they had no power to resist. At the word
of command they realized, as they had never realized before, their
true position as hypocrites and robbers.—The Desire of Ages, 162.
Irresistible Force—With clearness and power He spoke the
words that were to come down to our time as a treasure of goodness.
What precious words they were, and how full of encouragement.
From His divine lips there fell with fullness and abundant assurance
the benedictions that showed Him to be the fountain of all goodness,
and that it was His prerogative to bless and impress the minds of all
present....
There were occasions when Christ spoke with an authority that
sent His words home with irresistible force, with an overwhelming
sense of the greatness of the Speaker, and the human agencies shrunk
into nothingness in comparison with the One before them. They were
deeply moved; their minds were impressed that He was repeating
58
Chapter 16—Power, Authority, and Earnestness 59
the command from the most excellent glory. As He summoned the

world to listen, they were spellbound and entranced, and conviction
came to their minds. Every word made for itself a place, and the
hearers believed and received the words that they had no power to
resist. Every word He uttered seemed to the hearers as the life of
God.—The S.D.A. Bible Commentary 5:1084, 1085.
Power Like a Mighty Tempest—Christ spoke with a power
that swayed the people like a mighty tempest: “It is written, My [91]
house shall be called the house of prayer; but ye have made it a den
of thieves.” His voice sounded like a trumpet through the temple.
The displeasure of His countenance seemed like consuming fire.
With authority He commanded, “Take these things hence.” John
2:16.—The Desire of Ages, 591.
An Example for Father, a Pattern for Children—Jesus was
the pattern for children, and He was also the father’s example. He
spoke as one having authority, and His word was with power; yet
in all His intercourse with rude and violent men He did not use one
unkind or discourteous expression.—The Desire of Ages, 515.
Invitations Full of Compassion—There was marked authority
in His requirements and promises, and His invitations were full of
compassion and entreaty. How tenderly He said to the toiling people,
“Come unto Me, all ye that labor and are heavy laden, and I will
give you rest.” ... With what power and compassion Jesus cried, “If
any man thirst, let him come unto Me, and drink.”—The Review
and Herald, February 21, 1893.
No Hesitation nor Uncertainty—He spoke as one having au-
thority, and not as the scribes, in a hesitating, uncertain manner. With
calmness and power He proclaimed the living principles of truth,
making them more forcible by His manner of presenting them.—The
Review and Herald, August 20, 1903. [92]
No Shadow of Doubt—Christ came to unveil divine truth to the
world. He taught as one having authority. He spake as never man
spoke. There was no hesitancy in His manner, not the shadow of a
doubt in His utterances. He spake as one who understood every part
of His subject.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 236, 237.
Christ’s Personal Knowledge—Christ spoke with authority.
Every truth essential for the people to know He proclaimed with
the unfaltering assurance of certain knowledge. He uttered nothing
fanciful or sentimental. He presented no sophistries, no human opin-

ions. No idle tales, no false theories clothed in beautiful language,
came from His lips. The statements that He made were truths estab-
lished by personal knowledge. He foresaw the delusive doctrines
that would fill the world, but He did not unfold them. In His teach-
ings He dwelt upon the unchangeable principles of God’s Word. He
magnified the simple, practical truths that the common people could
understand and bring into the daily experience.—Testimonies for
the Church 8:201.
Zeal and Certainty—When Jesus spoke, it was not with hesi-
tating uncertainty, with repetition of words and familiar figures. The
truth came from His lips clothed in new and interesting representa-
tions that gave it the freshness of a new revelation.
His voice was never pitched to an unnatural key, and His words
came with an earnestness and assurance appropriate to their impor-
[93] tance and the momentous consequences involved in their reception
or rejection. When His doctrines were opposed, He defended them
with so great zeal and certainty as to impress His hearers that He
would die, if need be, to sustain the authority of His teachings....
When He taught, His words came with authority; for He spoke with
positive knowledge of the truth.—The Review and Herald, January
7, 1890.
Truth With Freshness of a New Revelation—Truth never lan-
guished on His lips, never suffered in His hands for want of perfect
obedience to its requirements. “To this end was I born,” Christ de-
clared, “and for this cause came I into the world, that I should bear
witness unto the truth.” And the mighty principles of truth fell from
His lips with the freshness of a new revelation. The truth was spoken
by Him with an earnestness proportionate to its infinite importance
and to the momentous results depending on its success.—The S.D.A.
Bible Commentary 5:1148.
Earnestness and Power—The words of Christ, though calmly
spoken, were uttered with an earnestness and power that stirred the
hearts of the people. They listened for a repetition of the lifeless
traditions and exactions of the rabbis, but in vain.
They “were astonished at His teaching: for He taught them as
one having authority, and not as their scribes.” Matthew 7:28, 29,
R.V.—Thoughts from the Mount of Blessing, 46, 47.
Chapter 16—Power, Authority, and Earnestness 61
Encouragement in Love and Tenderness—They heard Him in

love and tenderness speak encouragingly to the weak and afflicted. [94]
They also heard Him, in a voice of authority, rebuke the power of
Satan and bid his captives go free. They listened to the words of
wisdom that fell from His lips, and they were captivated; they could
not lay hands on Him.—Early Writings, 160. [95]
Chapter 17—Words of Truth
Truth Clearly Defined—The only-begotten Son of God came

to our world to reveal truth in contrast with error. This saving truth
we are to reveal in our speech and in Christlike deportment. Truth
never languished on the lips of Christ. It was clearly defined, in
words, in works, in spirit.—Lt 222, 1908.
Tenderness in Tone of Voice—In all His teaching, Christ pre-
sented pure, unadulterated principles. He did no sin, neither was
guile found in His mouth. Constantly there flowed from His lips
holy, ennobling truths. He spoke as never man spoke, with a pathos
that touched the heart. He was filled with holy wrath as He saw the
Jewish leaders teaching for doctrines the commandments of men,
and He spoke to them with the authority of true greatness. With ter-
rible power He denounced all artful intrigue, all dishonest practices.
He cleansed the temple from its pollution, as He desires to cleanse
our hearts from everything bearing any resemblance to fraud. The
truth never languished on His lips. With fearlessness He exposed the
hypocrisy of priest and ruler, Pharisee and Sadducee.—The Review
[96] and Herald, May 12, 1910.
Truth in Its Proper Light—The words of Christ were not new,
and yet they came with the force of revelation; for they presented
the truth in its proper light, and not in the light in which the teachers
had set it before the people.—The Review and Herald, November
28, 1893.
Error Distinguished From Truth—He could have opened
mysteries which patriarchs and prophets desired to look into, which
human curiosity had been impatiently desirous of understanding.
But when men could not discern the most simple, plainly-stated
truths, how could they understand mysteries which were hid from
mortal eyes? Jesus did not disdain to repeat old, familiar truths;
for He was the author of these truths. He was the glory of the
temple. Truths which had been lost sight of, which had been mis-
placed, misinterpreted, and disconnected from their true position,
62
Chapter 17—Words of Truth 63
He separated from the companionship of error; and showing them

as precious jewels in their own bright luster, He reset them in their
proper framework, and commanded them to stand fast forever.
What a work was this! It was of such a character that no finite
man could comprehend or do it. Only the divine Hand could take
the truth which, from its connection with error, had been serving the
cause of the enemy of God and man, and place it where it would
glorify God, and be the salvation of humanity. The work of Christ
was to give again to the world the truth in its original freshness and
beauty.—The Review and Herald, November 28, 1893. [97]
Chapter 18—No Complicated Reasoning nor
Argument
Right to the Point—Christ seldom attempted to prove that truth

is truth. He illustrated truth in all its bearings, and then left His
hearers free to accept or reject it, as they might choose. He did not
force anyone to believe. In the Sermon on the Mount He instructed
the people in practical godliness, distinctly outlining their duty. He
spoke in such a manner as to commend truth to the conscience. The
power manifested by the disciples was revealed in the clearness and
earnestness with which they expressed the truth.
In Christ’s teaching there is no long, far-fetched, complicated
reasoning. He comes right to the point. In His ministry He read
every heart as an open book, and from the inexhaustible store of
His treasure house He drew things both new and old to illustrate
and enforce His teachings. He touched the heart, and awakened the
sympathies.—Evangelism, 171.
The Inquiring Mind—He did not present a great mass of truth,
to be accepted all at once. He led the inquiring mind from truth to
truth, from lesson to lesson, opening up the significance of the Scrip-
[98] ture, as they were able to bear it. In every age the truth appropriate
for the time, and essential to character and life, must be revealed in
this manner.—The Review and Herald, October 14, 1890.
Obedience Not Claimed Through Argument—Christ came
into the world to bring all resistance and authority into subjection
to Himself, but He did not claim obedience through the strength of
argument or the voice of command; He went about doing good
and teaching His followers the things which belonged to their
[99] peace.—Testimonies for the Church 4:139.
64
Chapter 19—Christ’s Study of Countenances
Facial Expressions—The world’s Redeemer went about doing

good. When before the people, speaking to them the words of eternal
truth, with what earnestness He watched the changing countenances
of His hearers! The faces that expressed deep interest and pleasure
as they listened to His words, gave Him great satisfaction. And when
the truth, plainly uttered, touched some cherished sin or idol, He
marked the change of countenance, the cold, stern, forbidding look,
which told that the truth was unwelcome.—Gospel Workers, 48.
Christ an Example for Teachers—When Christ was teaching
on earth, He watched the countenances of His hearers, and the
kindling eye, the animated expression, told Him in a moment when
one assented to the truth. Even so should the teachers of the people
now study the countenances of their hearers.—Evangelism, 158.
Hopeful Subjects in His Kingdom—Jesus watched with deep
earnestness the changing countenances of His hearers. The faces that
expressed interest and pleasure gave Him great satisfaction. As the [100]
arrows of truth pierced to the soul, breaking through the barriers of
selfishness, and working contrition, and finally gratitude, the Saviour
was made glad. When His eye swept over the throng of listeners,
and He recognized among them the faces He had before seen, His
countenance lighted up with joy. He saw in them hopeful subjects
for His kingdom. When the truth, plainly spoken, touched some
cherished idol, He marked the change of countenance, the cold,
forbidding look, which told that the light was unwelcome. When He
saw men refuse the message of peace, His heart was pierced to the
very depths.—The Desire of Ages, 255.
Individual Reactions—Even the crowd that so often thronged
His steps was not to Christ an indiscriminate mass of human beings.
He spoke directly to every mind and appealed to every heart. He
watched the faces of His hearers, marked the lighting up of the
countenance, the quick, responsive glance, which told that truth had
65
reached the soul; and there vibrated in His heart the answering chord
[101] of sympathetic joy.—Education, 231.
Chapter 20—Adaptation to His Listeners
Truth As People Could Bear It—Christ drew the hearts of His

hearers to Him by the manifestation of His love, and then, little by
little, as they were able to bear it, He unfolded to them the great
truths of the kingdom. We also must learn to adapt our labors to the
condition of the people—to meet men where they are.—Evangelism,
57.
Varied Messages for Different Audiences—His [Jesus’] mes-
sages of mercy were varied to suit His audience. He knew “how
to speak a word in season to him that is weary” (Isaiah 50:4); for
grace was poured upon His lips, that He might convey to men in
the most attractive way the treasures of truth. He had tact to meet
the prejudiced minds, and surprise them with illustrations that won
their attention. Through the imagination He reached the heart.—The
Desire of Ages, 254.
Language of Common Life—Learn of Jesus. He was the great-
est teacher the world ever knew; yet He spoke in the language of
common life. He met the necessities of all. He adapted His in-
struction to all times and places, to both the rich and the poor, the [102]
educated and the ignorant. He ever dwelt upon the grandest themes
that can engage the attention; and He presented them in such a form,
and used such illustrations, that the feeblest intellects could grasp
His meaning, while the most intelligent minds were attracted and
instructed.—The Review and Herald, July 22, 1884.
Access to All Classes of People—Christ met the case of every
class in the subjects and manner of His teaching. He dined and
lodged with the rich and the poor, and made Himself familiar with
the interests and occupations of men, that He might gain access to
their hearts. The learned and the most intellectual were gratified and
charmed with His discourses, and yet they were so plain and simple
as to be comprehended by the humblest minds.—Testimonies for
the Church 3:214.
67
Lessons Adapted to Need—The respect shown to Christ at

the feasts He attended was in marked contrast to the manner in
which the scribes and Pharisees were treated, and this made them
envious. Christ gave lessons adapted for the needs of His hear-
ers.—Manuscript 19, 1899.
No Abrupt Actions nor Prescribed Rules—Jesus found ac-
cess to minds by the pathway of their most familiar associations. He
disturbed as little as possible their accustomed train of thought, by
abrupt actions or prescribed rules. He honored man with His confi-
[103] dence, and thus placed him on his honor. He introduced old truths in
a new and precious light.... The truth came from His lips beautiful
in its simplicity, yet clothed with dignity and power.—Evangelism,
140.
Various Methods to Gain Attention—From Christ’s methods
of labor we may learn many valuable lessons. He did not follow
merely one method; in various ways He sought to gain the attention
of the multitude, and, having succeeded in this, He proclaimed to
[104] them the truths of the gospel.—Counsels on Health, 387.
Chapter 21—Illustrations, Symbols, and Figures of
Speech
Well-Chosen Illustrations—Jesus was the greatest teacher the

world ever knew. He presented truth in clear, forcible statements,
and the illustrations He used were of the purest and highest order. He
never mingled cheap symbols and figures with His divine instruction,
or sought to pander to curiosity or to gratify the class that will listen
simply to be amused. He did not bring sacred truth down to the level
of the common, and the comical illustrations that some ministers
of the gospel use were never uttered by His divine lips. Christ did
not employ illustrations that would create amusement and excite
laughter.—The Review and Herald, August 6, 1895.
Nothing Comical for Mere Attention—In the instruction of
the divine Teacher, there was no illustration used that would leave
the least shadow upon the tablets of the soul. His words were of the
purest and most elevated character. He never stooped to utter that
which was comical, in order that He might attract an audience.—The
Review and Herald, August 6, 1895.
Illustrations of Common Things—Jesus illustrated the glories [105]
of the kingdom of God by the use of the experiences and occurrences
of earth. In compassionate love and tenderness He cheered and
comforted and instructed all who heard Him; for grace was poured
upon His lips that He might convey to men in the most attractive way
the treasures of truth.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students,
240.
Spiritual Lessons From Nature—The Great Teacher brought
His hearers in contact with nature, that they might listen to the voice
which speaks in all created things; and as their hearts became tender
and their minds receptive, He helped them to interpret the spiritual
teaching of the scenes upon which their eyes rested. The parables,
by means of which He loved to teach lessons of truth, show how
open His spirit was to the influences of nature, and how He delighted
to gather the spiritual teaching from the surroundings of daily life.
69
The birds of the air, the lilies of the field, the sower and the seed,
the shepherd and the sheep—with these Christ illustrated immortal
truth. He drew illustrations also from the events of life, facts of
experience familiar to the hearers—the leaven, the hid treasure, the
pearl, the fishing net, the lost coin, the prodigal son, the houses on
the rock and the sand. In His lessons there was something to interest
every mind, to appeal to every heart.—Education, 102.
[106] Carefully Chosen Locales for Discourses—The Redeemer of
the world sought to make His lessons of instruction plain and simple,
that all might comprehend them. He generally chose the open air for
His discourses. No walls could enclose the multitude which followed
Him; but He had special reasons for resorting to the groves and the
seaside to give His lessons of instruction. He could there have a
commanding view of the landscape and make use of objects and
scenes with which those in humble life were familiar, to illustrate
the important truths He made known to them.
With His lessons of instruction He associated the works of God
in nature. The birds which were caroling forth their songs without a
care, the flowers of the valley glowing in their beauty, the lily that
reposed in its purity upon the bosom of the lake, the lofty trees, the
cultivated land, the waving grain, the barren soil, the tree that bore
no fruit, the everlasting hills, the bubbling stream, the setting sun,
tinting and gilding the heavens—all these He employed to impress
His hearers with divine truth. He connected the works of God’s
finger in the heavens and upon the earth with the words of life He
wished to impress upon their minds, that, as they should look upon
the wonderful works of God in nature, His lessons might be fresh in
their memories.—Testimonies for the Church 2:579, 580.
From the Known to the Unknown—In His teaching, Christ
drew His illustrations from the great treasury of household ties and
affections, and from nature. The unknown was illustrated by the
[107] known; sacred and divine truths, by natural, earthly things, with
which the people were most familiar. These were the things that
would speak to their hearts, and make the deepest impression on
their minds.
The words of Christ placed the teachings of nature in a new
aspect and made them a new revelation. He could speak of the
things which His own hands had made, for they had qualities and
Chapter 21—Illustrations, Symbols, and Figures of Speech 71
properties that were peculiarly His own. In nature, as in the sacred

pages of the Old Testament Scriptures, divine, momentous truths
are revealed; and in His teaching, Jesus laid these open before the
people, bound up with the beauty of natural things.—Counsels to
Parents, Teachers, and Students, 178, 179.
Figures and Symbols—For His own wise purpose the Lord
veils spiritual truths in figures and symbols. Through the use of
figures of speech the plainest and most telling rebuke was often
given to His accusers and enemies, and they could find in His words
no occasion to condemn Him. In parables and comparisons He
found the best method of communicating divine truth. In simple
language, using figures and illustrations drawn from the natural
world, He opened spiritual truth to His hearers, and gave expression
to precious principles that would have passed from their minds, and
left scarcely a trace, had He not connected His words with stirring
scenes of life, experience, or nature. In this way He called forth
their interest, aroused inquiry, and when He had fully secured their
attention, He decidedly impressed upon them the testimony of truth. [108]
In this way He was able to make sufficient impression upon the
heart so that afterward His hearers could look upon the thing with
which He connected His lesson, and recall the words of the divine
Teacher.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 236. [109]
Chapter 22—The Worker’s Model
Christ Our Example—What Christ was on this earth, the Chris-

tian worker should strive to be. He is our example, not only in His
spotless purity, but in His patience, gentleness, and winsomeness of
disposition. His life is an illustration of true courtesy. He had ever a
kind look and a word of comfort for the needy and the oppressed.
His presence brought a purer atmosphere into the home. His life was
as leaven working amid the elements of society. Pure and undefiled,
He walked among the thoughtless, the rude, the uncourteous; among
unjust publicans, unrighteous Samaritans, heathen soldiers, rough
peasants, and the mixed multitude. He spoke a word of sympathy
here and a word there.—Gospel Workers, 121.
A Representation of Heaven—The Saviour of the world would
have His colaborers represent Him; and the more closely a man
walks with God, the more faultless will be his manner of address, his
deportment, his attitude, and his gestures. Coarse and uncouth man-
ners were never seen in our Pattern, Christ Jesus. He was a represen-
[110] tative of heaven, and His followers must be like Him.—Testimonies
An Exemplary Sermon—The Sermon on the Mount is an ex-
ample of how we are to teach. What pains Christ has taken to make
mysteries no longer mysteries, but plain, simple truths! There is in
His instruction nothing vague, nothing hard to understand.
“He opened His mouth, and taught them.” Matthew 5:2. His
words were spoken in no whispered tones, nor was His utterance
harsh and disagreeable. He spoke with clearness and emphasis, with
solemn, convincing force.—Testimonies for the Church 7:269.
Pattern for Every Worker—In His work of ministry for the
sick and afflicted, Christ stands before the world as the greatest
Medical Missionary the world has ever known, and the pattern for
every Christian missionary worker. He knew the right word to speak
to each sufferer, and He spoke not only that which brought healing of
body, but conviction of soul and spiritual enlightenment. He brought
72
Chapter 22—The Worker’s Model 73
to the understanding of those who sought Him a knowledge of self,

and of the soul’s highest need.
Christ’s discourses were the spiritual explanation of His ministry
for the afflicted.—Medical Ministry 194.
No Mere Sermonizing—Christ is the minister’s Model. How
directly to the point, how well adapted to the purpose and circum-
stances, are Christ’s words! How clear and forcible are His illus- [111]
trations! His style is characterized by simplicity and solemnity.
Throughout the teachings of Christ, there is nothing to justify the
minister in the relation of humorous anecdotes in the pulpit. The
lessons of Christ should be carefully studied, and the subjects, man-
ner, and form of discourses should be modeled after the divine
Pattern. Oratorical display, flashy rhetoric, and fine gestures do not
constitute a fine discourse.... He did not sermonize as men do today.
In intensely earnest tones He assured them of the truths of the life to
come, of the way of salvation.—The Review and Herald, June 23,
1891. [112]
[113]
[114]
[115]
Section 3—Christian Attitudes in Speaking
Chapter 23—Revelation of Christ
Our Saviour the Topic of Conversation—Do not talk of the

iniquity and wickedness that are in the world, but elevate your minds
and talk of your Saviour. When you see iniquity all around you, it
makes you all the more glad that He is your Saviour and we are His
children.—Mind, Character, and Personality 2:582.
Main Theme: Christ Crucified—Christ crucified—talk it, pray
it, sing it, and it will break and win hearts. Set, formal phrases, the
presentation of merely argumentative subjects, is productive of little
good.—The Review and Herald, June 2, 1903.
Green Pastures for the Sheep of God’s Fold—Many voices
are advocating error; let your voice advocate truth. Present subjects
that will be as green pastures to the sheep of God’s fold. Do not
lead your hearers into waste tracts, where they will be no nearer the
fountain of living water than they were before hearing you. Present
the truth as it is in Jesus, making plain the requirements of the law
and the gospel. Present Christ, the Way, the Truth, and the Life, and
[116] tell of His power to save all who come to Him.—Gospel Workers,
154.
Christ’s Grace and Salvation—What is more worthy to en-
gross the mind than the plan of redemption? It is a subject that is
exhaustless. The love of Jesus, the salvation offered to fallen man
through His infinite love, holiness of heart, the precious, saving truth
for these last days, the grace of Christ—these are subjects which
may animate the soul, and cause the pure in heart to feel that joy
which the disciples felt when Jesus came and walked with them as
they traveled toward Emmaus.
He who has centered his affections upon Christ will relish this
kind of hallowed association, and will gather divine strength by
such intercourse; but he who has no relish for this kind of conver-
sation, and who is best pleased to talk sentimental nonsense, has
wandered far away from God, and is becoming dead to holy and
76
Chapter 23—Revelation of Christ 77
noble aspirations. The sensual, the earthly, is interpreted by such to

be heavenly.—Testimonies for the Church 5:600.
Stewards of Christ’s Grace—Why are so many who profess
to be children of God devoting their God-entrusted capabilities to
selfish purposes? They are stewards of the grace of Christ, and
should lift up Jesus before the world. They should talk of Christ.
His praise should be on their lips because the Sun of Righteousness
is shining in their hearts. Through them His holy name should be
exalted in the earth.—The Review and Herald, August 16, 1898.
A More Healthy Channel—You should not talk so much about [117]
yourself, for this will strengthen no one. You should not make
yourself a center, and imagine that you must be constantly caring
for yourself and leading others to care for you. Get your mind off
from yourself into a more healthy channel. Talk of Jesus, and let
self go; let it be submerged in Christ, and let this be the language
of your heart: “I live; yet not I, but Christ liveth in me” [Galatians
2:20]. Jesus will be to you a present help in every time of need.
He will not leave you to battle with the powers of darkness alone.
Oh, no; He has laid help upon One that is mighty to save to the
uttermost.—Testimonies for the Church 2:320, 321.
The Language of Canaan—We are to be witnesses for Christ;
and this we shall be when we grow up daily into the full stature of
men and women in Christ. It is our privilege to grow more and more
like Him every day. Then we shall acquire the power to express
our love for Him in higher, purer speech, and our ideas will enlarge
and deepen, and our judgment become more sound and trustworthy,
while our testimony will have more of life and assurance. We are
not to cultivate the language of the earthy, and be so familiar with
the conversation of men, that the language of Canaan will be new
and unfamiliar to us.—Sons and Daughters of God, 72.
Machinery Guided by a Masterly Hand—Every heart that has
been visited by the bright beams of the Sun of Righteousness will
reveal the working of the Spirit of God in voice, mind, and charac-
ter. The machinery will move as if oiled and guided by a masterly [118]
hand. There will be less friction when the spirit of the worker re-
ceives the oil from the two olive branches. The holy influences will
be imparted to others in words of kindness, tenderness, love, and
encouragement.—Testimonies for the Church 7:195, 196.
Seeds of Love and Kindness—Some are seen to come forth

from their daily communion with God clothed with the meekness
of Christ. Their words are not like a desolating hail, crushing ev-
erything before it; they come forth sweetly from their lips. They
scatter seeds of love and kindness all along their path, and that all
unconsciously, because Christ lives in their heart. Their influence is
felt more than it is seen.
Kind, tender, compassionate words will flow from sanctified
hearts and lips.—Sons and Daughters of God, 180.
Words of Solid Sense—Those who have this Spirit [of Christ]
are earnest workers together with God; the heavenly intelligences
cooperate with them, and they go weighted with the spirit of the
message that they bear. They speak words of solid sense, and from
the treasury of the heart bring forth pure, sacred things, after the
example of Christ.—Gospel Workers, 288.
Simple, Straightforward Speech—Those who have learned of
Christ will “have no fellowship with the unfruitful works of dark-
ness.” Ephesians 5:11. In speech, as in life, they will be simple,
[119] straightforward, and true, for they are preparing for the fellowship
of those holy ones in whose mouth is found no guile.—Prophets and
Kings, 252.
A Subdued Gentleness—Those who abide in Jesus will be
happy, cheerful, and joyful in God. A subdued gentleness will
mark the voice, reverence for spiritual and eternal things will be
expressed in the actions, and music, joyful music, will echo from
the lips; for it is wafted from the throne of God.—Testimonies for
[120] the Church 4:626.
Chapter 24—Modesty, Truthfulness, and Discretion
Modest and Elevated Language—Our language should be

modest and elevated. The spirit you have cherished within has
left its impression upon the countenance. Christ, enthroned in the
soul-temple, will efface that fretful, peevish, unhappy look; and
as the cloud of witnesses look upon a man reflecting the image of
Christ, they will realize that he is surrounded by a pleasant atmo-
sphere.—Testimonies for the Church 4:348.
Ennobling Conversation—The conversation should be of that
elevated, ennobling character which could afterward be called to
remembrance with feelings of the highest pleasure.—Counsels on
Diet and Foods, 88.
Divine Goodness—The conversation of each should be of an
elevated character, calculated to lead other minds in the right channel.
The little mention that is made of divine goodness and the love of
God shows marked ingratitude and that Christ is not enshrined in
the heart.—Testimonies for the Church 4:456.
Pure Influence of Truth—The pure influence of truth will el-
evate the whole man. In his business deal with his fellow men he [121]
will have the fear of God before him, and will love his neighbor
as himself, and will deal just as he would wish to be dealt by. His
conversation will be truthful, chaste, and of so elevating a character
that unbelievers cannot take advantage of it, or say evil of him justly,
and are not disgusted with his uncourteous ways and unbecoming
speech.—Testimonies for the Church 1:415, 416.
Words With Spiritual Power—Even when sitting at the meal
table, Christ taught truths that brought comfort and courage to the
hearts of His hearers. When His love abides in the soul as a living
principle, there will come forth from the treasure house of the heart
words suitable to the occasion—not light, trifling words, but uplifting
words, words of spiritual power.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers,
and Students, 554.
79
A Positive Testimony—It is our duty to be very jealous of the

glory of God, and bring no evil report even by the sadness of the
countenance or by ill-advised words, as though the requirements
of God were a restriction upon our liberty. The whole person is
privileged to bear a decided testimony in every line—in features,
in temper, in words, in character—that the service of the Lord is
good. This they proclaim: “The law of the Lord is perfect, con-
verting the soul.” Let your words be positive on the side of the
Lord.—Manuscript 70, 1897.
Less Speaking, More Praying—Let us be careful of our words.
[122] Oh, there is so much speech that is not for the glory of God.
Would it not be much better if we should talk less and pray
more?—Manuscript 39, 1908.
Select Words—When engaged in labor, guard the mind, keep it
stayed upon God, talk less, and meditate more. Remember: “Every
idle word that men shall speak, they shall give account thereof in the
day of judgment.” Let your words be select; this will close a door
against the adversary of souls.—Testimonies for the Church 4:588.
Christ Is Voice Through You—Make a covenant with God that
you will guard well your words. “If any man offend not in word,
the same is a perfect man, and able also to bridle the whole body.”
James 3:2. Remember that a revengeful speech never makes one feel
that he has gained a victory. Let Christ speak through you. Do not
lose the blessing that comes from thinking no evil.—Testimonies
[123] for the Church 7:243.
Chapter 25—Kinds of Negative Speaking
The Most Precious Seeds—Let us be careful what we say. The

seed that drops from one mind into another should be the most
precious seed, not a seed of murmuring and complaint.—Manuscript
18, 1895.
Wrong Impressions—You cannot be too careful of what you
say, for the words you utter show what power is controlling your
mind and heart. If Christ rules in your heart, your words will reveal
the purity, beauty, and fragrance of a character molded and fashioned
by His will....
The Lord demands that our words be of the very best quality;
that our tongues be truthful at all times. Any vestige of prevarication
is an offense to Him. Every word we speak needs the most careful
consideration, lest it mislead those who are weak in the faith. From
the light which God has given me, I know that by your unadvised
words you have left wrong impressions on the minds of some in
Sydney, and much time will be needed to counteract the effects of
these impressions. What you have thus expressed in words has not
been true, but has been the result of your own imagination. No
longer rely on a spurious spirituality.—Lt 69, 1896. [124]
A Precious Inheritance—God would have His people, in words
and in deportment, declare to the world that no earthly attractions or
worldly possessions are of sufficient value to compensate for the loss
of the heavenly inheritance. Those who are truly children of the light
and of the day will not be vain or frivolous in conversation, in dress,
or in deportment, but sober, contemplative, constantly exerting an
influence to attract souls to the Redeemer....
God enjoins upon all His followers to bear a living testimony in
unmistakable language by their conduct, their dress and conversation,
in all the pursuits of life, that the power of true godliness is profitable
to all in this life and in the life to come; that this alone can satisfy
the soul of the receiver.—Testimonies for the Church 4:580, 581.
81
Pure Lives and Pure Speech—Not one word is to be spoken

unadvisedly. No evil speaking, no frivolous talk, no fretful repining
or impure suggestion, will escape the lips of him who is following
Christ. The apostle Paul, writing by the Holy Spirit, says, “Let no
corrupt communication proceed out of your mouth.” Ephesians 4:29.
A corrupt communication does not mean only words that are vile.
It means any expression contrary to holy principles and pure and
undefiled religion. It includes impure hints and covert insinuations
of evil. Unless instantly resisted, these lead to great sin.
Upon every family, upon every individual Christian, is laid the
[125] duty of barring the way against corrupt speech. When in the com-
pany of those who indulge in foolish talk, it is our duty to change the
subject of conversation if possible. By the help of the grace of God
we should quietly drop words or introduce a subject that will turn
the conversation into a profitable channel.—Christ’s Object Lessons,
337.
Support of Law and Order—We are not required to defy au-
thorities. Our words, whether spoken or written, should be carefully
considered, lest we place ourselves on record as uttering that which
would make us appear antagonistic to law and order. We are not to
say or do anything that would unnecessarily close up our way. We
are to go forward in Christ’s name, advocating the truths committed
to us.—The Acts of the Apostles, 69.
Right Things—Please read the fifty-eighth chapter of Isaiah.
Great light is given in this chapter. The earnest prayer from the
humble, contrite heart will be heard and answered. “Blessed is the
man that trusteth in the Lord, and whose hope the Lord is. For he
shall be as a tree planted by the waters, and that spreadeth out her
roots by the river, and shall not see when heat cometh, but her leaf
shall be green; and shall not be careful in the year of drought, neither
shall cease from yielding fruit.” This we have a right to expect if
we cooperate with God by consecrating ourselves, soul, body, and
spirit to His keeping. No foolish talking or evilspeaking will then be
heard. The tongue will utter right things.—The Review and Herald,
[126] January 25, 1898.
Gossip, the Enemy’s Work—How careful we should be to have
our words and actions in harmony with the sacred truths that God
has committed to us! ... When you are associated with one another,
Chapter 25—Kinds of Negative Speaking 83
be guarded in your words. Let your conversation be of such a nature

that you will have no need to repent of it.... If a word is dropped that
is detrimental to the character of a friend or brother, never encourage
this evilspeaking; for it is the work of the enemy. Remind the speaker
that God’s Word forbids this kind of conversation.—The Review
and Herald, February 25, 1904.
Effects of Improper Conversation—The sin of foolish talk is
common among those who claim to believe the most solemn truths
ever given to our world. Because of this commonplace, frivolous
talk, the Spirit of the Lord is grieved away. Improper conversation
is the reason of such a lack of faith and power among the people of
God.—Lt 47, 1897.
No Frivolity Nor Trifling—All frivolity, all cheapness of con-
versation, all jesting and joking, weakens the soul, and weans the
heart from prayer. Like Paul, the true followers of Christ will ever
bear about in the body the dying of the Lord Jesus; they cannot
keep in mind the sufferings of Christ for them, and yet be light and
trifling.—Gospel Workers, 233, 1892 edition.
Foolish Talk—But few realize that they drive away the Spirit of
God with their selfish thoughts and feelings, their foolish, trifling
talk.... If the grace of Christ were planted in their hearts, and striking [127]
its roots down deep into good soil, they would bear fruit of an
altogether different character.... The converting power of God is
alone sufficient to establish pure principles in the heart, so that the
wicked one may find nothing to assail.... Purity in speech, and
true Christian courtesy should be constantly practiced.—Sons and
Daughters of God, 316.
Account of Every Word—How many words are spoken in light-
ness and foolishness, in jesting and joking! This would not be so
did the followers of Christ realize the truth of the words, “Every idle
word that men shall speak, they shall give account thereof in the day
of judgment. For by thy words thou shalt be justified, and by thy
words thou shalt be condemned.”—The S.D.A. Bible Commentary
4:1141.
Unsanctified Words—The soul will never free itself to come
into the clear, deep knowledge of the love of God until the speech
is converted. The counterworking power of unsanctified, faith-
less, cheap words is the great hindrance to our prayers. God will
draw nigh to every soul that will draw nigh to Him. But the Spirit
of God will depart from those who leave the presence of God,
and enter into vain conversation, speaking many words that are
of no weight or purpose. The spiritual experience of such will stop
abruptly.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
A Stumbling Block to Sinners—This spirit of jesting and jok-
[128] ing, of lightness and trifling, is a stumbling block to sinners and a
worse stumbling block to those who give way to the inclination of
the unsanctified heart.—Evangelism, 641.
Gossip and Nonsense—The giddy laugh, the jesting, the joking,
sickens the soul that is feeding on Christ. Cheap, foolish talk is
painful to Him. With a humble heart read carefully 1 Peter 1:13-
18. Those who enjoy talking should see that their words are select
and well chosen. Be careful how you speak. Be careful how you
represent the religion you have accepted. You may feel it no sin to
gossip and talk nonsense, but this grieves your Saviour, and saddens
the heavenly angels.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 457.
Vain Conversation—Listen to the vain, frivolous conversation;
hear the laugh, the jesting, the joking. Is this imitating the Pattern?
Still listen—is Jesus mentioned? Is the truth the theme of conversa-
tion? Are the speakers glorying in the cross of Christ?—Testimonies
Exaggerated Speech—Our thoughts produce our words and our
words react upon our thoughts. If a man forms the habit of using
sacred words reverently, he will form the custom of carefulness of
speech, knowing that there is a Witness to every word uttered. When
the feelings become excited and the speech is exaggerated, the mode
of speaking is always extreme. It acts and reacts upon ourselves.
The Word declares, “By thy words thou shalt be justified, and
[129] by thy words thou shalt be condemned.” Matthew 12:37. If our
words act upon ourselves they act more powerfully upon others.
There is great mischief done by words spoken. God alone knows
and measures the result of a careless, exaggerated mode of speaking.
There is much swearing done in spirit.—That I May Know Him,
137.
Meaningless Phrases and Expletives—God’s Word condemns
also the use of those meaningless phrases and expletives that border
on profanity. It condemns the deceptive compliments, the evasions
Chapter 25—Kinds of Negative Speaking 85
of truth, the exaggerations, the misrepresentations in trade, that are

current in society and in the business world. “Let your speech be,
Yea, yea; Nay, nay: and whatsoever is more than these is of the evil
one.” Matthew 5:37, R.V.
“As a mad man who casteth firebrands, arrows, and death, so is
the man that deceiveth his neighbor, and saith, Am not I in sport?”
Proverbs 26:18, 19.
Closely allied to gossip is the covert insinuation, the sly innu-
endo, by which the unclean in heart seek to insinuate the evil they
dare not openly express. Every approach to these practices the youth
should be taught to shun as they would shun the leprosy.—Education,
236.
Judicial Oath—I saw that the words of our Lord, “Swear not
at all,” do not touch the judicial oath. “Let your communication
be, Yea, yea; Nay, nay: for whatsoever is more than these cometh
of evil.” This refers to common conversation. Some exaggerate in
their language. Some swear by their own life; others swear by their [130]
head—as sure as they live; as sure as they have a head. Some take
heaven and earth to witness that such things are so. Some hope that
God will strike them out of existence if what they are saying is not
true. It is this kind of common swearing against which Jesus warns
His disciples.—Testimonies for the Church 1:201. [131]
Chapter 26—Love and Kindness
Kind, Comforting Words—When poor, wounded, bruised

souls come to you for words of hope, you are to speak to them
the words of Christ. Do you refuse to give them pleasant, courteous,
kind words? Those who speak as Christ spoke will never plant bitter
words like barbed arrows in the wounded soul. “The Lord hearkened
and heard.” Will you bear in mind that the Lord hears the words we
speak, and is acquainted with the spirit that prompts our actions?
... Is it not Christlike to speak kind words, comforting words, even
though you feel inclined to do otherwise?—The Review and Herald,
May 26, 1896.
Law of Kindness on Our Lips—Work disinterestedly, lovingly,
patiently, for all with whom you are brought into contact. Show no
impatience. Utter not one unkind word. Let the love of Christ be
in your hearts, the law of kindness on your lips.—Welfare Ministry,
76.
Thoughtful Attentions—Every soul we meet is the purchase of
the blood of Christ, and kind words and thoughtful attentions are
[132] due those who come among us. The youth need the help of kindly
words and deeds.—Manuscript 33, 1911.
The Truth in Love—As the dew and the still showers fall upon
the withering plants, so let words fall gently when seeking to win
men from error. God’s plan is first to reach the heart. We are to speak
the truth in love, trusting in Him to give it power for the reforming
of the life. The Holy Spirit will apply to the soul the word that is
spoken in love.—The Ministry of Healing, 157.
Less Criticism, Greater Influence for Good—In the work of
helping others, we may gain most precious victories. We should
devote ourselves with untiring zeal, with earnest fidelity, with self-
denial, and with patience, to the work of helping those who need
to develop. Kind, encouraging words will do wonders. There are
many who, if a constant, cheerful effort is put forth in their behalf,
without faultfinding or chiding, will show themselves susceptible of
86
Chapter 26—Love and Kindness 87
improvement. The less we criticize others, the greater will be our in-
fluence over them for good. To many, frequent, positive admonitions
will do more harm than good. Let Christlike kindness be enjoined
upon all.—Medical Ministry 208, 209.
A Cure for Sickness and Grief—The Lord Jesus wants us to
bear a pleasant countenance, and to speak kind, sympathetic words.
Even if we are sick, or if we feel out of sorts, we need not tell others.
If we will talk of the goodness of the Lord, this will act as a cure for [133]
sadness and grief.—Manuscript 39, 1908.
God’s Word a Guide for Daily Speech—Our words, whether
we are in the home or associating with those outside the home, will
be kind and affectionate and pure. If we study the Word, and make
it a part of our lives, as represented by the words, “Eating the Word,”
we shall have a wholesome experience, which will always speak
forth the truth. We shall search our hearts diligently, comparing our
daily speech and tenor of work with the Word, that we may make no
mistake.—Manuscript 3, 1906.
Outward Expression of Inward Grace—The chief requisite
of language is that it be pure and kind and true—“the outward ex-
pression of an inward grace.” ... The best school for this language
study is the home.
Kind words are as dew and gentle showers to the soul. The
Scripture says of Christ that grace was poured into His lips, that He
might “know how to speak a word in season to him that is weary.”
And the Lord bids us, “Let your speech be alway with grace,” “that
it may minister grace unto the hearers.”—The Adventist Home, 435.
Courteous Christians—Christians are elevated in their conver-
sation; and although they believe it to be sin to condescend to foolish
flattery, they are courteous, kind, and benevolent. Their words are
those of sincerity and truth.—Messages to Young People, 349. [134]
Pleasure Provided by God—God has provided for everyone
pleasure that may be enjoyed by rich and poor alike—the pleasure
found in cultivating pureness of thought and unselfishness of ac-
tion, the pleasure that comes from speaking sympathizing words
and doing kindly deeds. From those who perform such service,
the light of Christ shines to brighten lives darkened by many sor-
rows.—Testimonies for the Church 9:57.
Kindly Words and Loving Deeds—God desires that the boun-

ties which He has freely given to His children shall be communicated
to those who are in need. By this communication, by the utterance
of kindly words, accompanied by deeds of love, those who work for
God will find entrance to hearts, and will win others to Christ.—The
Review and Herald, December 14, 1897.
A Meek and Lowly Spirit—As you go to the one you suppose
to be in error, see that you speak in a meek and lowly spirit; for the
wrath of man worketh not the righteousness of God. The erring can
be restored in no other way than in the spirit of meekness, gentleness,
and tender love. Be careful in your manner. Avoid anything in look
or gesture, word or tone, that savors of pride or self-sufficiency.
Guard yourself against a word or look that would exalt yourself, or
place your goodness and righteousness in contrast with their failings.
Beware of the most distant approach to disdain, overbearing, or
contempt. With care avoid every appearance of anger; and though
[135] you use plainness of speech, let there be no reproach, no railing
accusation, no token of warmth but that of earnest love.
Above all, let there be no shadow of hate or ill will, no bitterness
or sourness of expression. Nothing but kindness and gentleness can
flow from a heart of love. Yet all these precious fruits need not
hinder you from speaking in the most serious, solemn manner, as
though angels were directing their eyes upon you, and you were
acting in reference to the coming judgment.—Testimonies for the
[136] Church 2:52.
Chapter 27—Effect of Words on Oneself
Careless and Irreverent Criticism—The habit of careless and

irreverent criticism reacts upon the character, in fostering irrever-
ence and unbelief. Many a man indulging this habit has gone on
unconscious of danger, until he was ready to criticize and reject the
work of the Holy Spirit. Jesus said, “Every idle word that men shall
speak, they shall give account thereof in the day of judgment. For
by thy words thou shalt be justified, and by thy words thou shalt be
condemned.”—The Desire of Ages, 323.
Mental and Physical Health—Every kind and sympathizing
word spoken to the sorrowful, every act to relieve the oppressed,
and every gift to supply the necessities of our fellow beings, given
or done with an eye to God’s glory, will result in blessings to the
giver. Those who are thus working are obeying a law of heaven
and will receive the approval of God. The pleasure of doing good
to others imparts a glow to the feelings which flashes through the
nerves, quickens the circulation of the blood, and induces mental
and physical health.—Testimonies for the Church 4:56. [137]
Cheerfulness and Peace—While cheerfulness and a calm res-
ignation and peace will make others happy and healthy, it will be of
the greatest benefit to oneself. Sadness and talking of disagreeable
things is encouraging the disagreeable scenes, bringing back upon
oneself the disagreeable effect. God wants us to forget all these—not
look down but up, up!—Mind, Character, and Personality 2:662.
Help for Others, Help to Oneself—Many are in obscurity.
They have lost their bearings. They know not what course to pursue.
Let the perplexed ones search out others who are in perplexity, and
speak to them words of hope and encouragement. When they begin
to do this work, the light of heaven will reveal to them the path that
they should follow. By their words of consolation to the afflicted
they themselves will be consoled. By helping others, they them-
selves will be helped out of their difficulties. Joy takes the place of
sadness and gloom. The heart, filled with the Spirit of God, glows
89
with warmth toward every fellow being. Every such an one is no

longer in darkness; for his “darkness” is “as the noon day.”—The
Sympathy for Others, Not for Self—The lives of some are
without peace or gladness because they never get out of the range
of self. They are ever reaching out for sympathy from others. If
they would go to work to see how helpful they could be, and would
speak words of love and courage, their souls, now dry and sorrowful,
[138] would become like a watered garden.—Sons and Daughters of God,
88.
Passionate Words—One passionate word will give Satan the
advantage and often wound your own soul and turn others away
from the light.—The Review and Herald, May 3, 1887.
Anger as Intoxication—When one once gives place to an angry
spirit, he is just as much intoxicated as the man who has put the
glass to his lips. Learn the eloquence of silence and know that God
respects the purchase of the blood of Christ. Educate yourselves;
we must learn every day. We must come up higher and higher and
closer to God. Clear the rubbish away from the King’s highway.
Make a way that the King may walk in our midst. Put away filthy
communications out of your mouth (see Colossians 3:8).—Mind,
Character, and Personality 2:582.
Vehemence a Self-Inflicted Wound—Severe tests will come to
you. Put your trust in the Lord Jesus Christ. Remember that by
vehemence you will wound yourself. If under all circumstances you
will sit in heavenly places in Christ, your words will not be charged
with bullets that wound hearts and that may destroy life.—Mind,
Character, and Personality 2:578.
Idle and Evil Words—Closely connected with Christ’s warning
in regard to the sin against the Holy Spirit is a warning against idle
and evil words. The words are an indication of that which is in the
heart. “Out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaketh.” But
[139] the words are more than an indication of character; they have power
to react on the character. Men are influenced by their own words.
Often under a momentary impulse, prompted by Satan, they give
utterance to jealousy or evil surmising, expressing that which they
do not really believe; but the expression reacts on the thoughts. They
are deceived by their words, and come to believe that true which was
Chapter 27—Effect of Words on Oneself 91
spoken at Satan’s instigation. Having once expressed an opinion

or decision, they are often too proud to retract it, and try to prove
themselves in the right, until they come to believe that they are. It
is dangerous to utter a word of doubt, dangerous to question and
criticize divine light.—The Desire of Ages, 323.
Evilspeaking a Twofold Curse—Who does not love life and
desire good days? Yet how few comply with the conditions, to refrain
the tongue from evil and the lips from speaking guile. Few are
willing to follow the Saviour’s example of meekness and humility.
Many ask the Lord to humble them, but are unwilling to submit to
the needful discipline. When the test comes, when trials or even
annoyances occur, the heart rebels, and the tongue utters words that
are like poisoned arrows or blasting hail.
Evilspeaking is a twofold curse, falling more heavily upon the
speaker than upon the hearer. He who scatters the seeds of dis-
sension and strife reaps in his own soul the deadly fruits. How
miserable is the talebearer, the surmiser of evil! He is a stranger to
true happiness.—Testimonies for the Church 5:176. [140]
Chapter 28—Discernment in Reproof
Message of Truth—If ever a people needed to walk before God

as did Enoch, Seventh-day Adventists need to do so now, showing
their sincerity by pure words, clean words, words full of sympathy,
tenderness, and love.
There are times when words of reproof and rebuke are called
for. Those who are out of the right way must be aroused to see
their peril. A message must be given that shall startle them from
the lethargy which enchains their senses. Moral renovation must
take place, else souls will perish in their sins. Let the message of
truth, like a sharp, two-edged sword, cut its way to the heart. Make
appeals that will arouse the careless and bring foolish, wandering
minds back to God.—Testimonies for the Church 7:155.
Reproof in Love—In seeking to correct or reform others we
should be careful of our words. They will be a savor of life unto life
or of death unto death. In giving reproof or counsel, many indulge
in sharp, severe speech, words not adapted to heal the wounded soul.
By these ill-advised expressions the spirit is chafed, and often the
[141] erring ones are stirred to rebellion. All who would advocate the
principles of truth need to receive the heavenly oil of love. Under
all circumstances reproof should be spoken in love. Then our words
will reform but not exasperate. Christ by His Holy Spirit will supply
the force and the power. This is His work.—Christ’s Object Lessons,
337.
So-Called Frankness, a Form of Selfishness—Some pride
themselves on being outspoken, blunt, and rough, and they call
this frankness; but it is not rightly named, it is selfishness of the
deepest dye. These persons may have virtues; they may be liberal,
and have kind impulses; but their discourteous manners render them
almost insupportable. They criticize, they wound, they say disagree-
able things. Will the character they are cultivating recommend them
to Jesus? Will it fit them for the society of heaven? We do well to
examine ourselves to see what manner of spirit we are cherishing.
92
Chapter 28—Discernment in Reproof 93
Let us learn to speak gently, quietly, even under circumstances the

most trying. Let us control not only our words, but our thoughts
and imaginations. Let us be kind, be courteous in our words and
deportment. There is a great neglect in this respect.—The Review
and Herald, April 29, 1884.
Sour Christians—The good qualities which many possess are
hidden, and instead of attracting souls to Christ they repulse them.
If these persons could see the influence of their uncourteous ways
and unkind expressions upon unbelievers, and how offensive is such [142]
conduct in the sight of God, they would reform their habits, for a
lack of courtesy is one of the greatest stumbling blocks to sinners.
Selfish, complaining, sour Christians bar the way, so that sinners do
not care to approach Christ.—Our High Calling, 229.
Hard Words—Hard words beat upon the heart through the ear,
awakening to life the worst passions of the soul and tempting men
and women to break God’s commandments.—The Adventist Home,
439.
The Correcting of Children—Harsh, angry words are not of
heavenly origin. Scolding and fretting never help. Instead, they stir
up the worst feelings of the human heart. When your children do
wrong and are filled with rebellion, and you are tempted to speak and
act harshly, wait before you correct them. Give them an opportunity
to think, and allow your temper to cool.—Child Guidance, 246.
Rude Angles and Rough Points—The sharp, rude angles and
rough points in our character, the manifestations of selfishness in
unkind words and actions, tear away the delicate fabric of human
love and happiness.—The Review and Herald, July 18, 1893.
Servants of the Wicked One—He who drinks in the spirit of
Christ will let it flow forth in kind words, and be expressed in cour-
teous deportment.... But those who profess the truth and at the same
time are rough, and sour, and unkind in words and deportment, have
not learned of Jesus; all these manifestations show that they are yet [143]
servants of the wicked one.—Our High Calling, 238.
Education of Our Lips—Let us make a covenant with God that
we will not speak one word of envy or unkindness. Let not your
lips dishonor God by fretful words of complaint and dissatisfaction.
Educate your lips to praise Him from whom all blessings flow.—The
Unnecessary Disputing—Unless some question of vital impor-

tance is involved, be ready to yield your own opinion rather than to
create a dispute. Even though you may by argument gain your point,
yet you may place a burden upon someone else, far outweighing
the advantage you think you will gain. It is hard to heal the wounds
caused by harsh words.
Often you may preserve peace by guarding the tongue. Never in-
troduce into your conversation matters that will create strife, hurting
your own soul and the souls of others.—Manuscript 60, 1903.
Hasty, Impatient Speech—In the use of language there is per-
haps no error that old and young are more ready to pass over lightly
in themselves than hasty, impatient speech. They think it a sufficient
excuse to plead, “I was off my guard, and did not really mean what
I said.” But God’s Word does not treat it lightly. The Scripture says:
“Seest thou a man that is hasty in his words? there is more hope
of a fool than of him.” Proverbs 29:20. “He that hath no rule over
[144] his own spirit is like a city that is broken down, and without walls.”
Proverbs 25:28.
In one moment, by the hasty, passionate, careless tongue, may
be wrought evil that a whole lifetime’s repentance cannot undo. Oh,
the hearts that are broken, the friends estranged, the lives wrecked,
by the harsh, hasty words of those who might have brought help and
healing!—Education, 236, 237.
A Well-Regulated Temper—It is the “soft answer” which “tur-
neth away wrath.” Revenge has never conquered a foe. A well-regu-
lated temper exerts a good influence on all around; but “he that hath
no rule over his own spirit is like a city that is broken down, and
without walls.”—Testimonies for the Church 4:367, 368.
Tirades and Swearing—A large share of life’s happiness is
dependent upon our manners and actions toward others. The sharp
word must be left unspoken. The passionate words must be quenched
in the love of Jesus Christ; for if this dross is not cleansed from the
soul, there is no hope of eternal life. The selfish temper, and tirade of
passionate words is placed in the same dark list with swearing.—Lt
6a, 1893.
Evil Thinking and Speaking—There is nothing Christ needs
so much as agents who feel the necessity of representing Him. Evil-
Chapter 28—Discernment in Reproof 95
speaking and evil-thinking are ruinous to the soul.—Manuscript 8a,

1888.
No Words of Irritation—God desires your words to be life-
giving. Not a word of irritation is to be spoken. However provoked [145]
you may feel, keep back every word that would stir up the evil in
another heart. Speech is a great talent; and God desires every one
of you to reach the standard of Christlikeness. Let every word you
speak bless and elevate.—Manuscript 65, 1901.
Criticism of Others—There is often a great temptation to talk of
things which do not profit the speaker or the hearer, but which bring
evil and barrenness to both. Our probationary time is too brief to be
spent in dwelling upon the shortcomings of others.—Testimonies
Sanctified Lips—The truly converted man has no inclination to
think or talk of the faults of others. His lips are sanctified, and as
God’s witness he testifies that the grace of Christ has transformed
his heart.... Those only will enter heaven who have overcome the
temptation to think and speak evil.—Sons and Daughters of God,
348.
Today’s Cannibals—Slanderous speeches, which is in truth
cannibalism, will not be spoken by those who are feeding on that
which is the Bread of Life, the Word of the living God, and delighting
themselves on the marrow and fatness of God’s exceeding great and
precious promises. Through Jesus Christ the soul is in communion
with the heavenly angels, and can have no desire to indulge in foolish
chit-chat conversation, to sit at the table with slanderers (cannibals).
Jesus Christ would have His children “laborers together with Him,” [146]
prayerful, kind, benevolent, and full of activity.—Lt 14a, 1893.
Seeds of Suspicion and Distrust—Let those who fear God and
believe the truth put a guard on their lips. Let them be determined
not to speak words that will injure the cause of God, or give a wrong
representation of the work being done in any of His institutions.
Let them be careful not to speak words that will be a temptation to
someone else to withhold the confidence and the words of courage
that ought to be given to those who have been severely tried, and
who, perhaps, have been working early and late to fulfill the many
calls of duty coming to them, until it seems as if the mind would
give way under the strain. Often, at such times, false impressions
regarding such workers are made on minds by cruel words, full of

surmisings. The seeds of suspicion and distrust, like thistledown,
are carried far and wide, and can never be gathered up.—Manuscript
94, 1904.
Words the Holy Spirit Can Approve—The love of God in the
heart will always lead us to speak gentle words. “Charity (love)
suffereth long and is kind; charity envieth not; charity vaunteth not
itself, is not puffed up, doth not behave itself unseemly, is not easily
provoked, thinketh no evil. Rejoiceth not in iniquity, but rejoiceth in
the truth; beareth all things, believeth all things, hopeth all things,
endureth all things. Charity never faileth.”
Shall we not remember this? If the love of God is in our hearts,
[147] we shall not think evil, we shall not be easily disturbed, we shall not
give loose reign to passion, but we will show that we are yoked up
with Christ, and that the restraining power of His Spirit leads us to
speak words that He can approve. The yoke of Christ is the restraint
of the Holy Spirit, and when we become heated by passion, let us
say, No; I have Christ by my side, and I will not make Him ashamed
[148] of me by speaking hot, fiery words.—Manuscript 73, 1897.
Chapter 29—Praise and Thanksgiving
Expression of Praise to God—Brethren and sisters, the Lord

is our God. If Christ is formed within, the hope of glory, we have a
hope in God that it is impossible for us to keep to ourselves. We will
praise Him. We do not praise Him as much as we should. Whoso
offers praise glorifies God. Now instead of speaking doleful words,
and telling of our trials and afflictions, let us thank God that we
can speak at all, and resolve that we will endeavor to glorify His
name.—Manuscript 39, 1908.
Continual Praise—Our voices should be oftener heard in praise
and thanksgiving to God. His praise should continually be in our
hearts and upon our lips.—The Review and Herald, May 22, 1900.
Precious Chapters in Our Experience—Far more than we do,
we need to speak of the precious chapters in our experience. Af-
ter a special outpouring of the Holy Spirit, our joy in the Lord
and our efficiency in His service would be greatly increased by re-
counting His goodness and His wonderful works in behalf of His
children.—Christ’s Object Lessons, 299, 300. [149]
Rejoicing in Heaven—“They that feared the Lord,” writes the
prophet Malachi, “spake often one to another: and the Lord hear-
kened, and heard it, and a book of remembrance was written before
Him for them that feared the Lord, and that thought upon His name.”
Were the words spoken, words of complaint, of faultfinding, of
self-sympathy? No; in contrast to those who speak against God,
those who fear Him speak words of courage, of thankfulness, and of
praise.... Such words make all heaven rejoice. Those who utter them
may be poor in worldly possessions, but by faithfully giving to God
the portion He claims, they acknowledge their indebtedness to Him.
Self-serving does not make up the chapters of their life history. In
love and gratitude, with songs of joy upon their lips, they bring their
offerings to God, saying as did David, “Of Thine own we freely give
Thee.”—The Review and Herald, January 5, 1897.
97
From the Treasure of Our Heart—If we enjoy the love of

God in our hearts, we will have something to say. From the treasure
of our heart we will bring forth good things. We will render to
God the fruit of our lips. Our words will be words of praise and
thanksgiving.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
God’s Mercy and Truth—I saw that God has been merciful in
giving us the power of speech. He has given us a tongue, and we
are accountable to Him for its use. We should glorify God with our
mouth, speaking in honor of the truth and of His unbounded mercy,
[150] and overcome by the word of our testimony through the blood of the
Lamb.—Early Writings, 114.
Praise Better Than Complaint—It is better to praise the Lord
than to complain. Let not our tongues utter words of which we shall
be ashamed when Christ shall come in His glory with all the holy
angels with Him. We must be clean in lips and in heart; we must be
[151] sanctified and refined, even as Christ was.—Manuscript 95, 1909.
Chapter 30—Care in Speaking of Others
Good Qualities in Others—Cultivate the habit of speaking well

of others. Dwell upon the good qualities of those with whom you as-
sociate, and see as little as possible of their errors and failings. When
tempted to complain of what someone has said or done, praise some-
thing in that person’s life or character. Cultivate thankfulness. Praise
God for His wonderful love in giving Christ to die for us.—The
A Way of Salvation for the Tempted—No one is ever made
better by denunciation and recrimination. To tell a tempted soul of
his guilt in no way inspires him with a determination to do better.
Point the erring, discouraged one to Him who is able to save to
the uttermost all who come to Him. Show him what he may be-
come. Tell him that there is in him nothing that recommends him to
God, but that Christ died for him that he might be accepted in the
Beloved.—Mind, Character, and Personality 2:453.
No Haughty or Accusing Words—Speech is a wonderful tal-
ent. How much more will God be glorified with pleasant speech of, [152]
or in regard to, His blood-bought heritage than with faultfinding.
Clouds will come; wicked speech will come from those who are
enemies of the truth, to oppress the righteous; but never let haughty
and accusing words come from any believers against other believ-
ers. Have we not enough of God’s tokens and blessings to keep our
mouth filled with thanksgiving and praise, and glorify Him?
Will you be justified in uttering expressions of ill feeling and
ill repute against those whom we suppose have erred? Have we
never made any mistakes ourselves? Have we never been in the
slough of despond? God help us to bear in mind how hard it is when
tempted of the devil to have our own brethren step on the side of the
devil, and try to hurt and destroy. When tempted to speak words of
faultfinding, begin to sing, “Praise ye the Lord.”—Manuscript 129,
1901.
99
Flattery As Mind Perversion—All flattery should be put away,

for it is Satan’s work to flatter. Poor, weak, fallen men generally think
enough of themselves and need no help in this direction. Flattering
your ministers is out of place. It perverts the mind and does not lead
to meekness and humility; yet men and women love to be praised,
and it is too frequently the case that ministers love it. Their vanity is
gratified by it, but it has proved a curse to many. Reproof is more to
be prized than flattery.—Testimonies for the Church 2:338.
[153] Unrealized Hopes—Flattering words are sweet to the unconse-
crated heart, and some who think they are standing firm, are dazed,
allured, and intoxicated with hopes that will never be realized. A
great wrong has been done in this way. All should think and speak
modestly of their own capabilities, and should be careful not to
encourage pride and self-esteem in others.—Testimonies for the
Church 5:478.
Commendation a Danger—There are men who are ever talking
and gossiping and bearing false witness, who sow the seeds of
discord and engender strife. Heaven looks upon this class as Satan’s
most efficient servants. But the man who is injured is in a far less
dangerous position than when fawned upon and extolled for a few of
his efforts which appear successful. The commendation of apparent
friends is more dangerous than reproach.
Every man who praises himself brushes the luster from his best
efforts. A truly noble character will not stoop to resent the false
accusations of enemies; every word spoken falls harmless, for it
strengthens that which it cannot overthrow.—Testimonies for the
Church 4:607.
Truth in the Heart, Truth on the Lips—How careful we
should be, that our words and actions are all in harmony with the
sacred truth that God has committed to us! ... When you are associ-
ated together, be guarded in your words. Let your conversation be of
such a nature that you will have no need of repentance.... If the love
of the truth is in your heart, you will talk of the truth. You will talk
[154] of the blessed hope that you have in Jesus. If you have love in your
heart, you will seek to establish and build up your brother in the most
holy faith. If a word is dropped that is detrimental to the character
of your friend or brother, do not encourage this evilspeaking. It is
the work of the enemy. Kindly remind the speaker that the Word
Chapter 30—Care in Speaking of Others 101
of God forbids that kind of conversation.—The Review and Herald,

June 5, 1888. [155]
Chapter 31—Hope and Encouragement
A Healing Balm—There are souls who err, and who feel their
shame and their folly. They are hungry for words of encouragement.
They look upon their mistakes and errors until they are almost driven
to desperation. Instead of ... reproving and condemning and taking
away the last ray of hope that the Sun of Righteousness sheds into
their hearts, let your words fall as healing balm upon the bruised soul.
Be not like desolating hail that beats down and destroys the tender
hope springing up in the hearts. Leave not the hungry, starving
soul in his helplessness to perish because you fail to speak words of
tenderness and encouragement.—Our High Calling, 295.
Encouragement for the Angels—Words of cheer and encour-
agement spoken when the soul is sick and the pulse of courage is
low—these are regarded by the Saviour as if spoken to Himself. As
hearts are cheered, the heavenly angels look on in pleased recogni-
tion.—The Ministry of Healing, 159.
[156] Brave, Hopeful Words—There is many a brave soul sorely
pressed by temptation, almost ready to faint in the conflict with
self and with the powers of evil. Do not discourage such a one in
his hard struggle. Cheer him with brave, hopeful words that shall
urge him on his way. Thus the light of Christ may shine from you.
“None of us liveth to himself.” Romans 14:7. By our unconscious
influence others may be encouraged and strengthened, or they may
be discouraged and repelled from Christ and the truth.—Steps to
Christ, 120.
No Doubt nor Discouragement—Make it a rule never to utter
one word of doubt or discouragement. You can do much to brighten
the life of others and strengthen their efforts, by words of hope and
holy cheer.—Steps to Christ, 119, 120.
Nothing Cheap nor Common—Let us educate the tongue to
speak right words—words that will encourage and strengthen our
fellow men. Let us talk of goodness, and mercy, and the love of
102
Chapter 31—Hope and Encouragement 103
God. Put away all unbelieving words, and all that is cheap and
common.—The Review and Herald, March 28, 1899.
Inspiration Through a Holy Boldness—Let the tongue be in-
spired with a holy boldness to speak words of encouragement, words
that will arouse and strengthen souls to break the bands of indolence
and security that bind them in uncertainty.—Lt 151, 1903.
Parrot-like Repetitions—You cannot reach hearts with a mere [157]
form of words, a parrot-like repetition of set phrases. What you
say must be the expression of a personal experience. If you cheer
hearts with words of courage and hope, it will be because the grace
and love of God are to you a living reality. It is God’s impress that
these souls are to receive, not your own. But if the worker has not
himself been refined, transformed, he cannot present the truth with
a freshness, a force, a power, that awakens responsive feelings in
those who hear the word of life.—The Review and Herald, April 12,
1892.
Words of Cheer—The wails of a world’s sorrow are heard all
around us. Sin is pressing its shadow upon us, and our minds must
be ready for every good word and work. We know that we have the
presence of Jesus. The sweet influence of His Holy Spirit is teaching
and guiding our thoughts, leading us to speak words that will cheer
and brighten the pathway of others.—Testimonies for the Church
6:115.
Pleasant, Agreeable Tones—We are to speak words that will
comfort and encourage. Brethren and sisters, train yourselves to
speak in pleasant, agreeable tones. It does no harm, but good, to
speak kindly, but to speak discourteously and roughly drives the holy
angels away in sadness.—The Review and Herald, June 15, 1905.
As a Nail in a Sure Place—Great thoughts, noble aspirations,
clear perceptions of truth, unselfish purposes, yearnings for piety
and holiness, will find expression in words that reveal the character [158]
of the heart treasure.
Those with whom we associate day by day need our help, our
guidance. They may be in such a condition of mind that a word
spoken in season will be as a nail in a sure place.—Prophets and
Kings, 348.
Seeds of Doubt a Service of Satan—Let us guard against speak-
ing words that discourage. Let us resolve never to engage in evils-
peaking and backbiting. Let us refuse to serve Satan by implanting

seeds of doubt. Let us guard against cherishing unbelief, or express-
ing it to others. Many, many times I have wished that there might be
circulated a pledge containing a solemn promise to speak only those
words that are pleasing to God. There is as great need for such a
pledge as there is for one against the use of intoxicating liquor. Let
us begin to discipline the tongue, remembering always that we can
do this only by disciplining the mind, for “out of the abundance of
the heart the mouth speaketh.” Matthew 12:34.—Our High Calling,
291.
Presentation of the Saviour—Oh, let no word be spoken to
cause deeper pain! To the soul weary of a life of sin, but knowing
not where to find relief, present the compassionate Saviour. Take
him by the hand, lift him up, speak to him words of courage and
hope. Help him to grasp the hand of the Saviour.—The Ministry of
Healing, 168.
[159] The Heavenly Ladder—He who comes to Jesus is setting his
feet upon a ladder that reaches from earth to heaven. Teach it by
pen, by voice, that God is above the ladder; the bright rays of His
glory are shining upon every round of the ladder. He is looking
graciously upon all who are climbing painfully upward, that He may
send them help, divine help, when the hand seems to be relaxing
and the foot trembling. Yes, tell it, tell it in words that will melt the
heart, that not one who shall perseveringly climb the ladder will fail
of an entrance into the everlasting kingdom of our Lord and Saviour
Jesus Christ; those who believe in Christ shall never perish, neither
shall any pluck them out of His hand.
Tell the people in clear, hopeful language how they may escape
the heritage of shame which is our deserved portion. But for Christ’s
sake do not present before them ideas that will discourage them,
that will make the way to heaven seem very difficult.—Selected
Messages 1:181, 182.
Remedy for Depression—We cannot afford to be in any way a
hindrance to others. Each has his own peculiar temptations and trials,
and we are to stand in a position where we can help and strengthen
the tempted. We are to encourage, and, if possible, lift up those that
are weak in the faith. By speaking of the promises of God, we may
Chapter 31—Hope and Encouragement 105
sometimes remove depression from the minds of those who are in

trial and difficulty.—Mind, Character, and Personality 2:435.
Conversation About Heaven—When we can associate together
to help one another heavenward, when the conversation is upon di- [160]
vine and heavenly things, then it amounts to something to talk; but
when the conversation centers upon self and earthly and unimportant
matters, silence is golden. The obedient ear will receive reproof with
humility, patience, and teachableness. Then only do our commu-
nications with each other prove beneficial, and fulfill all that God
would have them. When both sides of the divine instruction are
fulfilled, the wise reprover does his duty, and the obedient ear hears
to a purpose and is benefited.—Sons and Daughters of God, 166.
Sour, Disagreeable Minds—It is Satan’s work to talk of that
which concerns himself, and he is delighted to have human be-
ings talk of his power, of his working through the children of men.
Through indulgence in such conversation the mind becomes gloomy
and sour and disagreeable. We may become channels of communi-
cation for Satan, through which flow words that bring no sunshine
to any heart. But let us decide that this shall not be. Let us decide
not to be channels through which Satan shall communicate gloomy,
disagreeable thoughts. Let our words be not a savor of death unto
death, but of life unto life.—Testimonies for the Church 6:62, 63.
Our Weakness Not a Subject of Discussion—It is not praise-
worthy to talk of our weakness and discouragement. Let each one
say, “I am grieved that I yield to temptation, that my prayers are so
feeble, my faith so weak.”—In Heavenly Places, 276. [161]
No Virtue in Remembrance of Sins—Every time we talk dark-
ness, it pleases the enemy, for he does not want the joy of Christ to
dwell in our hearts by faith. Christ is to us a never-failing fountain
of refreshing joy. God does not regard it any virtue in us to keep
looking at and talking of our mistakes and sins.—Lt 42, 1896. [162]
Chapter 32—Faith a Topic of Conversation
A Law of Nature—It is a law of nature that our thoughts and

feelings are encouraged and strengthened as we give them utterance.
While words express thoughts, it is also true that thoughts follow
words. If we would give more expression to our faith, rejoice more
in the blessings that we know we have—the great mercy and love
of God—we should have more faith and greater joy. No tongue
can express, no finite mind can conceive, the blessing that results
from appreciating the goodness and love of God. Even on earth
we may have joy as a wellspring, never failing, because fed by the
streams that flow from the throne of God.—The Ministry of Healing,
251-253.
The Inevitable Harvest—Those who talk faith and cultivate
faith will have faith; but those who cherish and express doubts will
have doubts.—Testimonies for the Church 5:302.
The Source of Strength—If we would give more expression to
our faith, rejoice more in the blessings that we know we have—the
great mercy, forbearance, and love of God—we would daily have
[163] greater strength. Have not the precious words spoken by Christ,
the Prince of God, an assurance and power that should have great
influence upon us, that our heavenly Father is more willing to give
the Holy Spirit to them that ask Him than parents are to give good
gifts to their children?—Selected Messages 2:243.
Seeds of Doubt, a Harvest of Unbelief—Let us take heed to our
words. Let us talk faith, and we shall have faith. Never give place to
a thought of discouragement in the work of God. Never utter a word
of doubt. It is as seed sown in the heart of both speaker and hearers,
to produce a harvest of discouragement and unbelief.—Evangelism,
633.
Satan’s Great Advantage—Even under temptation, our lan-
guage may be that of faith and hope and courage. But no lightness,
no trifling, should be indulged in; no low witticism should escape
106
Chapter 32—Faith a Topic of Conversation 107
our lips, for these things give Satan great advantage.—The Review
and Herald, May 13, 1884.
Windows Open Toward Heaven—The more you talk faith, the
more faith you will have. The more you dwell upon discouragement,
talking to others about your trials, and enlarging upon them, to enlist
the sympathy which you crave, the more discouragements and trials
you will have. Why mourn over that which we cannot avoid? God
is inviting us to close the windows of the soul earthward and open
them heavenward that He may flood our hearts with the glory which
is shining across the threshold of heaven.—Mind, Character, and
Personality 2:579. [164]
Difficulties a Subject for Thanks—When someone asks how
you are feeling, do not try to think of something mournful to tell in
order to gain sympathy. Do not talk of your lack of faith and your
sorrows and sufferings. The tempter delights to hear such words.
When talking on gloomy subjects, you are glorifying him. We are
not to dwell on the great power of Satan to overcome us. Often we
give ourselves into his hands by talking of his power.
Let us talk instead of the great power of God to bind up all our
interests with His own. Tell of the matchless power of Christ, and
speak of His glory. All heaven is interested in our salvation. The
angels of God, thousands upon thousands, and ten thousand times
ten thousand, are commissioned to minister to those who shall be
heirs of salvation. They guard us against evil and press back the
powers of darkness that are seeking our destruction. Have we not
reason to be thankful every moment, thankful even when there are
apparent difficulties in our pathway?—The Ministry of Healing, 253,
254. [165]
Chapter 33—Simplicity in Our Speech
Secrets of Success for the Gospel—The success of the gospel

message does not depend upon learned speeches, eloquent testi-
monies, or deep arguments. It depends upon the simplicity of the
message and its adaptation to the souls that are hungering for the
bread of life. “What shall I do to be saved?”—this is the want of the
soul.—Christ’s Object Lessons, 231.
Purity and Simplicity—Our work should be to embrace ev-
ery opportunity to present the truth in its purity and simplicity
where there is any desire or interest to hear the reasons of our
faith.—Testimonies for the Church 3:214.
Work in the Cities—The Lord is speaking to His people at this
time, saying, Gain an entrance into the cities, and proclaim the
truth in simplicity and in faith. The Holy Spirit will work through
your efforts to impress hearts. Introduce no strange doctrine into
your message, but speak the simple words of the gospel of Christ,
which young and old can understand. The unlearned as well as the
educated are to comprehend the truths of the third angel’s message,
[166] and they must be taught in simplicity. If you would approach the
people acceptably, humble your hearts before God and learn His
ways.—.
Unlocking Closed Hearts—The true, honest words of a son or
daughter of God, spoken in natural simplicity, will open the door
to hearts that have long been locked.—Testimonies for the Church
6:115.
Simple Words May Open Locked Hearts—The most intellec-
tual, those who are looked upon and praised as the world’s most
gifted men and women, are often refreshed by the simple words that
flow from the heart of one who loves God and who can speak of
that love as naturally as the worldling speaks of the things which his
mind contemplates and feeds upon. Often the words well prepared
and studied have little influence. But the true, honest words of a son
or daughter of God, spoken in natural simplicity, will open the door
108
Chapter 33—Simplicity in Our Speech 109
to hearts that have long been locked.—Testimonies for the Church

6:115.
Too Much Proof—In this age, when pleasing fables are drifting
upon the surface and attracting the mind, truth presented in an easy
style, backed up with a few strong proofs, is better than to search and
bring forth an overwhelming array of evidence; for the point then
does not stand so distinct in many minds as before the objections
and evidences were brought before them. With many, assertions will
go further than long arguments. They take many things for granted.
Proof does not help the case in the minds of such.—Testimonies for [167]
the Church 3:36.
Plain Mileposts—The world needs labor now. Calls are coming
in from every direction like the Macedonian cry: “Come over and
help us.” Plain, pointed arguments, standing out as mileposts, will
do more toward convincing minds generally than will a large array
of arguments which cover a great deal of ground, but which none
but investigating minds will have interest to follow.—Testimonies
A Few Forcible Remarks—A few forcible remarks upon some
point of doctrine will fasten it in the mind much more firmly than if
such a mass of matter were presented that nothing lies out clear and
distinct in the mind of those ignorant of our faith. There should be
interspersed with the prophecies practical lessons of the teachings
of Christ.—Evangelism, 171, 172.
Seeds of Truth Too Deep—Some have cultivated the habit of
too great concentrativeness. The power to fix the mind upon one
subject to the exclusion of all others, is good to a limited degree,
but those who put the whole strength of the mind into one line of
thought are frequently deficient on other points. In conversation
these become tedious, and weary the listener. Their writings lack
a free, easy style. When they speak in public, the subject before
them holds their attention, and they are led on and on, to go deeper
and deeper into the matter. They seem to see knowledge and light
as they become interested and absorbed, but there are few who can [168]
follow them.
There is danger that such men will plant the seed of truth so
deep that the tender blade will never find the surface. Even the most
essential, manifest truths, those which are of themselves clear and
plain, may be so covered up with words as to be made cloudy and

indistinct.—Gospel Workers, 169.
Christ’s Words Understood—In view of all that lies before the
believer, his piety should be “always abounding.” He should labor
for souls with all his intelligence and powers. Not for eloquence
and honor is he to strive, but for simplicity of life and simplicity of
speech. Christ had no need to explain any word that He made use of.
All were simple, and all were understood by the most simple.—The
Review and Herald, January 7, 1909.
A Great Variety of Minds—Human minds vary. The minds
of different education and thought receive different impressions of
the same words, and it is difficult for one mind to give to one of a
different temperament, education, and habits of thought by language
exactly the same idea as that which is clear and distinct in his own
mind. Yet to honest men, right-minded men, he can be so simple and
plain as to convey his meaning for all practical purposes.—Selected
Messages 1:19.
The Highest Eloquence—You are to be the agent through
whom God will speak to the soul. Precious things will be brought
[169] to your remembrance, and with a heart overflowing with the love of
Jesus, you will speak words of vital interest and import. Your sim-
plicity and sincerity will be the highest eloquence, and your words
will be registered in the books of heaven as fit words, which are like
apples of gold in pictures of silver.—Sons and Daughters of God,
274.
Light With Every Word—At the Queensland camp meeting in
1898, instruction was given me for our Bible workers. In the visions
of the night, ministers and workers seemed to be in a meeting where
Bible lessons were being given. We said, “We have the Great Teacher
with us today,” and we listened with interest to His words. He said:
“There is a great work before you in this place. You will need to
present truth in its simplicity. Bring the people to the waters of
life. Speak to them the things which most concern their present and
eternal good. Let not your study of the Scriptures be of a cheap
or casual order. In all that you say, know that you have something
which is worthy of the time you take to say it, and of the time of
the hearers to hear. Speak of those things which are essential, those
things which will instruct, bringing light with every word.
Chapter 33—Simplicity in Our Speech 111
“Learn to meet the people where they are. Do not present sub-
jects that will arouse controversy. Let not your instruction be of a
character to perplex the mind. Do not cause the people to worry over
things which you may understand but which they do not see, unless
these are of vital consequence to the saving of the soul. Do not
present the Scriptures in a way to exalt self and encourage vainglory [170]
in the one who opens the Word. The work for this time is to train
students and workers to deal with subjects in a plain, serious, and
solemn manner.”—Testimonies for the Church 6:58, 59.
Spiritual Disease—All the sang-froid which is so common, the
theatrical gestures, all lightness and trifling, all jesting and joking,
must be seen by the one who wears Christ’s yoke to be “not conve-
nient”—an offense to God and a denial of Christ.
It unfits the mind for solid thought and solid labor. It makes men
inefficient, superficial, and spiritually diseased.—Evangelism, 644. [171]
[172]
[173]
Section 4—Voice Culture
Chapter 34—Importance of the Subject
Efficiency As Workers for Christ—By diligent effort all may

acquire the power to read intelligibly, and to speak in a full, clear,
round tone, in a distinct and impressive manner. By doing this we
may greatly increase our efficiency as workers for Christ.
Every Christian is called to make known to others the unsearch-
able riches of Christ; therefore he should seek for perfection in
speech. He should present the Word of God in a way that will com-
mend it to the hearers. God does not design that His human channels
shall be uncouth. It is not His will that man shall belittle or degrade
the heavenly current that flows through him to the world.
We should look to Jesus, the perfect Pattern; we should pray for
the aid of the Holy Spirit, and in His strength we should seek to train
every organ for perfect work.
Especially is this true of those who are called to public service.
Every minister and every teacher should bear in mind that he is
giving to the people a message that involves eternal interests. The
[174] truth spoken will judge them in the great day of final reckoning.
And with some souls the manner of the one delivering the message
will determine its reception or rejection. Then let the word be so
spoken that it will appeal to the understanding and impress the heart.
Slowly, distinctly, and solemnly should it be spoken, yet with all the
earnestness which its importance demands.
The right culture and use of the power of speech has to do with
every line of Christian work; it enters into the home life, and into all
our intercourse with one another. We should accustom ourselves to
speak in pleasant tones, to use pure and correct language, and words
that are kind and courteous. Sweet, kind words are as dew and gentle
showers to the soul. The Scripture says of Christ that grace was
poured into His lips that He might “know how to speak a word in
season to him that is weary.” Psalm 45:2; Isaiah 50:4. And the Lord
bids us, “Let your speech be alway with grace” (Colossians 4:6) “that
114
Chapter 34—Importance of the Subject 115
it may minister grace unto the hearers.” (Ephesians 4:29.)—Christ’s

Object Lessons, 335, 336.
Neglect of Voice Culture—The culture and right use of the
voice are greatly neglected, even by persons of intelligence and
Christian activity. There are many who read or speak in so low or so
rapid a manner that they cannot be readily understood. Some have a
thick, indistinct utterance; others speak in a high key, in sharp shrill
tones, that are painful to the hearers. Texts, hymns, and the reports
and other papers presented before public assemblies are sometimes
read in such a way that they are not understood and often so that their [175]
force and impressiveness are destroyed.—Christ’s Object Lessons,
335.
Duty of the Teacher—Voice culture should be taught in the
reading class; and in other classes the teacher should insist that the
students speak distinctly and use words which express their thoughts
clearly and forcibly. Students should be taught to use their abdominal
muscles in breathing and speaking. This will make the tones more
full and clear.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 216.
A Foundation Subject of Education—When voice culture,
reading, writing, and spelling take their rightful place in our schools,
there will be seen a great change for the better. These subjects have
been neglected because teachers have not recognized their value.
But they are more important than Latin and Greek. I do not say that
it is wrong to study Latin and Greek, but I do say that it is wrong to
neglect the subjects that lie at the foundation of education in order
to tax the mind with the study of these higher branches.—Counsels
Melody of the Voice—Those who gain correct ideas on the
subject of voice culture will see the necessity of educating and
training themselves so that they may honor God and bless others.
They will put themselves under patient, efficient teachers, and learn
to read in a way that will preserve the melody of the voice. With
an eye single to the glory of God they will make the most of their [176]
natural abilities. Commanding their own powers, they will not
be embarrassed by defects of speech, and their usefulness in the
cause of God will be increased.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and
Students, 247.
Soft, Musical Cadence—The one who gives Bible readings in

the congregation or in the family should be able to read with a soft,
musical cadence which will charm the hearers.—Testimonies for the
Church 6:380.
A Great Power—Let those who labor in word and doctrine
strive to perfect themselves in the use of language. The voice is a
great power, and yet many have not trained their voices in such a
way that they may be used to their highest capacity.—The Review
and Herald, March 5, 1895.
Clear Understanding for Everyone—He who has bestowed
upon us all the gifts that enable us to be workers together with God,
expects His servants to cultivate their voices so that they can speak
and sing in a way that all can understand.—Testimonies for the
Church 9:144.
Imperfect Utterance, a Dishonor to God—Let all make the
most of the talent of speech. God calls for a higher, more perfect
ministry. He is dishonored by the imperfect utterance of the one
who by painstaking effort could become an acceptable mouthpiece
for Him. The truth is too often marred by the channel through which
it passes.
The Lord calls upon all who are connected with His service to
[177] give attention to the cultivation of the voice, that they may utter in
an acceptable manner the great and solemn truths He has entrusted
to them. Let none mar the truth by defective utterance. Let not those
who have neglected to cultivate the talent of speech suppose that
they are qualified to minister, for they have yet to obtain the power
to communicate.—Testimonies for the Church 6:382, 383.
Defective Voices of Ministers—Ministers of the gospel should
know how to speak with power and expression, making the words of
eternal life so expressive and impressive that the hearers cannot but
feel their weight. I am pained as I hear the defective voices of many
of our ministers. Such ministers rob God of the glory He might have
if they had trained themselves to speak the word with power.
No man should regard himself as qualified to enter the ministry
until by persevering effort he has overcome every defect in his
utterance. If he attempts to speak to the people without knowing
how to use the talent of speech, half his influence is lost, for he has
Chapter 34—Importance of the Subject 117
little power to hold the attention of a congregation.—Testimonies

Abuse of the Gift of Speech—The gift of speech has been
greatly abused and widely perverted from its intended purpose; but
let those who claim to be children of the heavenly King awake to
their responsibility, and make the most of this talent. Let no one
say, “It is of no use for me to try to pray; for others do not hear
me.” Rather let him say, “I will make earnest effort to overcome this [178]
God-dishonoring habit of speaking in a low, indistinct tone. I will
put myself under discipline until my voice shall be audible even to
those who are dull of hearing.”—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and
Students, 245, 246.
Christ As Our Pattern—The teachings of Christ were impres-
sive and solemn; His voice was melodious. And should not we, as
well as Christ, study to have melody in our voices? He had a mighty
influence, for He was the Son of God. We are so far beneath Him
and so far deficient, that, [even if we] do the very best we can, our
efforts will be poor. We cannot gain and possess the influence that
He had; but why should we not educate ourselves to come just as
near to the Pattern as it is possible for us to do, that we may have
the greatest possible influence upon the people?
Our words, our actions, our deportment, our dress, everything,
should preach. Not only with our words should we speak to the
people, but everything pertaining to our person should be a sermon
to them, that right impressions may be made upon them, and that the
truth spoken may be taken by them to their homes. Thus our faith
will stand in a better light before the community.—Testimonies for
the Church 2:617, 618.
Responsibility of Youth—Young men and women, have you, as
individuals, purchased at infinite cost, sought to study to show your-
selves approved unto God, workmen which need not be ashamed?
Have you brought to God the precious talent of your voice, and
put forth painstaking effort to speak clearly, distinctly, and readily? [179]
However imperfect may be your manner of utterance, you may cor-
rect your faults, and refuse to allow yourself to have a nasal tone, or
to speak in a thick, indistinct way. If your articulation is distinct and
intelligible, your usefulness will be greatly increased. Then do not
leave one defective habit of speech uncorrected.—Fundamentals of

Correct Language and Cultivated Voice—The great educat-
ing book is the Bible, and yet it is little read or practiced. Oh, that
every individual would seek to make of himself all that he could,
improving his opportunities to the very best of his ability, purposing
to use every power which God has given him, not simply to advance
his temporal affairs, but to advance his spiritual interests. Oh, that
all might search diligently to know what is truth, to study earnestly
that they might have correct language and cultivated voices, that
they might present the truth in all its elevated and ennobling beauty.
Let no one imagine that he will drift into some position of use-
fulness. If men would be used to work for God, let them put to the
stretch their powers, and concentrate their minds in earnest applica-
tion. It is Satan that would keep men in ignorance and inefficiency,
that they may be developed in a one-sided way which they may
never be able to correct. He would have men exercise one set of
faculties to the exclusion of the exercise of another set, so that the
mind will lose its vigor, and when there is a real necessity, be unable
to rise to the emergency. God wants men to do their best, and while
[180] Satan is pulling the mind in one direction, Jesus is drawing it in
another.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 256.
Co-workers With the Holy Spirit—Some reason that the Lord
will qualify a man by His Spirit to speak as He would have him;
but the Lord does not propose to do the work which He has given
man to do. He has given us reasoning powers, and opportunities
to educate the mind and manners. And after we have done all we
can for ourselves, making the best use of the advantages within
our reach, then we may look to God with earnest prayer to do by
His Spirit that which we cannot do for ourselves—The Review and
[181] Herald, February 5, 1880.
Chapter 35—Clarity and Purity of Utterance
A Fitness for Speaking—By earnest prayer and diligent effort we

are to obtain a fitness for speaking. This fitness includes uttering
every syllable clearly, placing the force and emphasis where it be-
longs. Speak slowly. Many speak rapidly, hurrying one word after
another so fast that the effect of what they say is lost. Into what you
say put the spirit and life of Christ.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers,
and Students, 254, 255.
Cultivation of the Voice—He who has bestowed upon us all
the gifts that enable us to be workers together with God, expects His
servants to cultivate their voices so that they can speak and sing in a
way that all can understand.—Testimonies for the Church 9:144.
A Mouthpiece for God—The man who accepts the position of
being mouthpiece for God should consider it highly essential that he
present the truth with all the grace and intelligence he can, that the
truth may lose nothing in his presentation of it to the people. Those
who consider it a little thing to speak with an imperfect utterance
dishonor God.—Evangelism, 665. [182]
Overcome Indistinct Speech—In reading or in recitation the
pronunciation should be clear. A nasal tone or an ungainly attitude
should be at once corrected. Any lack of distinctness should be
marked as defective. Many have allowed themselves to form the
habit of speaking in a thick, indistinct way, as if their tongue were
too large for their mouth. This habit has greatly hindered their
usefulness.
If those who have defects in their manner of utterance will sub-
mit to criticism and correction, they may overcome these defects.
They should perseveringly practice speaking in a low, distinct tone,
exercising the abdominal muscles in deep breathing, and making the
throat the channel of communication. Many speak in a rapid way
and in a high, unnatural key. Such a practice will injure the throat
and lungs. As a result of continual abuse, the weak, inflamed organs
119
will become diseased, and consumption may result.—Counsels to

Parents, Teachers, and Students, 239.
Soft, Persuasive Tones—Be pure in speech. Cultivate a soft
and persuasive, not a harsh and dictatorial, tone of voice. Give the
children lessons in voice culture. Train their habits of speech, until
no coarse or rough words will come spontaneously from their lips
when any trial comes to them.—The Adventist Home, 435.
Controlled Volume—They [ministers] should speak with rev-
erence. Some destroy the solemn impression they may have made
upon the people, by raising their voices to a very high pitch and
[183] halloowing and screaming out the truth. When presented in this
manner, truth loses much of its sweetness, its force and solemnity.
But if the voice is toned right, if it has solemnity, and is so modulated
as to be even pathetic, it will produce a much better impression.
This was the tone in which Christ taught His disciples. He
impressed them with solemnity; He spoke in a pathetic manner.
But this loud halloowing—what does it do? It does not give the
people any more exalted views of the truth, and does not impress
them any more deeply. It only causes a disagreeable sensation to the
hearers, and wears out the vocal organs of the speaker. The tones
of the voice have much to do in affecting the hearts of those that
hear.—Testimonies for the Church 2:615.
Spiritless Speech—We have been pained as we have attended
conference meetings, tract society meetings, and meetings of various
kinds, where reports were read in an almost inaudible voice or in
a hesitating manner or a muffled tone. One half the interest in a
meeting is killed when the participants do their part in an indifferent,
spiritless fashion. They should learn to speak in such a way that they
can edify those who listen. Let everyone connected with missionary
work qualify himself to speak in a clear, attractive way, enunciating
his words perfectly.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students,
246, 247.
Home Instruction in Voice Culture—Instruction in vocal cul-
ture should be given in the home. Parents should teach their children
[184] to speak so plainly that the listeners can understand every word.
They should teach them to read the Bible with clear, distinct utter-
ance in a way that will honor God. And let not those who kneel
around the family altar put their faces in their hands close down to
Chapter 35—Clarity and Purity of Utterance 121
the chair when they address God. Let them lift up their heads and
with holy awe speak to their heavenly Father, uttering their words in
tones that can be heard.
Parents, train yourselves to speak in a way that will be a blessing
to your children. Women need to be educated in this respect. Even
the busy mothers, if they will, can cultivate the talent of speech and
can teach their children to read and speak correctly. They can do this
while they go about their work. It is never too late for us to improve.
God calls upon parents to bring all the perfection possible into the
home circle.—Testimonies for the Church 6:381, 382.
Musical Voices—Those who open the oracles of God to the
people should improve in their manner of communicating the truth,
that it may be presented to the world in an acceptable way. Place
proper emphasis upon the words that should be made impressive.
Speak slowly. Let the voice be as musical as possible.
God desires His ministers to seek for perfection, that they may
be vessels unto honor. They are to be controlled by the Holy Spirit;
and when they speak, they are to show an energy proportionate to the
importance of the subject they are presenting. They are to show that
the power about which they speak has made a change in their lives. [185]
When they are truly united with Christ, they will give the heavenly
invitation with an earnestness that will impress hearts. As they
manifest zeal in proclaiming the gospel message, a corresponding
earnestness will be produced in the hearers, and lasting impressions
for good will be made.—The Review and Herald, January 14, 1902.
Truth as Manna From Heaven—The truth should be spoken
clearly, slowly, forcibly, that it may impress the hearer. When the
truth in any line is presented it is essential for it to be understood,
that all its precious food, the bread of life, the manna from heaven,
may be received.—Testimonies to Ministers and Gospel Workers,
257.
Destruction of Body Organs—Many who might be useful men
are using up their vital force and destroying their lungs and vocal
organs by their manner of speaking. Some ministers have acquired
a habit of hurriedly rattling off what they have to say, as though
they had a lesson to repeat, and were hastening through it as fast
as possible. This is not the best manner of speaking. By using
proper care, every minister can educate himself to speak distinctly
and impressively, not to hurriedly crowd the words together without

taking time to breathe. He should speak in a moderate manner, that
the people may get the ideas fixed in their minds as he passes along.
But when the matter is rushed through so rapidly, the people cannot
get the points in their minds, and they do not have time to receive
[186] the impression that it is important for them to have; nor is there time
for the truth to affect them as it otherwise would.—Testimonies for
Danger of Excitable Speech—When some attempt to speak
calmly, without excitement and excessive gesticulation, they be-
come embarrassed, and feel a lack of freedom, because they are
restraining themselves from following their old habits. But let all
such feelings, which are mere excitement, go to the four winds. That
freedom of feeling that would result in your committing suicide is
not sanctified.—The Review and Herald, February 5, 1880.
Passion of Delivery No Evidence of God’s Power—The voice
should be cultivated so as to promote its musical quality, that it may
fall pleasantly upon the ear and impress the heart....
The Lord requires the human agent not to move by impulse in
speaking, but to move calmly, speak slowly, and let the Holy Spirit
give efficiency to the truth. Never think that in working yourselves
up to a passion of delivery, speaking by impulse, and suffering your
feelings to raise your voice to an unnaturally high key, that you are
giving evidence of the great power of God upon you....
Your influence is to be far reaching, and your powers of speech
should be under the control of reason. When you strain the organs of
speech, the modulations of the voice are lost. The tendency to rapid
speaking should be decidedly overcome. God claims of the human
[187] instrumentality all the service that man can give.—Evangelism, 668.
Proper Expression in Oral Reading—The science of reading
correctly and with the proper emphasis, is of highest value. No
matter how much knowledge you may have acquired in other lines,
if you have neglected to cultivate your voice and manner of speech
so that you can speak and read distinctly and intelligently, all your
learning will be of but little profit; for without voice culture you
cannot communicate readily and clearly that which you have learned.
To learn to tell convincingly and impressively that which one
knows, is of special value to those who desire to become workers
Chapter 35—Clarity and Purity of Utterance 123
in the cause of God. The more expression you can put into words
of truth, the more effective these words will be on those who hear.
A proper presentation of the Lord’s truth is worthy of our highest
efforts. Let the students in training for the Master’s service make
determined efforts to learn to speak correctly and forcibly, in order
that when conversing with others in regard to the truth, or when
engaged in public ministry, they may properly present the truths of
heavenly origin.—Evangelism, 666.
Distinctness in Every Word—When you speak, let every word
be full and well-rounded, every sentence clear and distinct to the
very last word. Many as they approach the end of a sentence lower
the tone of the voice, speaking so indistinctly that the force of
the thought is destroyed. Words that are worth speaking at all are
worth speaking in a clear, distinct voice, with emphasis and expres-
sion.—Testimonies for the Church 6:383. [188]
Angel Voices in Union With Human Voices—Let the voices
of the followers of Christ be so trained that instead of crowding
words together in a thick, indistinct way, their utterance may be
clear, forcible, and edifying. Do not let the voice fall after each
word, but keep it up so that each sentence will be full and complete.
Will it not be worth disciplining yourself, if by so doing you are able
to add interest to the service of God and to edify His children? The
voice of thanksgiving, praise, and rejoicing is heard in heaven. The
voices of the angels in heaven unite with the voices of the children of
God on earth as they ascribe honor and glory and praise to God and
to the Lamb for the great salvation provided.—Counsels to Parents,
Uncomely Gestures, Uncouth Speech—The workman for God
should make earnest efforts to become a representative of Christ,
discarding all uncomely gestures and uncouth speech. He should
endeavor to use correct language. There is a large class who are
careless in the way they speak, yet by careful, painstaking attention
these may become representatives of the truth. Every day they should
make advancement. They should not detract from their usefulness
and influence by cherishing defects of manner, tone, or language.
Common, cheap expressions should be replaced by sound, pure
words. By constant watchfulness and earnest discipline the Christian
youth may keep his tongue from evil and his lips from speaking guile. [189]
We should be careful not to give an incorrect pronunciation of

our words. There are men among us who in theory know better
than to use incorrect language, yet who in practice make frequent
mistakes.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 238.
The Spirit’s Help in Distinctness of Speech—The teacher of
truth is to take heed how he presents the truth. He is to speak
every word plainly and distinctly, with that earnest conviction which
carries conviction to hearts. If the words spoken are crowded upon
each other, the impression that should be made is lost. The talent of
speech needs to be cultivated, that the truth be spoken not excitedly,
but slowly and distinctly, that not a syllable may be lost. Rapidity of
speech can and should be corrected.
If the words of truth are of sufficient importance to be spoken
before an audience, they are of sufficient importance to be spoken
distinctly. The guidance of the Spirit never leads to indistinctness
of speech. The Spirit takes the things of God and presents them
through the human instrument to the people. Then let them come
from our lips in the most perfect manner possible.—The Southern
Work, October 27, 1903.
Our Words a Channel for the Communication of
Truth—We should receive the education essential in the line of
conversation that we may know how to speak right words and how
to speak in a proper tone, that our words may be a power for good.
[190] The truth is no truth to us unless it is brought into the inner courts of
the soul. When this is done, our words are a channel through which
truth is communicated to others. Sow the seed beside all waters, not
knowing which shall prosper, either this or that. But be constantly
educating yourself in how to use properly the faculty of speech. As
you speak to others, lift your heart to God, praying that He will
prepare their hearts to receive the heavenly seed. No man or woman
can be that which they might be as laborers together with God in
propagating the seed of truth without making earnest, painstaking
[191] effort in voice and word culture.—Manuscript 74, 1897.
Chapter 36—Importance of General Health
Good Blood, Healthy Lungs—In order to have good blood, we

must breathe well. Full, deep inspirations of pure air, which fill the
lungs with oxygen, purify the blood. They impart to it a bright color
and send it, a life-giving current, to every part of the body. A good
respiration soothes the nerves; it stimulates the appetite and renders
digestion more perfect; and it induces sound, refreshing sleep.
The lungs should be allowed the greatest freedom possible.
Their capacity is developed by free action; it diminishes if they
are cramped and compressed. Hence the ill effects of the practice
so common, especially in sedentary pursuits, of stooping at one’s
work. In this position it is impossible to breathe deeply. Superficial
breathing soon becomes a habit, and the lungs lose their power to
expand. A similar effect is produced by tight lacing. Sufficient room
is not given to the lower part of the chest; the abdominal muscles,
which were designed to aid in breathing, do not have full play, and
the lungs are restricted in their action. [192]
Thus an insufficient supply of oxygen is received. The blood
moves sluggishly. The waste, poisonous matter, which should be
thrown off in the exhalations from the lungs, is retained, and the
blood becomes impure. Not only the lungs, but the stomach, liver,
and brain are affected. The skin becomes sallow, digestion is re-
tarded; the heart is depressed; the brain is clouded; the thoughts are
confused; gloom settles upon the spirits; the whole system becomes
depressed and inactive, and peculiarly susceptible to disease.—The
Ministry of Healing, 272, 273.
Constant Supply of Fresh Air—The lungs are constantly
throwing off impurities, and they need to be constantly supplied
with fresh air. Impure air does not afford the necessary supply of
oxygen, and the blood passes to the brain and other organs without
being vitalized. Hence the necessity of thorough ventilation. To
live in close, ill-ventilated rooms, where the air is dead and viti-
ated, weakens the entire system. It becomes peculiarly sensitive to
125
the influence of cold, and a slight exposure induces disease.—The

Oxygen in the Lungs—It is essential to health that the chest
have room to expand to its fullest extent in order that the lungs may
be enabled to take full inspiration. When the lungs are restricted,
the quantity of oxygen received into them is lessened. The blood
[193] is not properly vitalized, and the waste, poisonous matter which
should be thrown off through the lungs is retained. In addition
to this the circulation is hindered, and the internal organs are so
cramped and crowded out of place that they cannot perform their
work properly.—The Ministry of Healing, 292.
Voice Training a Part of Physical Culture—Next in impor-
tance to right position are respiration and vocal culture. The one
who sits and stands erect is more likely than others to breathe prop-
erly. But the teacher should impress upon his pupils the importance
of deep breathing. Show how the healthy action of the respiratory
organs, assisting the circulation of the blood, invigorates the whole
system, excites the appetite, promotes digestion, and induces sound,
sweet sleep, thus not only refreshing the body, but soothing and tran-
quilizing the mind. And while the importance of deep breathing is
shown, the practice should be insisted upon. Let exercises be given
which will promote this, and see that the habit becomes established.
The training of the voice has an important place in physical cul-
ture, since it tends to expand and strengthen the lungs, and thus to
ward off disease. To ensure correct delivery in reading and speaking,
see that the abdominal muscles have full play in breathing, and that
the respiratory organs are unrestricted. Let the strain come on the
muscles of the abdomen, rather than on those of the throat. Great
weariness and serious disease of the throat and lungs may thus be
[194] prevented. Careful attention should be given to securing distinct
articulation, smooth, well-modulated tones, and a not-too-rapid de-
livery. This will not only promote health, but will add greatly to
the agreeableness and efficiency of the student’s work.—Education,
[195] 198, 199.
Chapter 37—Proper Use of the Voice
Health Principles—The proper use of the vocal organs will

bring benefit to the physical health and increase the usefulness and
influence [of Christ’s followers]. It is through falling into bad habits
of speech that people become tedious readers and speakers, but those
who are looked upon as intelligent enough to become missionary
workers or to transact business ought to have intelligence enough
to reform in their manner of speaking. By judicious exercise they
may expand the chest and strengthen the muscles. By giving heed
to proper instruction, by following health principles in regard to the
expansion of the lungs and the culture of the voice, our young men
and women may become speakers who can be heard; and the exercise
necessary for this accomplishment will prolong life.—Counsels to
Deep Breathing—If those who have defects in their manner of
utterance will submit to criticism and correction, they may overcome
these defects. They should perseveringly practice speaking in a low,
distinct tone, exercising the abdominal muscles in deep breathing,
and making the throat the channel of communication. Many speak [196]
in a rapid way, and in a high, unnatural key. Such a practice will
injure the throat and lungs. As a result of continual abuse, the weak,
inflamed organs will become diseased, and consumption [tubercu-
losis] may result.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students,
239.
Right Use of Abdominal Muscles—Voice culture is a subject
that has much to do with the health of students. The youth should
be taught how to breathe properly, and how to read in such a way
that no unnatural strain shall come on the throat and lungs, but
that the work shall be shared by the abdominal muscles. Speaking
from the throat, letting the sound come from the upper part of the
vocal organs, impairs the health of these organs and decreases their
efficiency. The abdominal muscles are to do the heaviest part of
the labor, the throat being used as a channel. Many have died who
127
might have lived had they been taught how to use the voice correctly.
The right use of the abdominal muscles in reading and speaking will
prove a remedy for many voice and chest difficulties, and the means
of prolonging life.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students,
297.
Preservation of Strength in Prayer—I saw that some of our
ministers do not understand how to preserve their strength so as
to be able to perform the greatest amount of labor without exhaus-
tion. Ministers should not pray so loud and long as to exhaust their
strength. It is not necessary to weary the throat and lungs in prayer.
[197] God’s ear is ever open to hear the heartfelt petitions of His humble
servants, and He does not require them to wear out the organs of
speech in addressing Him. It is the perfect trust, the firm reliance,
the steady claiming of the promises of God, the simple faith that He
is, and that He is a rewarder of all those who diligently seek Him,
that prevails with God.—Testimonies for the Church 1:645.
Influence of Right Teaching—Our institutions of learning
should be provided with every facility for instruction regarding the
mechanism of the human system. Students should be taught how to
breathe, how to read and speak so that the strain will not come on
the throat and lungs, but on the abdominal muscles. Teachers need
to educate themselves in this direction. Our students should have
a thorough training, that they may enter upon active life with an
intelligent knowledge of the habitation which God has given them.
Teach them that they must be learners as long as they live. And
while you are teaching them, remember that they will teach others.
Your lesson will be repeated for the benefit of many more than sit
before you day by day.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 147,
148.
Overexertion of Vocal Organs—Long and violent exercise of
the vocal organs has irritated his [Brother D’s] throat and lungs, and
injured his general health, more than his precise round of rules for
eating and resting have benefited him. One overexertion or strain
of the vocal organs may not soon be recovered from, and may cost
[198] the life of the speaker. A calm, unhurried, yet earnest, manner of
speaking, will have a better influence upon a congregation than to
let the feelings become excited and control the voice and manners.
As far as possible the speaker should preserve the natural tones
Chapter 37—Proper Use of the Voice 129
of the voice. It is the truth presented that affects the heart. If the
speaker makes these truths a reality, he will, with the aid of the
Spirit of God, be able to impress the hearers with the fact that he
is in earnest, without straining the fine organs of the throat or the
lungs.—Testimonies for the Church 2:672.
Channel for the Voice—Brother A, your love for reading and
your dislike for physical taxation, while talking and exercising your
throat, make you liable to disease of the throat and lungs. You should
be guarded and should not speak hurriedly, rattling off what you
have to say as though you had a lesson to repeat. You should not let
the labor come upon the upper portion of the vocal organs, for this
will constantly wear and irritate them, and will lay the foundation
for disease. The action should come upon the abdominal muscles.
The lungs and throat should be the channel, but should not do all the
work.—Testimonies for the Church 3:311.
Exercise After Eating—There are men and women of excellent
natural ability who do not accomplish half what they might if they
would exercise self-control in the denial of appetite.
Many writers and speakers fail here. After eating heartily, they
give themselves to sedentary occupations, reading, study, or writing, [199]
allowing no time for physical exercise. As a consequence the free
flow of thought and words is checked. They cannot write or speak
with the force and intensity necessary in order to reach the heart;
their efforts are tame and fruitless.—The Ministry of Healing, 308,
309.
Help for Patients—Plans should be devised for keeping patients
out of doors. For those who are able to work, let some pleasant, easy
employment be provided. Show them how agreeable and helpful
this outdoor work is. Encourage them to breathe the fresh air. Teach
them to breathe deeply, and in breathing and speaking to exercise
the abdominal muscles.—The Ministry of Healing, 264, 265.
Correct Speaking a Healthful Exercise—The exercise of the
voice in speaking is a healthful exercise. Teach and live carefully.
Hold firmly to the position that all, even our leading men, need to
exercise good common sense in the care of their health, securing
equal taxation of the body and the brain.—Medical Ministry 264,
265.
Right Use of the Vocal Organs—Careful attention and training

should be given to the vocal organs. They are strengthened by right
use, but become enfeebled if used improperly. Their excessive use,
as in preaching long sermons, will, if often repeated, not only injure
the organs of speech, but will bring an undue strain upon the whole
[200] nervous system. The delicate harp of a thousand strings becomes
worn, gets out of repair, and produces discord instead of melody.
It is important for every speaker so to train the vocal organs as
to keep them in a healthful condition, that he may speak forth the
words of life to the people. Everyone should become intelligent as to
the most effective manner of using his God-given ability, and should
practice what he learns. It is not necessary to talk in a loud voice or
upon a high key; this does great injury to the speaker. Rapid talking
destroys much of the effect of a discourse; for the words cannot be
made so plain and distinct as if spoken more deliberately, giving
the hearer time to take in the meaning of every word.—Evangelism,
667.
Preservation of Life—When a speaker talks in the proper way,
taking deep, full inspirations, and throwing out the voice in clear,
distinct tones, the whole being is benefited. The exercise of my
lungs in deep breathing, as I have engaged in public speaking, has
been a life-preserver to me.
Care is always to be taken not to strain the vocal organs. They
are to be kept as smooth as possible. When you are speaking before
a congregation, let the abdominal muscles have the hardest part of
the work to do. The light given me for you is that you are to do
more public speaking, and that you are to be sure, when speaking, to
exercise the abdominal muscles. Your brain has been overstrained.
Take heed to the things I write you, and you will see that my words
[201] are true. As you engage in the work the Lord points out for you,
the Spirit of God will impress minds through the words you speak.
The spoken word will make a deeper impression on hearts than the
printed word.—Lt 92, 1910.
Right Voice Culture No Idle Tale—The human agent must take
himself in hand. God has given him physical and spiritual powers,
and these need to be constantly cultivated and improved. In a great
measure, physical weariness may be avoided by speaking slowly,
calmly, unexcitedly.
Chapter 37—Proper Use of the Voice 131
In speaking, many have made a constant tax upon their vocal

organs. The lungs have been injured, and premature death has ended
their work. Nature will not always endure the abuse placed upon
her laws. They are ignored by many, but eventually she will make
her protest, and punish the transgressor. If these workers would
but learn that God does not require this overtaxation, and that in
overstraining the delicate vital organs and shortening the period of
their usefulness, they are dishonoring Him, they would not cultivate
habits which are injurious.
The excuse is made, “It is my habit; it is my way, and I cannot
overcome it.” Will my brethren take heed how they use the organs
of speech in the ministration of the Word? They are to follow God’s
way, and not their own will. Christ has given them no such example
in His manner of teaching. His followers are to make strenuous
efforts to overcome their habits of long, loud speaking. This greatly
injures the melody of the human voice. [202]
God means that those who minister in word and doctrine shall be
educators in the correct manner of teaching. They must stand before
the people as God’s representatives, showing that they appreciate
the precious gifts given them of God. They are to use, but not abuse,
their organs. They are not to make the blind, foolish excuse, “This is
my habit; I cannot overcome these defects.” They will not continue
to abuse the powers given them of God for the highest cultivation,
and by their imperfect habits, detract from the good they might do.
The Lord will help all who will determine to overcome these wrong
traits when presenting His message to the world.
This matter has been treated too much like an idle tale. It is a
most solemn consideration, and should deepen the sense of respon-
sibility upon every man who is a mouthpiece for God, holding forth
the word of life to the people. The ministers of God should study
to show themselves approved of God in the presentation of sacred
truth, workmen that need not to be ashamed.
The truth spoken, whether spoken in a manner to please or dis-
please, will judge the hearer in the great day of final reckoning. It is
a savor of life unto life or of death unto death. Under any circum-
stances the speaker will be criticized by those who turn their ears
away from the truth, but every effort should be made to reach the
people. The minister is the teacher of sacred, solemn truth, and he
should seek for perfection in character, in address, giving as little

[203] cause as possible for criticism. Man is honored in being a laborer
together with God, and he must work in Christ’s lines, receiving
the truth in its purity from the Word of God, and presenting it in a
[204] manner that will commend it to the hearer.—Manuscript 4, 1897.
[205]
[206]
[207]
Section 5—Effective Methods of Public
Speaking
Chapter 38—Love and Kindness
Eloquence of God’s Love—The most persuasive eloquence is

the word that is spoken in love and sympathy. Such words will bring
light to confused minds and hope to the discouraged, brightening
the prospect before them. The time in which we live calls for vital,
sanctified energy; for earnestness, zeal, and the tenderest sympathy
and love; for words that will not increase misery, but will inspire
faith and hope. We are homeward bound, seeking a better country,
even a heavenly. Instead of speaking words which will rankle in the
breasts of those that hear, shall we not speak of the love wherewith
God hath loved us? Shall we not try to lighten the hearts of those
around us by words of Christlike sympathy? Shall we not tell of
the prospective rest in store for the people of God? “A word fitly
spoken is like apples of gold in pictures of silver.”—The Review and
Herald, February 16, 1897.
Barriers of Pride and Selfishness—The spirit of Jesus should
pervade the soul of the worker; it is the pleasant, sympathetic words,
[208] the manifestation of disinterested love for their souls, that will break
down the barriers of pride and selfishness, and show to unbelievers
that we have the love of Christ.—Evangelism, 636.
Divine Enlightenment and Wisdom—Those who labor in
word and doctrine have a great work before them to tear from the
minds of those for whom they labor the fatal deceptions of Satan,
and to impress them with the importance of aiming to reach God’s
great standard of righteousness. They should pray earnestly for di-
vine enlightenment, and for wisdom to present the truth as it is in
Jesus. Sympathy, tenderness, and love, woven into their discourses
and manifested in their lives, would disarm opposition, weaken prej-
udice, and open the way to many hearts.—Historical Sketches of the
Foreign Missions of the Seventh-day Adventists, 121.
Imitation of Christ in His Labors—It is to be regretted that
many do not realize that the manner in which Bible truth is presented
has much to do with the impressions made upon minds, and with
134
the Christian character afterward developed by those who receive

the truth. Instead of imitating Christ in His manner of labor, many
are severe, critical, and dictatorial. They repulse instead of winning
souls. Such will never know how many weak ones their harsh words
have wounded and discouraged.—Evangelism, 168.
Too Many Sermons—The sermons should come, not from a
mechanical heart, but from a heart that is filled with the love of God,
and is subdued and softened by His grace; that when you speak the [209]
angels of God are enlisted on your side, and Christ is on your side,
and it is Christ that makes the impression. Now these things have
been neglected at our camp meetings. We have lost two-thirds of
all that the camp meetings were designed to accomplish. The idea
seems to be woven into the minds of some that all they have to do
is to sermonize, sermonize. While sermons are good in their place,
there is sermon after sermon given to the people that they cannot
retain in their minds—it is an impossibility for them to do it—and
they are just wearied out with sermons.—Manuscript 19b, 1890.
Ministers Shod With Gospel Shoes—Let every minister learn
to wear the gospel shoes. He who is shod with the preparation of
the gospel of peace will walk as Christ walked. He will be able to
speak right words, and to speak them in love. He will not try to
drive home God’s message of truth. He will deal tenderly with every
heart, realizing that the Spirit will impress the truth on those who
are susceptible to divine impressions. Never will he be vehement
in his manner. Every word spoken will have a softening, subduing
influence....
In speaking words of reproof, let us put all the Christlike ten-
derness and love possible into the voice. The higher a minis-
ter’s position, the more circumspect should he be in word and
act.—Evangelism, 174.
Lasting Impressions Through Love—In His providence God [210]
impresses people to attend our tent meetings and church services.
Some come from curiosity, others to criticize or ridicule. Often they
are convicted of sin. The word spoken in the spirit of love makes
a lasting impression on them. How carefully, then, should these
meetings be conducted. The words spoken should be of authority,
that the Holy Spirit can impress them on minds. The speaker who is
controlled by the Spirit of God has a sacred dignity, and his words are
a savor of life unto life. Let not unsuitable illustrations or anecdotes

be introduced into the discourse. Let the words spoken be for the
edification of the hearers.—Evangelism, 207, 208.
Cutting by the Truth, Not by Our Words—In the presentation
of unpopular truth, which involves a heavy cross, preachers should
be careful that every word is as God would have it. Their words
should never cut. They should present the truth in humility, with the
deepest love for souls and an earnest desire for their salvation, and
let the truth cut.—Testimonies for the Church 3:218.
Reformation, Not Exasperation—God is calling for reformers
who will speak strong, uplifting words from our pulpits. It is when
men speak their own words in their own strength, instead of preach-
ing the Word of God in the power of the Spirit, that they are hurt
and offended when their words are not received with enthusiasm.
It is then that they are tempted to speak words that will arouse a
[211] spirit of bitterness and opposition in their hearers. My brethren,
be advised. Such words are not to come from the lips of Christ’s
ambassadors. Sanctified lips will speak words that reform, but do
not exasperate. The truth is to be presented in the meekness and love
of Christ.—Selected Messages 1:159.
From Broken, Contrite Hearts—My brethren, let your hearts
become broken and contrite. Let expressions of sympathy and love,
which will not blister the tongue, flow from your lips.—The S.D.A.
Spirituality in Preaching—Brother B’s preaching has not been
marked by the sanction of God’s Spirit. He can talk fluently and
make a point plain, but his preaching has lacked spirituality. His
appeals have not touched the heart with a new tenderness. There has
been an array of words, but the hearts of his hearers have not been
quickened and melted with a sense of a Saviour’s love.—Testimonies
For Teachers, the Gentleness of Christ—I have an earnest
desire that you shall every day be learning of the Great Teacher. If
you will first draw nigh to God and then to your students, you can
do a very precious work. If you are diligent and humble, God will
daily give you knowledge and an aptitude to teach. Do your very
best to impart to others the blessings He has given you.
With a deep, earnest interest to help your students, carry them

over the ground of knowledge. Come as close to them as you can.
Unless teachers have the love and gentleness of Christ abounding [212]
in their hearts, they will manifest too much of the spirit of a harsh,
domineering schoolmaster. “Keep yourselves in the love of God,
looking for the mercy of our Lord Jesus Christ unto eternal life. And
of some have compassion, making a difference: and others save with
fear, pulling them out of the fire; hating even the garment spotted
by the flesh.” Jude 1:21-23.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and
Students, 253.
No Passionate Word or Gesture—In educating the children
and youth, teachers should not allow one passionate word or gesture
to mar their work, for in so doing they imbue the students with the
same spirit which they themselves possess.—Counsels to Parents,
No Irritation by Teachers—Instructors who are under the disci-
pline of God receive grace and truth and light through the Holy Spirit
to communicate to the children. They are under the greatest Teacher
the world has ever known, and how unbecoming it would be for
them to have an unkind spirit, a sharp voice, full of irritation! In this
they would perpetuate their own defects in the children.—Counsels
No Lack of Kindness, Even to Evildoers—If the teacher,
through the grace of Christ, is self-controlled, and holds the lines
with a steady, patient hand, he will quell the boisterous element, keep
his self-respect, and command the respect of his students. When [213]
once order is restored, let kindness, gentleness, and affection be
manifested. It may be that rebellion will rise again and again, but
let not the hasty temper appear. Do not speak sharply to the evil-
doer, and discourage a soul who is struggling with the powers of
darkness.—Counsels on Sabbath School Work, 173. [214]
Chapter 39—Simplicity and Clarity
Words, Few but Earnest—A true educator will carry the minds
of his hearers with him. His words will be few but earnest. Coming
from the heart, they will be full of sympathy, and warm with the
love for precious souls.—Counsels on Sabbath School Work, 167.
Dangers of Long Words—In every school the instruction given
should be as easy to understand as was that given by Christ. The
use of long words confuses the mind and eclipses the beauty of
the thought presented. There is need of teachers who will come
close to their students and who will give clear, definite instruction,
illustrating spiritual things by the things of nature and by the familiar
events of everyday experience.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and
Students, 261.
Use of the Gospel Net—The Lord wishes you to learn how
to use the gospel net. Many need to learn this art. In order for
you to be successful in your work, the meshes of your net—the
application of the Scriptures—must be close, and the meaning easily
discerned. Then make the most of drawing in the net. Come right
[215] to the point. Make your illustrations self-evident. However great a
it to others. Let the pathos of your voice, its deep feeling, make its
impression on hearts. Urge your students to surrender themselves to
God....
Make your explanations clear; for I know that there are many
who do not understand many of the things said to them. Let the
Holy Spirit mold and fashion your speech, cleansing it from all
dross. Speak as little children, remembering that there are many
well advanced in years who are but little children in understand-
ing.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 253, 254.
Close Application and Hard Study—To learn how to open the
Scriptures to others in an acceptable manner, means close application
and hard study. This is necessary in order to give a connected
138
Chapter 39—Simplicity and Clarity 139
discourse in a clear, forcible way, making all the important points

stand out so clear as not to be misunderstood.—Lt 185, 1899.
Logical Sequence of Ideas—Some minds are more like an old
curiosity shop than anything else. Many odd bits and ends of truth
have been picked up and stored away there; but they know not how
to present them in a clear, connected manner. It is the relation that
these ideas have to one another that gives them value. Every idea
and statement should be as closely united as the links in a chain.
When a minister throws out a mass of matter before the people for
them to pick up and arrange in order, his labors are lost; for there
are few who will do it.—Evangelism, 648, 649. [216]
A Few Essential Points at a Time—The truth is so different
in its character and work from the popular errors that are preached
from the pulpit, that as it is brought before the people it almost takes
away their breath and senses. It is strong meat and should be dealt
out judiciously; then those who listen, if you stop when you should,
will be eager to hear more.
God has made His messengers the depositaries of His truth,
weighty and important with eternal results. Light is to shine forth
amid the moral darkness to reveal sin and error. The truth must be
given point after point. It must be spoken distinctly and with clear
utterance making a few essential points; then it will be as a nail
fastened in a sure place by the Master of assemblies.
The preacher should labor to carry the understanding and sym-
pathies of the people with him. Do not place the crib too high where
the people cannot follow. This would not be wise generalship in
teaching the truth.—Lt 7, 1885.
Things New and Old From God’s Treasure
House—Ministers need to have a more clear, simple man-
ner in presenting the truth as it is in Jesus.... Those who neglect this
part of the work need to be converted themselves before venturing
to give a discourse. Those whose hearts are filled with the love of
Jesus, with the precious truths of His Word, will be able to draw
from the treasure house of God things new and old. They will not
find time to relate anecdotes; they will not strain to become orators, [217]
soaring so high that they cannot carry the people with them; but in
simple language, with touching earnestness, they will present the
truth as it is in Jesus.—Selected Messages 1:157.
Futility of Intellectual Discourses—Ministers should present

the truth in a clear, simple manner. There are among their hearers
many who need a plain explanation of the steps requisite in con-
version. The great masses of the people are more ignorant on this
point than is supposed. Among graduates from college, eloquent or-
ators, able statesmen, men in high positions of trust, there are many
who have given their powers to other matters, and have neglected
the things of greatest importance. When such men form part of a
congregation, the speaker often strains every power to preach an
intellectual discourse, and fails to reveal Christ. He does not show
that sin is the transgression of the law. He does not make plain the
way of salvation. That which would have touched the hearts of his
hearers, would have been to point them to Christ dying to bring
redemption within their reach.—Gospel Workers, 170.
Importance of Obedience to God’s Commands—So plainly
is the truth to be presented that no transgressor, hearing it, shall be
excusable in failing to discern the importance of obedience to God’s
commands.—Gospel Workers, 148.
[218] Well-Defined, Clear Sermons—If you have the quickening
grace of Christ to energize your movements, you will put earnestness
into your sermons. Your subject will be clear and well-defined in
your mind. You will not be lengthy in your remarks, neither will you
speak hesitatingly, as though you did not yourself believe what you
were saying. You must overcome slow hesitation, and undecided,
sluggish movements, and learn to be minute men.
The subjects which many of our ministers present before the
people are not half as connected and as clear and strong in argument
as they should be.—The Review and Herald, April 6, 1886.
No Artificial Embellishments—God calls upon the ministers
of the gospel not to seek to stretch themselves beyond their measure
by bringing forward artificial embellishments, striving for the praise
and applause of men, being ambitious for a vain show of intellect and
eloquence....The more clearly ministers discern Christ, and catch
His spirit, the more forcibly will they preach the simple truth of
which Christ is the center.—Evangelism, 181.
Praying Too Little, Studying Too Much—They [ministers] in-
jure the work, injure the effect of the truth that they would advocate,
by crowding into one discourse so much and making so many points
Chapter 39—Simplicity and Clarity 141
that minds cannot always appreciate or follow them. More suc-

cess would attend their labors if they riveted one or two points in the
minds of the hearers and make these points of vital importance, press
them home and urge upon them the danger of rejecting the light [219]
upon those points. Let the minds of the hearers distinctly understand
the bearing of every point and then urge to a decision.
I was shown that the time that is consumed in so much reading
and study is often worse than thrown away. A large portion of the
time spent over books and in studying should be spent before God
imploring Him for heavenly wisdom and for strength and power to
let the truth, which they do fully understand, shine out before the
people in its clearness and harmonious beauty. There is too little
time spent in secret prayer and in sacred meditation. The cry of
God’s servants should be for the holy unction and to be clothed with
salvation, that what they preach may reach hearts. Time is so short
and ministers of these last days are so few that they should throw
all their energies into the work, and should be in close connection
with God and holy angels, that a tremendous power may be in their
preaching—a compelling power, to draw every soul who is honest
and loves the truth right along to embrace it.—Manuscript 7, 1863.
Teachings of the Chief Shepherd—On Sunday, at 11 a.m.,
Brother Wilson of New Zealand gave a most profitable discourse,
beautiful in its simplicity, and in no way savoring of cheapness. The
more plain and simple a discourse is, the more do the teachings of the
undershepherds represent the teaching of the Chief Shepherd.—Lt
82, 1895.
Danger of Soaring Too High—The preacher should endeavor [220]
to carry the understanding and sympathies of the people with him.
Do not soar too high, where they cannot follow, but give the truth
point after point, slowly and distinctly, making a few essential points,
then it will be as a nail fastened in a sure place by the Master of
assemblies. If you stop when you should, giving them no more at
once than they can comprehend and profit by, they will be eager
to hear more, and thus the interest will be sustained.—Evangelism,
177.
Vital Subjects Easily Understood—Our ministers should seek
to make the most favorable presentation of truth. So far as possible,
let all speak the same things. Let the discourses be simple, and
treating upon vital subjects that can be easily understood.—Selected

Messages 1:167.
Ample Facilities for Reaching People—Ministers, in your dis-
courses do not climb up so high that the people cannot understand
what you say. I have been instructed that we get altogether too high
in our representation of Bible truth. We lose much by not coming
to the simplicity of true godliness. God has given us all we need
to enable us to reach the souls around us, yet the reformations that
were made in Christ’s day as the result of the presentation of the
gospel, are rare today. We need the converting power of God in our
hearts to teach us simplicity in words and works.—Manuscript 85,
1909.
[221] God’s Word, Not Man’s—Preach the truth with the meekness
of simplicity, remembering that it is not your words, but the Word
of God that is to cut its way to the heart.—The Review and Herald,
June 13, 1912.
Meat in Due Season—Present the truth as it is in Jesus, with
all meekness and lowliness, which means with simplicity and in
sincerity, giving meat in due season, and to every man his portion of
meat.—Evangelism, 432.
Simplicity of God’s Children—Men and women are wandering
in the mist and fog of error. They want to know what is truth. Tell
them, not in high-flown language, but with the simplicity of the
[222] children of God.—Colporteur Ministry, 72.
Chapter 40—Pure Language
Lips Touched by the Lord—To those who make so full a con-

secration that the Lord can place His touch upon their lips, the word
is spoken, Go forth into the harvest-field. I will cooperate with you.
The minister who has received this preparation will be a power
for good in the world. His words will be right words, pure and true,
fraught with sympathy and love; his actions will be right actions, a
help and a blessing to the weak. Christ will be to him an abiding
presence, controlling thought, word, and deed.—Gospel Workers,
23.
Circumspect in Word and Deed—Of all men, those who have
been trusted and honored by the Lord, those who have been given
special service to perform, should be circumspect in word and deed.
They should be men of devotion, who, by works of righteousness and
pure, true words, can lift their fellow men to a higher level.—Gospel
Workers, 124.
Word Purification by the Holy Spirit—It is the accompani-
ment of the Holy Spirit of God that prepares workers, both men and
women, to become pastors to the flock of God.... They will practice [223]
true Christian courtesy, bearing in mind that Christ, their Compan-
ion, cannot approve of harsh, unkind words or feelings. Their words
will be purified. The power of speech will be regarded as a precious
talent, lent them to do a high and holy work. The human agent will
learn how to represent the divine Companion with whom he is asso-
ciated. To that unseen Holy One he will show respect and reverence
because he is wearing His yoke and is learning His pure, holy ways.
Those who have faith in this divine Attendant will develop. They
will be gifted with power to clothe the message of truth with a sacred
beauty.—Testimonies for the Church 6:322.
Wise and Holy Words—When the Lord’s voice calls, “Whom
shall I send, and who will go for Us?” the Divine Spirit puts it into
hearts to respond: “Here am I; send me.” Isaiah 6:8. But bear in
mind that the live coal from the altar must first touch your lips. Then
143
the words you speak will be wise and holy words. Then you will
have wisdom to know what to say and what to leave unsaid. You will
not try to reveal your smartness as theologians. You will be careful
not to arouse a combative spirit or excite prejudice by introducing
controverted points of doctrine. You will find enough to talk about
that will not excite opposition, but that will open the heart to desire
a deeper knowledge of God’s Word.—Testimonies for the Church
6:325.
[224] No Haphazard Words—God’s representatives upon earth
should be in daily communion with Him. Their words should be
select, their speech sound. The haphazard words frequently used by
ministers who preach not the gospel in sincerity should be forever
discarded.—Testimonies for the Church 2:707.
Sound Speech—It becomes every minister of Christ to use
sound speech, which cannot be condemned.—Testimonies for the
Church 2:709.
Students’ Preparation as Public Speakers—Students should
be qualified to speak in an acceptable manner before congregations;
and they should therefore train themselves to use pure, simple lan-
guage, and to follow the best methods of speaking. Much attention
should be given to the practice of reading with full, clear voice and
distinct utterance, giving the proper emphasis to each word....
All can communicate, if they will, the grand yet simple truths re-
garding the mission and work of Christ. If they seek the Lord daily in
earnest prayer, they will understand how to meet the people as Christ
met them, adapting the instruction to their varied circumstances and
understanding. The spiritual lessons regarding the kingdom of God,
they should illustrate by the natural things with which their hearers
are familiar. Then, as these natural objects are seen, day by day,
the lesson of truth will be repeated to the mind.—The Review and
[225] Herald, October 4, 1898.
Chapter 41—Earnestness and Assurance
Assurance in Presenting Precious Truth—The Word of God

must be administered with spirit and with life. It means life eternal
to all who receive it. A tame, uncertain delivery will do no good.
Improve in manner, voice, earnestness, and assurance, as if you
knew what you were handling. Oh, faith must be grasped more,
much more than it is now. We can have the most precious truths,
and deliver them in such a tame, uncertain, lifeless manner in the
interpretation, as to crush out from the precious meaning all the
power to impress hearts and awaken consciousness, because our
own hearts do not take in the solemn admonitions. Do we believe
the Bible? If we do, we will reveal it.—Lt 1a, 1896.
Animation in Preaching and Praying—Bear in mind that to
be a minister does not mean that you must do much preaching.
Brethren, I entreat of you to keep your own souls in the love of
God, and never let the wellsprings dry. A cold, joyless discourse
will kill the church. Bring animation into your words and prayers.
There must be no cheap, faithless sermons given. The truth abiding
in the heart, sanctifying the soul, will give you an appetite to feed [226]
on Christ, the Bread of Life, and as you partake of the heavenly
manna, you will be able to say, “Come and eat that which is good,
and let your soul delight itself in fatness.” Let all your energies be
consecrated ability. The Lord wants you to represent the truth as it
is in Jesus. Let there be nothing like striving for supremacy.—Lt 1a,
1896.
Certainty Born of Heart Conviction—Do not present the truth
in a formal manner, but let the heart be vitalized by the Spirit of
God, and let your words be spoken with such certainty that those
who hear may know that the truth is a reality to you. Your manner
may be educated, and your words may be of that character that
they will voice the words of Peter: “For we have not followed
cunningly devised fables, when we made known unto you the power
and coming of our Lord Jesus Christ, but were eyewitnesses of His
145
majesty.” With just as much assurance you may declare the message
of God’s truth. Those who believe sacred, eternal truth, must put
their whole soul into their efforts. We must be stirred to the very
heart as we behold the fulfilling of prophecy in the closing scenes of
this earth’s history. As our vision extends still further into the glories
of eternity—the coming of Christ with power and great glory, and
the scenes of the great day of judgment—we should not remain tame
and unmoved. “I saw the dead,” John says, “stand before God; and
the books were opened: and another book was opened, which is the
[227] Book of Life: and the dead were judged out of those things which
were written in the books, according to their works.”—Lt 8, 1895.
Enthusiasm in Things Real and Imaginary—On a certain oc-
casion, when Betterton, the celebrated actor, was dining with Dr.
Sheldon, archbishop of Canterbury, the archbishop said to him,
“Pray, Mr. Betterton, tell me why it is that you actors affect your
audiences so powerfully by speaking of things imaginary.”
“My lord,” replied Betterton, “with due submission to Your
Grace, permit me to say that the reason is plain: It all lies in the
power of enthusiasm. We on the stage speak of things imaginary
as if they were real, and you in the pulpit speak of things real as if
they were imaginary.”—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students,
255.
The Minister a Messenger from God—The minister who has
learned of Christ will ever be conscious that he is a messenger of
God, commissioned by Him to do a work the influence of which is
to endure throughout eternity. It should not be any part of his object
to call attention to himself, his learning, or his ability. His whole
aim should be to bring sinners to repentance, pointing them, by both
precept and example, to the Lamb of God that taketh away the sin of
the world. He should speak as one conscious of possessing power
and authority from God. His discourses should have an earnestness,
a fervor, a power of persuasion, that will lead sinners to take refuge
[228] in Christ.—Gospel Workers, 172, 173.
Irresistible Power to Move Hearts—The very tones of the
voice, the look, the words, should possess an irresistible power
to move hearts and control minds. Jesus should be found in the heart
of the minister. If Jesus is in the words and in the tones of the voice,
if they are mellow with His tender love, it will prove a blessing of
Chapter 41—Earnestness and Assurance 147
more value than all the riches, pleasures, and glories of the earth;
for such blessings will not come and go without accomplishing a
work.—Testimonies for the Church 3:32.
Living Earnestness—It is living earnestness that God requires.
Ministers may have little learning from books; but if they do the best
they can with their talents, if they work as they have opportunity,
if they clothe their utterances in the plainest and most simple lan-
guage, if they are humble men who walk in carefulness and humility,
seeking for heavenly wisdom, working for God from the heart, and
actuated by one predominating motive—love for Christ and the souls
for whom He has died—they will be listened to by men of even su-
perior ability and talents. There will be a charm in the simplicity of
the truths they present. Christ is the greatest Teacher that the world
has ever known.—Selected Messages 2:152.
Energy in the Presentation of the Bible—We must cultivate
an abiding sense of our own inefficiency and helplessness and rely
wholly on Jesus. This should keep us individually calm and stead-
fast in words and deportment. Excitement in the speaker is not
power but weakness. Earnestness and energy are essential in pre- [229]
senting Bible truth, the gospel, which is the power of God unto
salvation.—Selected Messages 2:59.
Size of Audience Not Most Important—Remember that you
are cooperating with divine agencies—agencies that never fail.
Speak with as much earnestness, faith, and interest as if there were
thousands present to listen to your voice.—Gospel Workers, 167
Decided, Stirring Tones—To every nation, kindred, tongue,
and people the tidings of pardon through Christ are to be carried.
Not with tame, lifeless utterances is the message to be given, but
with clear, decided, stirring utterances. Hundreds are waiting for the
warning to escape for their lives.—Gospel Workers, 29.
Positive Presentations—Cultivate earnestness and positiveness
in addressing the people. Your subject matter may be excellent,
and just what the people need, but you would do well to mingle a
positiveness with persuasive entreaties....
Present the plain “Thus saith the Lord” with authority, and exalt
the wisdom of God in the written Word. Bring the people to a
decision; keep the voice of the Bible ever before them. Tell them you
speak that which you do know, and testify that which is truth, because
God has spoken it. Let your preaching be short and right to the point,
and then at the proper time call for a decision. Do not present the
truth in a formal manner, but let the heart be vitalized by the Spirit
[230] of God, and let your words be spoken with such certainty that those
who hear may know that the truth is a reality to you.—Evangelism,
296.
Harm in Tame Preaching—An unconsecrated minister, pre-
senting the truth in an unimpassioned manner, his own soul unmoved
by the truths he speaks to others, will do only harm. Every effort
he makes only lowers the standard.—Testimonies for the Church
2:344.
Listlessness of Manner—Some preach these truths, of such
weighty importance, in so listless a manner that they cannot affect
the people. “Whatsoever thy hand findeth to do, do it with thy
might.”—Testimonies for the Church 2:504.
The Belittling of God’s Message—More ability, tact, and wis-
dom are needed in presenting the Word and feeding the flock of God
than many suppose. A dry, lifeless presentation of the truth belittles
the most sacred message that God has given to men.—Testimonies
Consumers, Not Producers—Those who preach the gospel
without putting the whole being, heart, mind, soul, and strength,
into the work, are consumers and not producers. God calls for men
who realize that they must put forth earnest effort, men who bring
thought, zeal, prudence, capability, and the attributes of Christ’s
character into their work. The saving of souls is a vast work, which
calls for the employment of every talent, every gift of grace. Those
[231] engaged in this work should constantly increase in efficiency. They
should be filled with an earnest desire to have their power for service
strengthened, realizing that they will be weak without a constantly
increasing supply of grace. They should seek to attain larger and
still larger results in their work. When this is the experience of our
workers, fruit will be seen. Many souls will be brought into the
truth.—Manuscript 90, 1904.
No Sleepy Message at This Time—At Christ’s first advent the
angels broke the silence of the night with acclamations of praise,
and proclaimed, “Glory to God in the highest, peace on earth; good
will toward men.” He is soon to come again with power and great
Chapter 41—Earnestness and Assurance 149
glory. Those who are not wedded to the world will realize that
the time demands something more than a weak, faint, methodical
discourse. They will see that there must be earnestness and power
accompanying the Word, which will arouse the powers of hell to
oppose the warnings. God designs to come to the people to awaken
men out of their carnal security, that they may prepare themselves
for the great event right upon us. The promise is, “Ye shall receive
power, after that the Holy Ghost is come upon you: and ye shall
be witnesses unto Me both in Jerusalem, and in all Judea, and in
Samaria, and unto the uttermost part of the earth.” God will accept
no sleepy, tame message at this time.—Lt 27, 1894. [232]
Chapter 42—Conversational Manner
Less Preaching, More Teaching—It is not preaching alone that

must be done. Far less preaching is needed. More time should be
devoted to patiently educating others, giving the hearers opportunity
to express themselves. It is instruction that many need, line upon line,
precept upon precept, here a little, and there a little.—Evangelism,
338.
Words From Hearts Warm With Love—Let not your zeal be
of that order to preach, but to minister. Speak words from hearts
warmed with the love of Jesus.—Lt 1a, 1896.
Co-Laborers With Jesus Christ—You need at camp meetings
to labor to teach in different lines as Christ did. Few sermons were
preached by Christ. He was the great Teacher, and crowds gathered
wherever He went to listen to His instruction, and He taught as one
having authority, and knew that He was teaching the truth. He spake
as never man spake.
Ministers must be educated to work after the divine Model. Many
of you love to teach, but you have not taken up the work of teaching
[233] in the simplicity of the gospel of Christ. The people will listen to
sermons which often are double the length they should be, and they
can retain but few points of the discourse because their minds have
been all the time on temporal, earthly things. Therefore they hear
with such earthly thoughts that the truth of God does not make any
impression. It does not reach to the very depths of the soul, and the
plowshare of truth does not go deep enough. Then they go from the
meeting and fall back where they were before. The sermons being
often double the length they ought to be, the words lose their force
upon the minds of the hearers. Other things come in to choke the
seeds of truth.
The truth of God must be made impressive point by point. It is
for their eternal interest to know. So deeply must the seed of truth be
planted that it will become firm, and bear fruit to the glory of God....
150
Chapter 42—Conversational Manner 151
Now when the truth is being presented, there are applications

that need to be made and appeals to press it right home for a decision,
for an important decision. Who is there when this truth is being
presented? Somebody besides you. The devil and his angels are
there to catch away the seeds of truth. Are these all? Angels of God
and Jesus Christ are on the ground. Then what? When you seek to
impress the truth upon the heart, you will be a co-laborer with Jesus
Christ.—Manuscript 11, 1891.
Not Sermonizing, but Instructing—People are suffering for
want of the knowledge of truth. They do not understand what they [234]
must do to be saved. Unless the gospel is preached clearly, simply,
over and over again, line upon line, precept upon precept, Satan will
cast his shadow between the sinner and God. God will be represented
as a stern, unforgiving Judge. Christ did not sermonize. He gave
instruction as a divine Teacher. He taught in simplicity, and thus His
ambassadors are to present the truth, making everything connected
with the salvation of the soul plain and easy to be understood. The
message must be given to the world that the way of repentance and
faith is now made plain through Him who had power to lay down His
life and to take it again. “He that believeth on Me,” Christ declared,
“though he were dead, yet shall he live.”—Manuscript 147, 1897.
Conversational Bible Study at Camp Meetings—[This im-
promptu dialogue between Ellen White and her son, W. C. White,
took place while she was giving a talk to the General Conference
Committee at Lake Goguac, near Battle Creek, Michigan, July 14,
1890.] Elder White: “I have heard you say, Mother, that we should
have more teaching and less preaching; less preaching and more
teaching. Speaking of the matter of getting the people together and
having Bible readings.”
Ellen White: “That was the way in Christ’s day. He would speak
to the people, and they would call out a question as to what that
meant. He was a teacher of the people.” [235]
Elder White: “Then at one time I remember very distinctly about
your saying that, ‘as we approach nearer the end I have seen our camp
meetings with less preaching and more Bible study; little groups all
over the ground with their Bibles in their hands, and different ones
leading out in a free, conversational study of the Scriptures.”
Ellen White: “That is the work that has been shown me, that
our camp meetings would increase in success and interest. There
are those that want more definite light. There are some that take [a]
longer time to get hold of things and get what you really mean. If
they could have the privilege of having it made a little plainer they
would see that, and would catch hold of that. And it would be like a
nail fastened in a sure place, and it would be written on the tablets
of their hearts.
“When the great throngs would gather about Christ, He gave
His lessons of instruction. Then the disciples in different places and
different positions after the discourse would repeat what Christ had
said. The people had misapplied Christ’s words; and the disciples
would tell the people what the Scriptures said, and what Christ said
the Scriptures said. They were learning to be educators. They were
next to Christ, getting lessons from Him and giving them to the
people.”—Manuscript 19b, 1890.
Instruction in the People’s Homes—God’s servants have a
great work to do in addition to preaching in the pulpit. In the work
[236] of the ministry there is altogether too much preaching, and too little
real teaching the lessons of the Bible. Our ministers should visit
the members of the church more than they do, to talk and pray with
them. Their hearts need to be drawn out to those in their charge.
When our ministers are visiting in a family, let them seek to make
the hour of worship a great blessing, and let them when at the meal
table, seek to make the conversation a source of spiritual refreshing.
Let them talk on Bible subjects, and relate their experiences in
holding meetings and in visiting among the people. The parents will
be benefited, the children will be impressed, and as the warmth and
grace of Christ are felt, the spiritual pulse will be quickened.
Often a minister is obliged to speak in a crowded, overheated
room. The listeners become drowsy, their senses are half paralyzed,
and it is almost impossible for them to grasp the subjects presented.
If instead of preaching to them, the speaker would try to teach them,
asking them questions, and speaking in a conversational tone, their
minds would be aroused to activity, and they would be able more
clearly to comprehend the truths opened before them. Their under-
standing would take hold of the living reality of the truths necessary
for the quickening of the perception and for growth in knowledge.
Chapter 42—Conversational Manner 153
As he goes over his discourse, point by point, allowing his hearers to

ask questions and make suggestions, he will himself obtain a better
idea of his subject. Unless the great truths of God’s Word are clearly [237]
opened before the understanding, they cannot be comprehended by
the mind, or put into practice in the life.—Manuscript 41, 1903. [238]
Chapter 43—No Harsh Words nor Debating Spirit
Use of Truth As a Scourge—In the past you have presented

the truth in a fierce way, using it as if it were a scourge. This has
not glorified the Lord. You have given the people the rich treasures
of God’s Word, but your manner has been so condemnatory that
they have turned from them. You have not taught the truth in the
way that Christ taught it. You present it in a way that mars its
influence.... Your heart needs to be filled with the converting grace
of Christ.—Evangelism, 173, 174.
No Help by Harshness—Preach the truth, but restrain the words
which show a harsh spirit; for such words cannot help or enlighten
anyone.—Evangelism, 575, 576.
Effect of One Drop of Gall—Every sermon you preach, every
article you write, may be all true; but one drop of gall in it will be
poison to the hearer or the reader. Because of that drop of poison, one
will discard all your good and acceptable words. Another will feed on
the poison; for he loves such harsh words; he follows your example,
[239] and talks just as you talk. Thus the evil is multiplied.—Testimonies
Our Tongue As the Pen of a Ready Writer—Be careful that
you do not rail once. We want the Holy Spirit of God to be life and
voice for us. Our tongue should be as the pen of a ready writer, be-
cause the Spirit of God is speaking through the human agent. When
you use that twit and fling, you have stirred in some of yourself, and
we do not want anything of that mixture.—Evangelism, 172.
On Guard Every Moment—Young preachers, and men who
have once been ministers, who have been coarse and rough in their
manners, making expressions in their conversation which were not
perfectly modest and chaste, are not fit to engage in this work until
they give evidence of an entire reform. One word spoken unadvis-
edly may do more harm than a series of meetings held by them will
do good. They leave the standard of truth, which should be ever
exalted, lowered to the dust before the community. Their converts
154
Chapter 43—No Harsh Words nor Debating Spirit 155
generally come up no higher than the standard raised for them by

the ministers. Men who are standing between the living and the
dead should be just right. The minister should not be off his guard
for a single moment. He is laboring to elevate others by bringing
them up upon the platform of truth. Let him show to others that the
truth has done something for him. He should see the evil of these
careless, rough, vulgar expressions, and should put away and despise
everything of this character. Unless he does this, his converts will [240]
pattern after him.—Testimonies for the Church 1:445, 446.
Closed and Locked Doors—Let everyone bear in mind that we
are in no case to invite persecution. We are not to use words that are
harsh and cutting. Keep them out of every article written, drop them
out of every address given. Let the Word of God do the cutting, the
rebuking; let finite men hide and abide in Jesus Christ. Let the Spirit
of Christ appear. Let all be guarded in their words, lest they place
those not of our faith in deadly opposition against us, and give Satan
an opportunity to use the unadvised words to hedge up our way. “Do
nothing before the time.” When God gives a close, cutting message
it will be His work, not prompted by the impulse of finite beings.
Man’s cutting and slashing with the two-edged sword will hedge
up our way, so that we shall find doors closed and locked against
us.—Manuscript 95, 1894
No Reference to Opponents’ Claims—The Holy Spirit will
apply the word that is spoken in love to the soul. But let it be
understood that no good is accomplished when the voice or the pen
expresses that which is harsh, or even expresses the truth in a harsh
manner. Let the region of human passion be passed by, lest the truth
be misapprehended, misinterpreted, and misconstrued. The truth
will have quickening power that is spoken under the full influence of
the grace of Christ. God’s plan is first to reach the heart. Speak the
truth and let Him carry forward the reformatory power and principle;
but let us not work according to our own individual impulse. [241]
What matter of good can be accomplished for souls who are
in darkness by castigating them with denunciations? Those who
have not a knowledge of the truth, who are blinded and warped
in judgment, do not understand what it means. Speak the truth in
love. Let the tenderness of Christ come in to the soul. Make no
special reference to what opponents say, but let the truth alone be
spoken—“It is written.” The truth will cut to the quick. Let not your
own spirit and passions mingle with the truth as common fire with
the sacred flame. Plainly unfold the Word in all its impressiveness.
Many who are now the bitterest opponents of truth are acting up
to their honest convictions of duty, but they will yet see the truth,
and become its warm advocates. Those who now treat them with
ridicule, who manifest a harsh spirit toward them, will fall under
temptation, and bring reproach upon the cause of God, and cause
the loss of souls through their indiscretion. Many who go into the
field at the call made at the eleventh hour, will through the grace of
Christ so present the truth, that they will be accounted first.
We are not to voice inconsistency. It is our work to advance the
light, to inculcate ideas in the spirit of meekness and dependence
upon God. Let us seek to become overcomers, and thus receive the
overcomers’ reward. Do all in your power to reflect light, to bring
souls to a knowledge of the truth as it is in Jesus, but abstain from
[242] speaking irritating and provoking words. Present the truth in its
simplicity, for it must be confessed before man as it involves their
eternal interest.—Lt 36, 1895.
No Combative Armor—The combative armor, the debating
spirit, must be laid off. If we would be Christlike we must reach
men where they are.—Evangelism, 249.
Inappropriate Debate—We have the most solemn message of
truth ever borne to the world. This truth is more and more respected
by unbelievers because it cannot be controverted. In view of this fact,
our young men become self-confident and self-inflated. They take
the truths which have been brought out by other minds, and without
study or earnest prayer meet opponents and engage in contests,
indulging in sharp speeches and witticisms, flattering themselves
that this is doing the work of a gospel minister. In order to be fitted
for God’s work, these men need as thorough a conversion as Paul
experienced. Ministers must be living representatives of the truth
they preach. They must have greater spiritual life, characterized by
greater simplicity.—Testimonies for the Church 4:446.
More Argument, More Opposition—Often, as you seek to
present the truth, opposition will be aroused; but if you seek to meet
the opposition with argument, you will only multiply it, and that you
cannot afford to do. Hold to the affirmative.—Testimonies for the

Church 9:147.
Limitations of Debate—Never should you enter a discussion [243]
where so much is at stake, relying upon your aptness to handle
strong arguments. If it cannot be well avoided, enter the conflict,
but enter upon it with firm trust in God and in the spirit of humility,
in the spirit of Jesus, who has bidden you learn of Him, who is
meek and lowly in heart. And then in order to glorify God and
exemplify the character of Christ, you should never take unlawful
advantage of your opponent. Lay aside sarcasm and playing upon
words. Remember that you are in a combat with Satan and his
angels, as well as with the man.—Testimonies for the Church 1:626.
No Sign of Self-Sufficiency—Speak no word, do no deed, that
will confirm any in unbelief.
If anyone shall seek to draw the workers into debate or contro-
versy on political or other questions, take no heed to either persuasion
or challenge. Carry forward the work of God firmly and strongly, but
in the meekness of Christ and as quietly as possible. Let no human
boasting be heard. Let no sign of self-sufficiency be made. Let it
be seen that God has called us to handle sacred trusts; preach the
Word, be diligent, earnest, and fervent.—Testimonies for the Church
6:122.
Debating Ministers Not Good Shepherds—Some ministers
who have been long in the work of preaching present truth have
made great failures in their labors. They have educated themselves
as combatants. They have studied out argumentative subjects for the
object of discussion, and these subjects which they have prepared [244]
they love to use. The truth of God is plain, clear, and conclusive. It
is harmonious and, in contrast with error, shines with clearness and
beauty. Its consistency commends it to the judgment of every heart
that is not filled with prejudice. Our preachers present the arguments
upon the truth, which have been made ready for them, and, if there
are no hindrances, the truth bears away the victory. But I was shown
that in many cases the poor instrument takes the credit of the victory
gained, and the people, who are more earthly than spiritual, praise
and honor the instrument, while the truth of God is not exalted by
the victory it gained.
Those who love to engage in discussion generally lose their

spirituality. They do not trust in God as they should. They have
the theory of the truth prepared to whip an opponent. The feelings
of their own unsanctified hearts have prepared many sharp, close
things to use as a snap to their whip to irritate and provoke their
opponent. The Spirit of Christ has no part in this. While furnished
with conclusive arguments, the debater soon thinks that he is strong
enough to triumph over his opponent, and God is left out of the
matter. Some of our ministers have made discussion their principal
business. When in the midst of the excitement raised by discussion,
they seem nerved up, and feel strong and talk strong; and in the
excitement many things pass with the people as all right, which in
themselves are decidedly wrong and a shame to him who was guilty
[245] of uttering words so unbecoming a Christian minister.
These things have a bad influence on ministers who are handling
sacred, elevated truths, truths which are to prove as a savor of life
unto life, or of death unto death, to those who hear them. Generally
the influence of discussions upon our ministers is to make them
self-sufficient and exalted in their own estimation. This is not all.
Those who love to debate are unfitted for being pastors to the flock.
They have trained their minds to meet opponents and to say sarcastic
things, and they cannot come down to meet hearts that are sorrowing
and need to be comforted.
They have also dwelt so much upon the argumentative that they
have neglected the practical subjects that the flock of God need. They
have but little knowledge of the sermons of Christ, which enter into
the everyday life of the Christian, and they have but little disposition
to study them. They have risen above the simplicity of the work.
When they were little in their own eyes, God helped them; angels of
God ministered unto them and made their labors highly successful
in convincing men and women of the truth. But in the training of
their minds for discussion they frequently become coarse and rough.
They lose the interest and tender sympathy which should ever attend
the efforts of a shepherd of Christ.
Debating ministers are generally disqualified to help the flock
where they most need help. Having neglected practical religion in
their own hearts and lives, they cannot teach it to the flock. Unless
[246] there is an excitement, they do not know how to labor; they seem
shorn of their strength. If they try to speak, they do not seem to

know how to present a subject that is proper for the occasion. When
they should present a subject which will feed the flock of God, and
which will reach and melt hearts, they go back to some of the old
stereotyped matter and go through the arranged arguments, which
are dry and uninteresting. Thus, instead of light and life, they bring
darkness to the flock and also to their own souls.—Testimonies for
the Church 3:215, 216. [247]
Chapter 44—Brevity
Shorter Sermons, More Ministering—Long sermons fail to do

good, for both the speaker and the hearer become weary. Discourses
should be shortened, and the physical and mental powers of the
minister should be preserved for ministering, and a far greater work
could be accomplished.—The Review and Herald, September 2,
1890.
Tenfold Greater Results—If our ministers would preach short
discourses, right to the point, and then educate the brethren and sis-
ters to work, and lay the burden upon them, the ministers themselves
would be saved from exhaustion, the people would gain spiritual
strength by the effort put forth, and the result would be tenfold
greater than now is seen.—The Signs of the Times, May 17, 1883.
Sermons Shorter by Half—Ministers give too much time to
preaching, and exhaust their vital forces....It is the many long dis-
courses that weary. One half of the gospel food presented would tell
to much better advantage.—Evangelism, 658.
[248] Bodily Organs Overtaxed by Long Speeches— There is
one matter about which I wish to caution you. In addressing a
congregation, do not speak for too long a time; for thus you put
a heavy strain on the delicate organs brought into action. I have
to pledge myself not to speak too long; for I know that if I do,
stomach and lungs and kidneys will be overtaxed, and suffering will
result.—Lt 75, 1904.
Pleasant Incense to God—Let the power and glow of the truth
find expression in appropriate words. Express the joy and gratitude
that well up from the heart as you see of the travail of your soul in
the conversion of sinners. But in speaking to the people, remember
to stop in season. Do not weary yourself so that you become nervous
and debilitated, for the work you will need to do in addition to the
preaching, requires tact and ability. It will be a potent agency for
good, as pleasant incense rising to God.—SpT Series A, No. 7, Page
12.
160
Chapter 44—Brevity 161
A Reserve of Physical and Mental Power—Never use up all

your vitality in a discourse so long and wearisome that you have not
a reserve of physical and mental power to meet inquiring minds, and
patiently seek to remove their doubts, and to establish their faith.
Make it manifest that we are handling weighty argument which you
know cannot be controverted. Teach by precept and example that
the truth is precious; that it brings light to your understanding and
courage to your heart. Keep a cheerful countenance. You will do
this if you present the truth in love. Ever bear in mind that eternal
interests are at stake, and be prepared to engage in personal labor [249]
for those who desire help....
In plain, simple language, tell every soul what he must do to be
saved.—SpT Series A, No. 7, Page 8.
Long Sermons a Trial to Speaker and Hearers—Those who
shall be mouthpieces for God should know that their lips have been
touched with a live coal from off the altar, and present the truth in the
demonstration of the Spirit. But lengthy discourses are a taxation to
the speaker and a taxation to the hearers who have to sit so long. One
half the matter presented would be of more benefit to the hearer than
the large mass poured forth by the speaker. That which is spoken in
the first hour is of far more value if the sermon closes then than the
words that are spoken in an added half hour. There is a burying up
of the matter that has been presented.
This subject has been opened to me again and again that our
ministers were making mistakes in talking so long as to wear away
the first forcible impression made upon the hearers. So large a mass
of matter is presented, which they cannot possibly retain and di-
gest, that all seems confused.—Testimonies to Ministers and Gospel
Workers, 256.
Short Sermon, Testimony Service—The preaching service
should generally be short so that an opportunity may be given to
those who love God to express their gratitude and adoration. Prayer
and praise offered to God by His believing children honor and glorify
His name.—Manuscript 32a, 1894. [250]
Short Messages, Often Repeated—Let the message for this
time be presented, not in long, labored discourses, but in short talks,
right to the point. Lengthy sermons tax the strength of the speaker
and the patience of his hearers. If the speaker is one who feels the
importance of his message, he will need to be especially careful lest

he overtax his physical powers, and give the people more than they
can remember.
Do not think, when you have gone over a subject once, that your
hearers will retain in their minds all that you have presented. There
is danger of passing too rapidly from point to point. Give short
lessons, in plain, simple language, and let them be often repeated.
Short sermons will be remembered far better than long ones. Our
speakers should remember that the subjects they are presenting may
be new to some of their hearers; therefore the principal points should
be gone over again and again.—Gospel Workers, 167, 168.
The Losing of a Religious Interest—Long discourses and te-
dious prayers are positively injurious to a religious interest and fail
to carry conviction to the consciences of the people. This propensity
for speech-making frequently dampens a religious interest that might
have produced great results.—Testimonies for the Church 4:261.
A Little at a Time—Present the truth to the people in its true
importance and sacredness, and be careful not to give them too
large a portion in one discourse. It will be lost upon them if you
[251] do. Lengthy speeches detract from the efficiency of your labors. To
those who are ignorant of the truth, your teaching is new and strange,
and they do not readily apprehend it. There is danger of pouring into
their minds a mass of matter which they cannot possibly digest. “But
the word of the Lord was unto them precept upon precept, precept
upon precept; line upon line, line upon line; here a little, and there
a little.” We need to study His method of teaching. We have the
most important and decided testimony for the world, and we must
give the people short discourses, in plain and simple language. Do
not think, because you have gone over a subject once, that you can
pass right on to other points, and the hearers retain all that has been
presented.—SpT Series A, No. 7, Pages 6, 7.
More Emphasis on Bible Reading—Avoid lengthy sermons.
The people cannot retain one half of the discourses which they hear.
Give short talks and more Bible readings. This is the time to make
every point as plain as mileposts.—Evangelism, 439.
Pure Wheat Thoroughly Winnowed—Preach the truth in its
simplicity, but let your discourses be short. Dwell decidedly on a
few important points.... Keep decidedly to a few points. Give the
people pure wheat thoroughly winnowed from all chaff. Do not let
your discourses embrace so much that weakness shall be seen in the
place of solid argument. Present the truth as it is in Jesus, that those
who hear may receive the very best impression.—Testimonies to
Ministers and Gospel Workers, 310. [252]
Effect of Dry Words—Many make a mistake in their preaching
in not stopping while the interest is up. They go on speechifying
until the interest that had risen in the minds of the hearers dies out
and the people are really wearied with words of no special weight
or interest. Stop before you get there. Stop when you have nothing
of special importance to say. Do not go on with dry words that only
excite prejudice and do not soften the heart. You want to be so united
to Christ that your words will melt and burn their way to the soul.
Mere prosy talk is insufficient for this time. Arguments are good,
but there may be too much of the argumentative and too little of the
spirit and life of God.—Testimonies for the Church 3:419.
Better Preparation, Shorter Discourses—The discourses
given upon present truth are full of important matter, and if these
discourses are carefully considered before being presented to the
people, if they are condensed and do not cover too much ground, if
the Spirit of the Master goes with the utterances, no one will be left
in darkness, no one will have cause to complain of being unfed. The
preparation, both in preacher and hearer, has very much to do with
the result.
I will here quote a few words that have come under my notice
just now:“I always know by the length of Cannon’s sermon whether
he has been much from home during the week,” said one of his flock.
“When carefully studied, his discourses are of a moderate length,
but it is almost impossible for his hearers to forget the teachings
conveyed in them. When he has had no time for preparation, his [253]
sermons are unreasonably long, and it is equally impossible to get
anything out of them which will stick to the memory.”
Another able minister was asked how long he was accustomed
to preach. “When I prepare thoroughly, half an hour; when only
partially, an hour; but when I enter the pulpit without previous
preparation, I go on for any length of time you like; in fact, I never
know when to stop.”
Here is another forcible statement: “A good shepherd,” says a

writer, “should always have abundance of bread in his scrip, and
his dog under command. The dog is his zeal, which he must lead,
order, and moderate. His scrip full of bread is his mind full of useful
knowledge, and he should ever be in readiness to give nourishment
to his flock.”—Evangelism, 175, 176.
Needless Expenditure of Vitality—Some pray too long and too
loud, which greatly exhausts their feeble strength and needlessly
expends their vitality; others frequently make their discourses one-
third or one-half longer than they should. In so doing they become
excessively weary, the interest of the people decreases before the
discourse closes, and much is lost to them, for they cannot retain it.
One-half that was said would have been better than more. Although
all the matter may be important, the success would be much greater
were the praying and talking less lengthy. The result would be
[254] reached without so great weariness. They are needlessly using up
their strength and vitality, which, for the good of the cause, it is so
necessary to retain. It is the long-protracted effort, after laboring to
the point of weariness, which wears and breaks.—Testimonies for
Long Prayers Not a Part of the Gospel—The long prayers
made by some ministers have been a great failure. Praying to great
length, as some do, is all out of place. They injure the throat and
vocal organs, and then they talk of breaking down by their hard
labor. They injure themselves when it is not called for. Many feel
that praying injures their vocal organs more than talking. This is in
consequence of the unnatural position of the body, and the manner
of holding the head. They can stand and talk, and not feel injured.
The position in prayer should be perfectly natural. Long praying
wearies, and is not in accordance with the gospel of Christ. Half or
even quarter of an hour is altogether too long. A few minutes’ time
is long enough to bring your case before God and tell Him what you
want; and you can take the people with you and not weary them
out and lessen their interest in devotion and prayer. They may be
refreshed and strengthened, instead of exhausted.
A mistake has been made by many in their religious exercises
in long praying and long preaching, upon a high key, with a forced
voice, in an unnatural strain and an unnatural tone. The minister
has needlessly wearied himself and really distressed the people by

hard, labored exercise, which is all unnecessary. Ministers should [255]
speak in a manner to reach and impress the people. The teachings
of Christ were impressive and solemn; His voice was melodious.
And should not we, as well as Christ, study to have melody in our
voices?—Testimonies for the Church 2:617.
Specific Nature of Public Prayer—The prayers offered by min-
isters previous to their discourses are frequently long and inappropri-
ate. They embrace a whole round of subjects that have no reference
to the necessities of the occasion or the wants of the people. Such
prayers are suitable for the closet, but should not be offered in pub-
lic. The hearers become weary and long for the minister to close.
Brethren, carry the people with you in your prayers. Go to your
Saviour in faith, tell Him what you need on that occasion. Let the
soul go out after God with intense longing for the blessing needed
at that time.—Testimonies for the Church 5:201.
Longer Secret Prayers, Short Public Prayers—Long prayers
are tiring to those who hear, and do not prepare the people to listen
to the instruction that is to follow.
It is often because secret prayer is neglected that long, tedious
prayers are offered in public. Let not ministers go over in their
petitions a week of neglected duties, hoping to atone for their neglect
and to pacify conscience. Such prayers frequently result in bringing
others down to a low level of spirituality.—Gospel Workers, 176. [256]
For Children, Frequency Better Than Length—Those who
instruct children should avoid tedious remarks. Short remarks and
to the point will have a happy influence. If much is to be said, make
up for briefness by frequency. A few words of interest now and then
will be more beneficial than to have it all at once. Long speeches
burden the small minds of children. Too much talk will lead them
to loathe even spiritual instruction, just as overeating burdens the
stomach and lessens the appetite, leading even to a loathing of food.
The minds of the people may be glutted with too much speechifying.
Labor for the church, but especially for the youth, should be line
upon line, precept upon precept, here a little, and there a little. Give
minds time to digest the truths you feed them. Children must be
drawn toward heaven, not rashly, but very gently.—Testimonies for
the Church 2:420.
Only the Best Quality—Teacher, weed from your talks all that
is not of the highest and best quality. Keep before the students
those sentiments only that are essential. Never should the physician,
minister, or teacher prolong his talks until the alpha is forgotten in
long-drawn-out assertions that are not of the least benefit. When this
is done, the mind is swamped with a multitude of words that it cannot
retain. Let the talks given be short and right to the point.—Counsels
Teachers’ Words Few and Well Chosen—Teachers, meet with
your classes. Pray with them, and teach them how to pray. Let the
[257] heart be softened, and the petitions short and simple, but earnest.
Let your words be few and well chosen; and let them learn from
your lips and your example that the truth of God must be rooted in
their hearts or they cannot stand the test of temptation. We want
to see whole classes of young people being converted to God, and
growing up useful members of the church.—Counsels on Sabbath
[258] School Work, 125.
Chapter 45—Speed and Tone
Correction of Rapid Speech—Rapidity of speech can and

should be corrected. The teacher must learn daily in the school
of Christ, that he may speak in such a way as to make the best and
most lasting impression upon his hearers. The appointed guardian of
truth, he must conscientiously guard the sacred treasures. He is not
to gather only a limited number of surface truths, but is to purchase
the field, that he may possess the treasure it contains. He is to seek
to improve in methods of labor, and make the very best use of the
organs of speech. If the words of truth are of sufficient importance
to be spoken before an audience, they are of sufficient importance
to be spoken distinctly. The guidance of the Spirit never leads to
indistinctness of speech. The Spirit takes the things of God and
presents them through the human instrument to the people. Then let
them come from our lips in the most perfect manner possible.—The
Southern Work, October 27, 1903.
Errors of Volume and Speed—The Lord designs that every
minister shall reach perfection in his work, overcoming everything
in voice, in attitude, in manner of address, which would lessen his [259]
influence. This it is his duty to do. “Be ye therefore perfect,” Christ
says, “even as your Father which is in heaven is perfect” [Matthew
5:48].
It is natural for us to expect more from the ministration of the
man whose manner of address and tone of voice is attractive than
from him whose ways do not please. Two men may handle the same
Scriptures and bear a full gospel testimony; one, because he has
been careful to overcome his defective pronunciation, because he
has learned to control his voice, not allowing it to swell to a high key,
may be a most successful worker; the other may have a knowledge
of the Word, yet he leaves an impression upon his audience that is
not agreeable. He appears excited, and all who hear him wish that
he would calm down and talk earnestly, but calmly and unexcitedly.
167
By talking in a high key, the speaker detracts considerably from

his usefulness. There are others who talk so low that their words
can scarcely be heard. Another laborer will speak hurriedly, rushing
his words one upon another. Half that he says is lost, for the hearer
cannot take in the precious words coming from his lips. These are
defects which should be overcome.
The habit should be acquired of speaking slowly, yet earnestly
and solemnly, with all the assurance which the Word of God can
give. Then the hearer gets the benefit of every sentence. Every word
is spoken distinctly, and makes its impression upon the minds. Rapid
[260] speaking and pitching the voice to a high key is an imperfection
which every one should overcome if he would make the most favor-
able impression when bearing the message from God to the world.
Let the Word of God come as a savor of life unto life.
If God’s servants will consider this matter rationally, if they
will place themselves under the control of sound reason and good
judgment, they will see that these errors need not be perpetuated.
They will see that such defects can be overcome, and their efforts
in the pulpit be of far greater advantage to the hearers, and far less
taxing to themselves. Every minster should bear in mind that he is
giving to the people the message which God has given him, and that
this word involves eternal interests.—Manuscript 4, 1897.
Truth at Half Value—Speak the truth in love and in pity for
those who turn the truth to fables. Bear in mind the fact that the Lord
Jesus is present in your assemblies. He would have you manifest
dignity, calmness, and composure of spirit. When you rush one word
right upon another, half the power is taken out of your discourse.—Lt
8, 1894.
Ellen White’s Voice Instruction From God—I have words of
caution to give you, which I am repeating to you in the night season.
I was saying this: “I have a message for you from the Lord. Cultivate
your vocal organs. This is your privilege and duty. The voice is a
most precious treasure. You often speak too hurriedly. Words are
[261] crowded too quickly upon words, and your utterance lacks the clear
distinctness that it should have.”
Speaking to large congregations as you do, it is your duty to give
your vocal organs all the relief possible. When speaking, take deep,
full inspirations of air. Use the muscles of the abdomen, and thus
Chapter 45—Speed and Tone 169
put upon them the burden you are now placing upon the throat and
lungs.
The Lord would not have you injure your vocal organs by a long,
continuous strain. Your words will be much more forcible if you give
your lungs more air and speak fewer words. When you are speaking,
you need to give time to taking full, deep inspirations. Bring the
muscles of the abdomen into action. Stand straight, breathe deep,
and speak your words with as much force as you please.
I was taught this lesson when my throat and lungs were so much
affected that I could not breathe without suffering. No human friend
gave me any hint of what to do in order to improve, but the great
Medical Missionary, whom I love and obey, told me what to do. The
directions given me, I give you. The importance of voice culture was
impressed upon me, and ever since I have tried to impress this upon
others. Let our ministers speak slowly, taking in full inspirations of
air, and there will be a melody in their voices that is now heard in
the voices of but few, because it is hard to change wrong habits for
right ones.
God would have His workers treat their vocal organs with special
care, as a precious gift from Him. These organs are not to be abused
by overtaxation. Let great care be shown in their use. Then the [262]
discourses given will be more impressive, and those who speak will
be enabled to do more work for the Master. There are men who
have gone down to the grave because they did not take pains to be
in harmony with nature’s laws in their use of the vocal organs.
The Lord would have His messengers guard sacredly their health
and strength. They are not to sacrifice their God-given organs by
misusing them. One organ is not to be overstrained, made to bear a
burden of abuse that will bring disease and cut short the usefulness
of the workers.
The Lord would have you improve in speech by placing the
burden where it belongs, upon the muscles of the chest and abdomen.
The throat is only the channel for the words. Speak slowly and
breathe deeply. This will enable you to throw out your words with
distinctness and volume, while the throat and lungs, instead of being
injured, will be strengthened to resist consumptive tendencies.
It is your privilege to take lessons in voice culture, if possible.
Voice culture is a study that should find a place in every institution
for the education of the youth. Especially is this study essential for
those who are preparing themselves to labor as teachers or ministers.
In every study the importance of speaking slowly and distinctly, and
of placing the burden upon the muscles of the abdomen, should be
made prominent. This line of work should be made a specialty in
every school. The students should be taught to stand straight, to
[263] breathe deeply, and to give the proper emphasis to important words
and sentences....
Think of these suggestions. Give them due attention, for the
preservation of your life demands this. The human agent is to do
all in his power to preserve his health and strength. The minister of
the gospel should give the organs of speech special care, giving the
throat every advantage, so that it shall not become irritated. He must
take time to rest. Then his vocal organs will not be so overworked
that they will become diseased beyond remedy.
I must urge you to exercise discretion. You talk hurriedly, and
the throat and lungs become wearied and irritated. Elder D was a
man of great ability. I did my best to persuade him to be careful of
his health, but he would not follow my advice. He said that he could
not enjoy freedom in speaking if he kept the rules which he knew
to be essential to the health of his vocal organs. The force of habit
was so strong that he did not change. When he was dying, he sent
for my husband and me to come and pray for him. While we were
with him, he said, “Oh, Sister White, I need not now be dying had I
heeded the warnings that you gave me.”—Lt 367, 1904.
Noise and Hurry No Evidence of God’s Presence—Some
ministers have fallen into the error that they cannot have liberty
in speaking unless they raise their voices to a high pitch and talk
loud and fast. Such should understand that noise and loud, hurried
[264] speaking are not evidence of the presence of the power of God.
It is not the power of the voice that makes the lasting impression.
Ministers should be Bible students, and should thoroughly furnish
themselves with the reasons of our faith and hope, and then, with full
control of the voice and feelings, they should present these in such a
manner that the people can calmly weigh them and decide upon the
evidences given. And as ministers feel the force of the arguments
which they present in the form of solemn, testing truth, they will
have zeal and earnestness according to knowledge.—Testimonies

False Inspiration—Some seem to think they must race right
straight along or else they will lose the inspiration and the people
will lose the inspiration. If that is inspiration, let them lose it, and
the sooner the better.—Evangelism, 670.
Distraction by Physical Antics—There are also fanatical min-
isters, who, in attempting to preach Christ, storm, halloo, jump up
and down, and pound the desk before them, as if this bodily exercise
profited anything. Such antics lend no force to the truths uttered,
but, on the contrary, disgust men and women of calm judgment and
elevated views. It is the duty of men who give themselves to the
ministry to leave all coarseness and boisterous conduct outside the
desk at least.—Evangelism, 640.
Whining Tone Not Proof of Humility—There is another class
that address the people in a whining tone. Their hearts are not
softened by the Spirit of God, and they think they must make an [265]
impression by the appearance of humility. Such a course does
not exalt the gospel ministry, but brings it down and degrades it.
Ministers should present the truth warm from glory. They should
speak in such a manner as rightly to represent Christ and preserve
the dignity becoming His ministers.—Testimonies for the Church
2:617.
Inaudible Prayers a Joy to Satan—In the social meeting there
is special need of clear, distinct utterance, that all may hear the
testimonies borne and be benefited by them. Difficulties are removed
and help is given as in social meeting God’s people relate their
experiences. But too often the testimonies are borne with faulty,
indistinct utterance, and it is impossible to gain a correct idea of
what is said. Thus the blessing is often lost.
Let those who pray and those who speak pronounce their words
properly and speak in clear, distinct, even tones. Prayer, if properly
offered, is a power for good. It is one of the means used by the Lord
to communicate to the people the precious treasures of truth. But
prayer is not what it should be, because of the defective voices of
those who utter it. Satan rejoices when the prayers offered to God are
almost inaudible. Let God’s people learn how to speak and pray in a
way that will properly represent the great truths they possess. Let
the testimonies borne and the prayers offered be clear and distinct.
Thus God will be glorified.—Testimonies for the Church 6:382.
[266] Clarity in Public Reading—It is essential that students be
trained to read in a clear, distinct tone. We have been pained as
we have attended conference meetings, tract society meetings, and
meetings of various kinds, where reports were read in an almost
inaudible voice or in a hesitating manner or a muffled tone. One-half
the interest in a meeting is killed when the participants do their
part in an indifferent, spiritless fashion. They should learn to speak
in such a way that they can edify those who listen. Let everyone
connected with missionary work qualify himself to speak in a clear,
attractive way, enunciating his words perfectly.—Counsels to Par-
ents, Teachers, and Students, 246, 247.
Mouthpiece for God—He who accepts the position of being
a mouthpiece for God should consider it highly essential that he
presents the truth with all the grace and intelligence that he can
acquire through discipline of the mind and in such a manner that
the truth shall lose nothing by his presentation. Let no one consider
it a little thing to speak in a thick voice and clumsy manner, or to
pitch the voice in a high, unnatural key, and talk loud and long and
thus abuse the organs of speech given of God, and make himself
unacceptable to the people.—Manuscript 67, 1895.
Defective Utterance of Truth—The ability to speak plainly and
clearly, in full, round tones, is invaluable in any line of work. This
qualification is indispensable in those who desire to become minis-
ters, evangelists, Bible workers, or canvassers. Those who are plan-
[267] ning to enter these lines of work should be taught to use the voice in
such a way that when they speak to people about the truth, a decided
impression for good will be made. The truth must not be marred by
being communicated through defective utterance.—Testimonies for
the Church 6:380.
Manner of Speaking for All Workers—All the workers,
whether they speak from the pulpit or give Bible readings, are to be
taught to speak in a clear, expressive manner.—Evangelism, 665.
Holy Boldness in Prayer—I am pained as I see how little the
gift of speech is appreciated. In reading the Bible, in engaging in
prayer, in bearing testimony in meeting, how necessary is clear,
distinct utterance! And how much is lost in family worship when
the one offering prayer bows the face down and speaks in a low,
feeble voice! But as soon as family worship is over, those who could
not speak loud enough to be heard in prayer, can usually speak in
clear, distinct tones, and there is no difficulty in hearing what they
say. Prayer that is thus uttered is appropriate for the closet, but not
edifying in family or public worship; for unless those assembled
can hear what is said, they cannot say Amen. Nearly all can speak
loud enough to be heard in ordinary conversation, and why should
they not speak thus when called upon to bear testimony or to offer
prayer?
When speaking of divine things, why not speak in distinct tones
and in a manner that will make it manifest that you know whereof
you speak, and are not ashamed to show your colors? Why not [268]
pray as if you had a conscience void of offense, and could come
to the throne of grace in humility, yet with holy boldness, lifting
up holy hands without wrath and doubting? Do not bow down and
cover up your faces as if there were something that you desired
to conceal; but lift up your eyes toward the heavenly sanctuary,
where Christ your Mediator stands before the Father to present your
prayers, mingled with His own merit and spotless righteousness, as
fragrant incense.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 241. [269]
Chapter 46—Anecdotes and Humor
Levity Inappropriate—The minister of God is not to speak

words which will create levity. We have been bought with the
price of a great sacrifice, even the sacrifice of God’s only begotten
Son.—Manuscript 19, 1910.
No Light, Trifling Words—The minister of the gospel who
is a laborer together with God, will learn daily in the school of
Christ....No light, trifling words will fall from his lips; for is he not
an ambassador for Christ, bearing a divine message to perishing
souls? All jesting and joking, all lightness and trifling, is painful to
the cross-bearing disciple of Christ.—Evangelism, 206, 207.
Conversation in Heaven—All lightness and trifling is positively
forbidden in the Word of God. His conversation should be in heaven,
his words seasoned with grace.—Testimonies for the Church 2:338.
A Worthy Example for Youth—Ministers should set the youth
a worthy example, one corresponding to their holy calling.... They
[270] are to put away all coarseness, all trifling, ever remembering that
they are educators; that, whether they will or not, their words and
acts are to those with whom they come in contact a savor of life or
of death.—Gospel Workers, 126.
Decorum in the Sacred Desk—What can the minister do with-
out Jesus? Verily, nothing. Then if he is a frivolous, joking man,
he is not prepared to perform the duty laid upon him by the Lord.
“Without Me,” says Christ, “ye can do nothing.” The flippant words
that fall from his lips, the trifling anecdotes, the words spoken to
create a laugh, are all condemned by the Word of God, and are en-
tirely out of place in the sacred desk.—Testimonies to Ministers and
Gospel Workers, 142.
No Slang Phrases—The minister should be free from every
unnecessary temporal perplexity, that he may give himself wholly to
his sacred calling. He should be much in prayer, and should bring
himself under discipline to God, that his life may reveal the fruits of
true self-control. His language should be correct; no slang phrases,
174
Chapter 46—Anecdotes and Humor 175
no cheap utterances, should fall from his lips.—Gospel Workers,

145.
In Christ’s Stead—Ministers cannot be too guarded, especially
before the young. They should use no lightness of speech, jesting or
joking, but should remember that they are in Christ’s stead, that they
must illustrate by example the life of Christ.—Testimonies for the
Church 1:380, 381.
No Jesting in the Pulpit—The minister who is ready to engage [271]
in frivolous conversation, ready to jest and laugh, does not realize
the sacred obligations resting upon him, and if he goes from such
an exercise to the pulpit, the Lord cannot stand by his side to bless
him.... Flowery discourses will not be sufficient to feed the soul
of the famishing child of God.—The Review and Herald, June 23,
1891.
Speech Seasoned With Grace—Let trifling and joking be ban-
ished from the conversation of the minister, but let his speech be
seasoned with grace; let the light and love of Jesus shine in his
example and precept, that souls may be won for the Master.—The
Review and Herald, April 5, 1892.
Abuse of the Gospel—Some who stand in the pulpit make the
heavenly messengers in the audience ashamed of them. The precious
gospel, which it has cost so much to bring to the world, is abused.
There is common, cheap talk; grotesque attitudes and workings of
the features. There is, with some, rapid talking, with others a thick,
indistinct utterance.—Testimonies to Ministers and Gospel Workers,
339.
Common Words of Human Devising—The messages of truth
are to be kept entirely free from cheap, common words of human
devising. Thus forcible impressions will be made upon hearts. Let
not our ministers cherish the idea that they must bring forth some-
thing new and strange, or that cheap, common expressions will give
them influence. Ministers are to be the mouthpiece of God, and
they must eradicate from their speech every expression that is cheap [272]
or common. Let them be careful lest by attempting during their
discourse to cause laughter, they dishonor God.
Our message is a solemn and sacred one, and we must watch unto
prayer. The words uttered must be of such a character that through
them God can make an impression on heart and mind. Let the
ministers of the gospel be sanctified through the truth.—Evangelism,

211.
On the Enemy’s Ground—As soon as a preacher comes down
from the position a minister should ever occupy, and descends to the
comical to create a laugh over his opponent, or when he is sarcastic
and sharp, and rails upon him, he does that which the Saviour of the
world did not dare to do; for he places himself upon the enemy’s
ground.—Testimonies for the Church 3:220.
Pure Provender With No Chaff—The preaching of the Word
should appeal to the intellect, and should impart knowledge, but it
should do more than this. The words of the minister should reach
the hearts of the hearers. Neither is it the object of preaching to
amuse. Some ministers have adopted a style of preaching that has
not the best influence. It has become a habit with them to weave
anecdotes into their discourses. The impression thus made upon
the hearers is not a savor of life unto life. Ministers should not
bring amusing stories into their preaching. The people need pure
provender, thoroughly winnowed from the chaff. “Preach the Word,”
[273] was the charge that Paul gave to Timothy, and this is our commission
also.
The minister who mixes storytelling with his discourses is using
strange fire. God is offended, and the cause of truth is dishonored,
when His representatives descend to the use of cheap, trifling words.
My brethren, you are required by our Saviour to take heed how
you witness for Him. You need to go deeper and still deeper in the
study of the Word. You have all classes of minds to meet, and as you
teach the truths of the sacred Word, you are to manifest earnestness,
respect, and reverence. Weed out storytelling from your discourses,
and preach the Word. You will then have more sheaves to bring to
the Master. Remember that in your audience there are those who are
constantly harassed by temptation. Some are wrestling with doubt,
almost in despair, almost hopeless. Ask God to help you to speak
words that will strengthen them for the conflict.—The Review and
Herald, December 22, 1904.
Irrelevant Anecdotes—Ministers should not make a practice
of relating irrelevant anecdotes in connection with their sermons;
for this detracts from the force of the truth presented. The relation
of anecdotes or incidents that create a laugh or a light thought in
Chapter 46—Anecdotes and Humor 177
the minds of the hearers is severely censurable. The truth should

be clothed in chaste, dignified language; and the illustrations used
should be of a like character.—Gospel Workers, 166.
Comic Illustrations—A minister of the gospel should not be [274]
regardless of his attitude. If he is the representative of Christ, his
deportment, his attitude, his gestures, should be of such a character
as will not strike the beholder with disgust. Ministers should possess
refinement. They should discard all uncouth manners, attitudes, and
gestures, and should encourage in themselves humble dignity of
bearing. They should be clothed in a manner befitting the dignity
of their position. Their speech should be in every respect solemn
and well chosen. I was shown that it is wrong to make coarse,
irreverent expressions, relate anecdotes to amuse, or present comic
illustrations to create a laugh. Sarcasm and playing upon the words
of an opponent are all out of God’s order.—Testimonies for the
Church 1:648, 649.
Amusing Stories—My brother, you need to examine more
closely the discourses you present to the people. The object of
your ministerial labors is not to amuse. It is not to convey infor-
mation alone, not merely to convince the intellect. The preaching
of the Word should appeal to the intellect and impart knowledge,
but it comprises much more than this. The heart of the minister
must reach the hearts of the hearers. Some have adopted a style of
preaching that does not have a right influence. It has become a habit
with them to cheapen their discourses by the relation of anecdotes.
The impression thus made upon the hearers is not a savor of life
unto life. You should not bring amusing stories into your preaching.
The people need pure provender, thoroughly winnowed from all that
is not food. “Preach the Word,” was the charge that Paul gave to [275]
Timothy, and this is your commission.—Lt 61, 1896.
No Clowns in the Pulpit—I warned you against clownishness
in the desk or before the people. Do you not sometimes bring this
acting into the sacred desk? You please the world; you attract the
world. Is this an evidence that you are having a deep spiritual piety,
sanctified to God through the Spirit?—Lt 9, 1889. [276]
Chapter 47—Illustrations and Visual Aids
Chaste and Dignified—The truth should be clothed in chaste,

dignified language; and the illustrations used should be of a like
character.—Gospel Workers, 166.
Self-evident Illustrations—It would be well if ministers who
labor in word or doctrine could enter the fields and spend some
portion of the day in physical exercise with the students. They could
do as Christ did in giving lessons from nature to illustrate Bible
truth.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 325.
Teaching by Illustration—In Christ’s parable teaching the
same principle is seen as in His own mission to the world. That
we might become acquainted with His divine character and life,
Christ took our nature and dwelt among us. Divinity was revealed
in humanity; the invisible glory in the visible human form. Men
could learn of the unknown through the known; heavenly things
were revealed through the earthly; God was made manifest in the
likeness of men. So it was in Christ’s teaching: the unknown was
[277] illustrated by the known; divine truths by earthly things with which
the people were most familiar.
The Scripture says, “All these things spake Jesus unto the mul-
titude in parables; ... that it might be fulfilled which was spoken
by the prophet, saying, I will open My mouth in parables; I will
utter things which have been kept secret from the foundation of
the world.” Matthew 13:34, 35. Natural things were the medium
for the spiritual; the things of nature and the life experience of His
hearers were connected with the truths of the written Word. Leading
thus from the natural to the spiritual kingdom, Christ’s parables are
links in the chain of truth that unites man with God, and earth with
heaven.—Christ’s Object Lessons, 17, 18.
Application of the Scriptures—The Lord wishes you to learn
how to use the gospel net. Many need to learn this art. In order
for you to be successful in your work, the meshes of your net—the
application of the Scriptures—must be close, and the meaning easily
178
Chapter 47—Illustrations and Visual Aids 179
discerned. Then make the most of drawing in the net. Come right
to the point. Make your illustrations self-evident. However great a
it to others.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students, 253.
Illustrations for Everyone—Teachers, remember that the Lord
is your strength. Strive to give the students ideas that will be to them
a savor of life unto life. Teach by illustrations. Ask God to give
you words to speak that all can understand.—Counsels to Parents,
Teachers, and Students, 254. [278]
Children in Understanding—The teacher should constantly
aim at simplicity and effectiveness. He should teach largely by
illustration, and even in dealing with older pupils should be careful to
make every explanation plain and clear. Many pupils well advanced
in years are but children in understanding.—Education, 233.
Comprehension by Children—In all that men have written,
where can be found anything that has such a hold upon the heart,
anything so well adapted to awaken the interest of the little ones, as
the stories of the Bible? In these simple stories may be made plain
the great principles of the law of God. Thus by illustrations best
suited to the child’s comprehension, parents and teachers may begin
very early to fulfill the Lord’s injunction concerning His precepts:
“Thou shalt teach them diligently unto thy children, and shalt talk
of them when thou sittest in thine house, and when thou walkest
by the way, and when thou liest down, and when thou risest up.”
Deuteronomy 6:7.—Counsels to Parents, Teachers, and Students,
181.
Dignity of the Word—Too many illustrations do not have a
correct influence; they belittle the sacred dignity that should ever
be maintained in the presentation of the Word of God to the peo-
ple.—Evangelism, 209.
Starving Sheep—There are men who stand in the pulpits as
shepherds, professing to feed the flock, while the sheep are starving
for the bread of life. There are long-drawn-out discourses, largely
made up of the relation of anecdotes; but the hearts of the hearers [279]
are not touched. The feelings of some may be moved, they may
shed a few tears, but their hearts are not broken. The Lord Jesus has
been present when they have been presenting that which was called
sermons, but their words were destitute of the dew and rain of heaven.
They evidenced that the anointed ones described by Zechariah (see

chapter 4) had not ministered to them that they might minister to
others. When the anointed ones empty themselves through the
golden pipes, the golden oil flows out of themselves into the golden
bowls, to flow forth into the lamps, the churches. This is the work
of every true, devoted servant of the living God.
The Lord God of heaven cannot approve much that is brought
into the pulpit by those who are professedly speaking the word of
the Lord. They do not inculcate ideas that will be a blessing to
those who hear. There is cheap, very cheap fodder placed before the
people.—Testimonies to Ministers and Gospel Workers, 336, 337.
Strange Fire—The minister is using strange fire when he mixes
storytelling with his discourses.... You have men of all classes of
minds to meet, and as you deal with the sacred Word, you should
manifest earnestness, respect, reverence. Let not the impression be
made upon any mind that you are a cheap, surface speaker. Weed
out storytelling from your discourses. Preach the Word. You would
have had more sheaves to bring to the Master if you had constantly
preached the Word. You little understand the soul’s great need and
[280] longing. Some are wrestling with doubt, almost in despair, almost
hopeless.—Evangelism, 210.
Use of Visual Aids—By the use of charts, symbols, and repre-
sentations of various kinds the minister can make the truth stand out
clearly and distinctly. This is a help, and in harmony with the Word
of God.—Testimonies for the Church 9:142.
Object Lessons in Sabbath School—Our Sabbath Schools
should be made more interesting. The public schools have of late
years greatly improved their methods of teaching. Object lessons,
pictures, and blackboards are used to make difficult lessons clear to
the youthful mind. Just so may present truth be simplified and made
intensely interesting to the active minds of the children.—Counsels
on Sabbath School Work, 114.
Memory Training—The use of object lessons, blackboards,
maps, and pictures, will be an aid in explaining these lessons [Bible
stories], and fixing them in the memory. Parents and teachers should
constantly seek for improved methods.—Education, 186.
Charts in Presentation of Truth—Instruction has been given
me clearly and distinctly that charts should be used in the pre-
Chapter 47—Illustrations and Visual Aids 181
sentation of truth. And these illustrations should be made still

more impressive by words showing the importance of obedi-
ence.—Evangelism, 203.
Combination of Word and Illustration—The use of charts is [281]
most effective in explaining the prophecies relating to the past, the
present, and the future. But we are to make our work as simple and
inexpensive as possible. The truth is to be explained in simplic-
ity.—Evangelism, 203.
Means of Holding Attention—Brother S is an intelligent evan-
gelist. He speaks with the simplicity of a child. Never does he bring
any slur into his discourses. He preaches directly from the Word,
letting the Word speak to all classes. His strong arguments are the
words of the Old and the New Testaments. He does not seek for
words that would merely impress the people with his learning, but
he endeavors to let the Word of God speak to them directly in clear,
distinct utterance. If any refuse to accept the message, they must
reject the Word.
Brother S dwells especially upon the prophecies in the books of
Daniel and the Revelation. He has large representations of the beasts
spoken of in these books, and these are brought forward at the proper
time to illustrate his remarks. Not one careless or unnecessary word
escapes his lips. He speaks forcibly and solemnly. Many of his
hearers have never before heard discourses of so solemn a nature.
They manifest no spirit of levity, but a solemn awe seems to rest
upon them.—Evangelism, 204, 205.
Life-Size Images of Prophetic Beasts—Elder S is arousing a
good interest by his meetings. People of all classes come out to
hear, and to see the life-size images that he has of the beasts of [282]
Revelation.—Evangelism, 205.
Representations With Convincing Power—I am pleased with
the manner in which our brother [Elder S] has used his ingenu-
ity and tact in providing suitable illustrations for the subjects pre-
sented—representations that have a convincing power. Such meth-
ods will be used more and more in this closing work.—Evangelism,
205.
Illustrative Devices—Let the workers for God manifest tact and
talent, and originate devices by which to communicate light to those
who are near and to those who are afar off.—Evangelism, 206. [283]
Chapter 48—Oratorical and Theatrical Display
Eloquent Orations As Sounding Brass—The life renewed by

divine grace and hidden with Christ in God is eloquent in its sim-
plicity. The orations and speeches made by apparently learned men
are in God’s estimation as sounding brass and a tinkling cymbal in
comparison with the words which come direct from a heart refined
by belief in Christ as a personal Saviour. Those who are eloquent
in God’s sight are willing to walk in lowly paths. They are unap-
preciated by those who are constantly striving for the supremacy,
who have no sense of what it means to walk in humble subjection
to God’s will and way; but God declares: “To this man will I look,
even to him that is poor and of a contrite spirit, and trembleth at My
word” [Isaiah 66:2].—Manuscript 176, 1899.
Ministers, Not Actors—Unless men are led to value the truth as
a choice possession, to receive it as that which will sanctify the soul,
no lasting good has been accomplished. He who presents eloquent
words, simply causes the people to forget the truth that is mingled
[284] with his oratory. When the excitement passes away, it is found that
the word of God has not been fastened upon the mind; nor have the
simple gained in understanding. The people may go away from the
church and may speak in admiration of the oratorical powers of the
man who has preached to them, but they may not be convicted by
the truth or brought any nearer to the point of decision. They speak
of the sermon in the same way as they would of a play, and of the
minister in the same manner as they would of an actor at a theater.
They may come again to listen to the same kind of discourse, and
may again go away unimpressed and unfed.
People should not be encouraged to prize oratorical display. This
kind of sermonizing has the same kind of effect upon the mind as
does the reading of an exciting story. It has a stimulating effect,
but does not transform the character. The influence of this kind of
preaching has been made plain in the results that have followed. The
people are attracted to the man, and think no one is equal to him; but
182
Chapter 48—Oratorical and Theatrical Display 183
I have been shown that as it was in _______, so it is in other places,

that no solid foundation is made for the organization of a church.
When such a minister leaves those who have apparently embraced
the truth, it is made manifest that the people are not bound up with
Christ, but have been bound to the man. Christ was as a stranger to
them, and they knew Him not. The people left His company, and
walked no more with Him.
The messengers of God are to deliver the last, solemn, testing
message of mercy to a fallen world. If the minister exhibits himself, [285]
he interposes himself between the message and the people. If he
educates himself to present the truth in a certain manner, he can
make his work of no effect, and leave it so that it will ravel out. This
is because the Holy Spirit does not work with his efforts. The people
are encouraged to look to him and to exalt him, and Jesus is not the
one who is seen, but [rather] the man [who] steps into the place of
the crucified and risen Saviour. The minister may preach a discourse
which will go clear above the people into the clouds and stars, but
leave no lasting impression upon the hearts of his hearers. Unless
conviction is fastened on a heart, then time and means are expended
to no effect. Of what value is it that the people think much of the
minister, when they do not have a regard for saving, testing truth?
The Holy Spirit must work the man; the man must not endeavor
to work the Holy Spirit. The Holy Spirit is not a servant, but a
controlling power. The Holy Spirit causes the truth to shine in
every mind, and speaks through every discourse where the minister
surrenders himself to its working. The Holy Spirit walks with the
soul by the way, and talks with the human agent. It is He who gives
the atmosphere that surrounds the soul, and speaks to the impenitent
through words of warning.—Lt 29, 1895.
Men of Prayer, Men of Power—It is not eloquent speakers that
are needed, but humble, earnest workers, men who have childlike
trust in a higher strength. It is the men of prayer, who seek the Lord [286]
with humble, contrite hearts, that are men of power.—Lt 146, 1903.
Oratory a Possible Snare—It is the truth enshrined in the soul
that makes one a man of God. Oratory, though it may please a certain
class, will prove a snare to the one who uses it, and a snare to the
church....
Our anxiety should not be to secure a minister who will please

the people by smart speeches and oratory, in order to gain flattery and
applause, but to secure men who are laborers together with God, men
who study to show themselves approved unto God.—Manuscript 1a,
1890.
Fanciful Eloquence—The minister may make a high range into
the heavens, by poetical descriptions and fanciful presentations
which please the senses and feed the imagination, but which do
not touch the common life experience, the daily necessities; bring-
ing home to the heart the very truths which are of vital interest.
The immediate requirements, the present trials, need present help
and strength—the faith that works by love and purifies the soul, not
words which have no real influence upon the living daily walk in
practical Christianity.
The minister may think that with his fanciful eloquence he has
done great things in feeding the flock of God; the hearers may
suppose that they never before heard such beautiful themes, they
have never seen the truth dressed up in such beautiful language,
[287] and as God was represented before them in His greatness, they felt
a glow of emotion. But trace from cause to effect all this ecstasy
of feeling caused by these fanciful representations. There may be
truths, but too often they are not the food that will fortify them for
the daily battles of life.—Evangelism, 182.
A Few Simple Rules—I was shown that our ministers were
doing themselves great injury by carelessness in the use of their
vocal organs. Their attention was called to this important matter,
and cautions and instructions were given them by the Spirit of God.
It was their duty to learn the wisest manner of using these organs.
The voice, this gift of heaven, is a powerful faculty for good, and
if not perverted, would glorify God. All that was essential was to
study and conscientiously follow a few simple rules. But instead of
educating themselves, as they might have done by the exercise of a
little common sense, they employed a professor of elocution.
As a result, many who were feeling that God had a work for them
to do in teaching the truth to others, have become infatuated and
crazed with elocution. All that certain ones needed was to have this
temptation presented before them. Their interest was attracted by
the novelty, and young men and some ministers were carried away
Chapter 48—Oratorical and Theatrical Display 185
with this excitement. They left their fields of labor—everything in

the vineyard of the Lord was neglected—and paid their money and
gave their precious time to attend a school of elocution. When they
came from this drill, devotion and religion had parted company with [288]
them, and the burden of souls was laid off, as they would lay aside
a garment. They had accepted Satan’s suggestions, and he had led
them where he chose.
Some set themselves up as teachers of elocution, who had neither
discretion nor ability, and they made themselves disgusting to the
public, for they did not properly use what knowledge they had gained.
Their performances were void of dignity or good sense; and these
exploits on their part have closed the door, so far as they are known,
to any influence that they may have in future as men to carry the
message of truth to the world. This was Satan’s device. It was well
to make improvement in speaking; but to give time and money to this
one branch, and absorb the mind with it, was rushing into extremes
and showing great weakness.
Young men who call themselves Sabbathkeepers attach “profes-
sor” to their names and abuse the community with that which they
do not understand. Many thus pervert the light which God has seen
fit to give them. They have not well-balanced minds. Elocution has
become a byword. It has caught up men to engage in a work that
they cannot do wisely, and spoiled them for doing a work which,
had they been humbly and modestly seeking to accomplish it in the
fear of God, they would have made a glorious success. These youth
might have been fitting for usefulness in the missionary field as
canvassers and colporteurs, or as licentiates proving themselves for
ministerial labor, doing work for time and for eternity. But they have
been crazed with the thought of becoming teachers of elocution, and [289]
Satan stands and laughs that he has caught them in the net which he
has laid for them.—Testimonies for the Church 4:604-606.
Eloquence Even of a Stammering Tongue—Most precious
gems of truth are often rendered powerless by the wisdom of words
in which they are clothed, while the power of the Spirit of God is
lacking. Christ presented the truth in its simplicity; and He reached
not only the most elevated, but the lowliest men of earth. The
minister who is God’s ambassador and Christ’s representative on the
earth, who humbles himself that God may be exalted, will possess
the genuine quality of eloquence. True piety, a close connection

with God, and a daily, living experience in the knowledge of Christ,
will make eloquent even the stammering tongue.—Testimonies for
the Church 4:314.
Use of Common Fire—Some ministers make the mistake of
supposing that success depends on drawing a large congregation
by outward display, and then delivering the message of truth in
a theatrical style. But this is using common fire instead of the
sacred fire of God’s kindling. The Lord is not glorified by this
manner of working. Not by startling notices and expensive display
is His work to be carried to completion, but by following Christlike
[290] methods.—Gospel Workers, 383.
Chapter 49—Danger of Excessive Emotion
Impression by God’s Word, Not Feeling—It is through the

Word—not feeling, not excitement—that we want to influence
the people to obey the truth. On the platform of God’s Word
we can stand with safety. The living Word is replete with evi-
dence, and a wonderful power accompanies its proclamation in our
world.—Selected Messages 3:375.
Emotional Preaching—If the preaching is of an emotional char-
acter, it will affect the feelings, but not the heart and conscience.
Such preaching results in no lasting good, but it often wins the hearts
of the people and calls out their affections for the man who pleases
them. They forget that God has said: “Cease ye from man, whose
breath is in his nostrils.”—Testimonies for the Church 5:301.
Trust in God, Not Man—I am pained beyond measure to see
the little discernment existing among our people who have had so
great light. They listen to a sermon that stirs their emotions, and the
language of their hearts is, “Evermore give us the ministry of this
man; he moves our hearts, he makes us feel.” They forget God, and [291]
praise and exalt the man, to his injury and the injury of their own
souls . When will those who claim to believe the truth cease from
man whose breath is in his nostrils? When will they trust in God,
make Him just what He is—all and in all?—Lt 8, 1889.
Temporary Nature of Impulsive Decisions—There are in the
ministry men who gain apparent success by swaying minds through
human influence. They play upon the feelings at will, making their
hearers weep, and in a few minutes laugh. Under labor of this kind,
many are moved by impulse to profess Christ, and there is thought
to be a wonderful revival; but when the test comes, the work does
not endure. Feelings are stirred, and many are borne along by the
tide that seems to be setting heavenward; but in the strong current
of temptation they quickly float back as driftwood. The laborer is
self-deceived, and he misleads his hearers.—Gospel Workers, 382.
187
Real Intelligence in Preaching—A man may preach in a spir-

ited manner and please the ear, but convey no new idea or real
intelligence to the mind. The impressions received through such
preaching last no longer than while the speaker’s voice is heard.
When search is made for the fruit of such labor, there is little to be
found.—Testimonies for the Church 1:447.
Unnatural Use of the Voice—Some raise their voices to an
[292] unnatural key when they speak in the desk; others talk very rapidly,
and the people cannot hear what is said. This works disaster to
themselves, as well as to others, for their unnatural use of the voice
results in injury to the vocal organs. They needlessly exhaust their
strength, and make their efforts painful to their congregation. They
should exercise self-control, that quality so essential for them as
ambassadors of Christ, and overcome their pernicious habits. If they
would but do this, they would be able to leave a pleasant impression
on the minds of their hearers, and the preaching of the truth would
become attractive.—The Review and Herald, October 28, 1890.
Intensity Without Emotionalism—God would have all move
calmly, considerately, choosing our words in harmony with the solid
truth for this time, which requires to be presented to the mind as
free from that which is emotional as possible, while still bearing
the intensity and solemnity that it is proper it should bear. We must
guard against creating extremes, guard against encouraging those
who would either be in the fire or in the water.
I beseech you to weed out of your teachings every extravagant
expression, everything that unbalanced minds and those who are
inexperienced will catch up, and from which they will make wild,
immature movements. It is necessary for you to cultivate caution in
every statement you make, lest you start some on a wrong track, and
make confusion that will require much sorrowful labor to set in order,
[293] thus diverting the strength and work of the laborers into lines which
God does not design shall be entered. One fanatical streak exhibited
among us will close many doors against the soundest principles of
[294] truth.—Testimonies to Ministers and Gospel Workers, 227, 228.
Chapter 50—Being Heard, but Not by Shouting
Wearing Out of the Vocal Organs—From the light I have had,

the ministry is a sacred and exalted office, and those who accept this
position should have Christ in their hearts and manifest an earnest
desire to represent Him worthily before the people in all their acts, in
their dress, in their speaking, and even in their manner of speaking.
They should speak with reverence.
Some destroy the solemn impression they may have made upon
the people, by raising their voices to a very high pitch and hallooing
and screaming out the truth. When presented in this manner, truth
loses much of its sweetness, its force, and solemnity. But if the voice
is toned right, if it has solemnity, and is so modulated as to be even
pathetic, it will produce a much better impression.
This was the tone in which Christ taught His disciples. He
impressed them with solemnity; He spoke in a pathetic manner. But
this loud hallooing—what does it do? It does not give the people
any more exalted views of the truth and does not impress them any
more deeply. It only causes a disagreeable sensation to the hearers
and wears out the vocal organs of the speaker. The tones of the voice [295]
have much to do in affecting the hearts of those that hear.
Many who might be useful men are using up their vital force and
destroying their lungs and vocal organs by their manner of speaking.
Some ministers have acquired a habit of hurriedly rattling off what
they have to say as though they had a lesson to repeat and were
hastening through it as fast as possible. This is not the best manner of
speaking. By using proper care, every minister can educate himself
to speak distinctly and impressively, not to hurriedly crowd the
words together without taking time to breathe. He should speak in
a moderate manner, that the people may get the ideas fixed in their
minds as he passes along. But when the matter is rushed through so
rapidly, the people cannot get the points in their minds, and they do
not have time to receive the impression that it is important for them
189
to have; nor is there time for the truth to affect them as it otherwise
would.
Speaking from the throat, letting the words come out from the
upper extremity of the vocal organs, all the time fretting and irritat-
ing them, is not the best way to preserve health or to increase the
efficiency of those organs. You should take a full inspiration and
let the action come from the abdominal muscles. Let the lungs be
only the channel, but do not depend upon them to do the work. If
you let your words come from deep down, exercising the abdominal
muscles, you can speak to thousands with just as much ease as you
can speak to ten.
[296] Some of our preachers are killing themselves by long, tedious
praying and loud speaking, when a lower tone would make a better
impression and save their own strength. Now, while you go on
regardless of the laws of life and health, and follow the impulse of the
moment, do not charge it upon God if you break down.—Testimonies
Prayers That All Can Hear—To those who are planning to en-
ter God’s work as ministers, I would say: Strive with determination
to be perfect in speech. Ask God to help you to accomplish this
great object. When in the congregation you offer prayer, remember
that you are addressing God, and that He desires you to speak so
that all who are present can hear and can blend their supplications
with yours. A prayer uttered so hurriedly that the words are jum-
bled together is no honor to God and does the hearers no good. Let
ministers and all who offer public prayer learn to pray in such a way
that God will be glorified and the hearers will be blessed. Let them
speak slowly and distinctly and in tones loud enough to be heard by
all so that the people may unite in saying, Amen.—Testimonies for
the Church 6:383.
Loud Talking a Danger to Health—[An impromptu dialogue
during Ellen White’s talk to the General Conference Committee at
Lake Goguac in Michigan. July 14, 1890.] Elder Farnsworth: “Don’t
you think, Sister White, a great many of our ministers have received
[297] great injury from their manner of speaking?”
Ellen White: “Oh, yes, indeed; I have seen it over and over. My
husband got in the way of sometimes raising his voice very loud,
and it seemed as though he could not get out of that way. And there
Chapter 50—Being Heard, but Not by Shouting 191
is a brother in Texas, Brother A, that is dying just as sure as if he put

a knife to his throat. Now since I have come here I have thought of
that and I must write to him.”
Elder Kilgore: “He has been told about that.”
Elder Farnsworth: “They are all around in every conference.”
Ellen White: “In my younger days I used to talk too loud. The
Lord has shown me that I could not make the proper impression
upon the people by getting the voice to an unnatural pitch. Then
Christ was presented before me, and His manner of talking.
There was a sweet melody in His voice. His voice, in a slow,
calm manner, reached those who listened. His words penetrated
their hearts, and they were able to catch on to what He said before
the next sentence was spoken.”—Manuscript 19b, 1890. [298]
Chapter 51—Refinement and Solemnity of
Demeanor
No Need for Sensationalism—The Lord calls upon you to make

decided improvement in your manner of presenting the truth. You
need not be sensational. Preach the Word, as Christ, the Son of God,
preached the Word. Violent gesticulations detract greatly from the
impressions the truth would make upon human hearts, and lessen
the force of the demonstrations of the Spirit of God. They efface the
solemn impressions regarding God’s Word that holy angels desire
shall be made upon minds.—Evangelism, 184.
Awkward and Uncouth Gestures—Awkward and uncouth ges-
tures are not to be tolerated in the common walks of life; how much
less, then, are they to be endured in the most sacred work of the
gospel ministry. The minister should cultivate grace, courtesy, and
refinement of manner. He should carry himself with a quiet dignity
becoming his elevated calling. Solemnity, a certain godly authority,
mingled with meekness, should characterize the demeanor of him
[299] who is a teacher of God’s truth.—Evangelism, 640.
192
Chapter 52—Every Person an Original
No Man’s Shadow—Ministers are never to copy any man’s ges-

tures, his habits, his attitude, his expressions, the tones of his voice.
They are to become no man’s shadow, in thought, in sentiment, or
in devising and executing the great whole. If God has made you
a shepherd of the flock, He has given you qualification to do that
work. Christ says, “Call no man your father upon the earth: for one
is your Father, which is in heaven” [Matthew 23:9]. Let every man
take his Bible, and place himself in divine communion with the great
Teacher. God is the source from which all knowledge and wisdom
flows.—Manuscript 104, 1898.
Each in His Own Armor—We are failing in another direction,
and that is that men who can work should be linked in their labors
with those who are inexperienced, that they may get an experience
in the right direction. The inexperienced ones should not be sent out
alone. They should stand right by the side of older and experienced
ministers, where they could educate them. They should say to
them, “You must not copy my gestures, nor the tone of my voice, so [300]
that nobody will know whether you are speaking or whether I am
speaking. You are to stand in your own armor, with your own phase
of character, sanctified by God. You are not to take my phase of
character, nor my gestures, nor my tone of voice, nor my expressions,
nor my words.”—Manuscript 19b, 1890. [301]
193
Chapter 53—The Real Proof of Preaching
Evidence of a Godly Life—It is not enough to argue in defense

of the truth. The most telling evidence of its worth is seen in a
godly life; and without this the most conclusive statements will
be lacking in weight and prevailing power; for our strength lies in
being connected with God by His Holy Spirit, and transgression
severs us from this sacred nearness with the Source of our might and
wisdom.—The S.D.A. Bible Commentary 2:998.
Hypocritical Preaching—To preach what we do not practice,
is but to confirm sinners in their impenitence. The most earnest
exhortations to walk in the light will be unheeded, if the speaker
himself neglects to follow the light which Christ has given.—The
Review and Herald, June 20, 1882.
Solidity of Character—Those who labor for Christ should be
men and women of great discretion, so that those who do not under-
stand their doctrines may be led to respect them, and regard them
as persons void of fanaticisms, void of rashness and impetuosity.
[302] Their discourses and conduct and conversation should be of a nature
that will lead men to the conclusion that these ministers are men
of thought, of solidity of character, men who fear and love their
heavenly Father.—Evangelism, 170, 171.
Need of Personal Experience—A clear, faithful testimony must
be borne by every shepherd of the flock of God. The state of the
heart is to be our first earnest concern. “With the heart man believeth
unto righteousness; and with the mouth confession is made unto
salvation” [Romans 10:10]. But mere speech is nothing. Preaching
the Word, and then working contrary to the Word, makes that Word
of none effect. Lip knowledge, forms and ceremonies, are of little
value while Christ is not abiding in the soul.
We are to watch for souls as they that must give an account. We
must sanctify the Lord God in our hearts. Then we shall be men
and women of faith, prayer, and power. There is a great work to
be done. The heart must be faithfully sentineled, else pride and
194
Chapter 53—The Real Proof of Preaching 195
rebellion will bear rule within. Evils without will awaken evils
within, and the soul will wander in its own homemade fog, all the
time charging upon someone else the result of its own unchristian
course of action.—Manuscript 11, 1899.
Christ As the Great Center—Those who have not worked in
full consecration to God have lost much themselves, and have not
been able to communicate to the church correct principles of Chris-
tianity. Self has not been hid in Christ. Those who handle sacred
things are not growing in grace and in the knowledge of the deep [303]
truths of the Word of God, attaining to the full stature of men and
women in Christ Jesus. They fall short of the divine measure. Some
have preached in the desk, but have failed to reach the people, be-
cause they have not had the sanctifying power of Christ in their own
hearts. They have not come in personal contact with the people,
and they have not been benefited as they might have been. Not all
have presented Christ as the great Center to whom all must come,
realizing that He is the Author and Finisher of their redemption, their
all in all. The result of their labor makes it manifest that they have
not the deep personal experience they should have, but need deeper
piety and unselfish devotion to the work.—Manuscript 12, 1891.
Failure to Practice the Word—Actions speak louder than
words. The sermon that is preached in the pulpit is counteracted
by the sermon that is preached in the lives of those who claim to
be advocates of truth. It is because of a lack of the practicing of
the words of Christ that a curse is coming upon our churches. If
Christ is not living in His human agent, then when circumstances
are favorable to their development the attributes of Satan will appear.
A noble life is the most powerful sermon in favor of Christianity.
If we would live such a life, our consciences must be quickened by
continual contact with the Word of God. Our souls must be familiar
with the heavenly standard, and we must avoid every course that
diverges from the right.—Lt 71, 1895. [304]
Constant Growth in Grace—Unless there is constant growth
in grace, we shall be wanting in words suitable for the occasion.
The reason so many of our ministers preach tame, lifeless discourses
is that they allow a variety of things of a worldly nature to take
their time and attention. Commune with your own heart and then
commune with God. Unless you do this, your efforts will be fruitless,
made Christless by the unsanctified hurry and confusion of worldly

things.—Manuscript 101, 1902.
Preaching and Practicing—At this period of time every minis-
ter of Christ is to heed the charge Paul gave to Timothy, “Take heed
unto thyself,” to your character, your words, your conduct, “and
unto the doctrine” [1 Timothy 4:16]. The minister must practice the
doctrine he preaches, else he needs that someone should teach him
the first principles of pure doctrine....
The Lord has given me a message for you. Ministers of the
gospel must keep self in continual subjection to Christ. But in your
present state of mind you are not subject to the will or control of
God. Self, poor, sick self, is revealed on every hand. When self
dies, the peace of Christ will take possession of the soul. As long
as you are a minister of the gospel, you are under the most solemn
obligation to God to be wise, not in your own conceit, but wise in
the wisdom of God.
Every day hereditary tendencies to wrong will strive for the
mastery. Every day you are to war against your objectionable traits
[305] of character, until there are left in you none of those things which
need to be separated from you. Then you will think candidly and
wisely how to take yourself to the Lord. You will foresee the evils
which will come, unless you change by avoiding the cause which
produces the effect.
You need now to understand as never before the softening, sub-
duing power of true, Christlike character. You need to understand
the warfare in which we are engaged. The power of holy living is
far ahead of all doctrinal discourses....
We need now as never before to pray with heart and voice for the
Spirit of Christ to use us in His service through the sanctification of
the Spirit. We need to pray that we may by uniting with our fellow
workers build up God’s kingdom. We are never to be satisfied with
self, but are ever to press upward, seeking to attain higher fervency
and greater zeal. Our heart’s greatest desire should be to be found
among the meek and lowly people of God. Then we can find souls
and win souls.
Those who minister in word and doctrine must first be partakers
of the fruits of the Spirit. Bear this in mind. Bridle your disposition,
and then peace and contentment will find room in your soul. If you
Chapter 53—The Real Proof of Preaching 197
wish your heart to overflow with the love of God, cultivate grateful
thanksgiving for the unspeakable privilege of knowing the truth.
If you would lose sight of self by beholding Christ, you would be
changed from glory to glory, from character to character, and would
rejoice in His redeeming love.
We have no time for fretting over ourselves, no time to look on [306]
the dark side. There are souls to be saved. We must live in Christ
and Christ must live in us, else we shall preach and labor in vain.
Those who are brethren in the faith must stand together in oneness,
striving to answer Christ’s prayer to His Father. Let us stop fretting.
Let us put away all jealousy, all evil surmising. Let us put on Christ
and walk in the light of the Sun of Righteousness. Preach the Word.
Practice the Word. Then souls will be converted.
At present your spiritual condition is a stumbling block to your
best efforts. We have the most sublime truths ever given to men.
How are we handling them? In Christ, dead to self, open your mouth,
and God will fill it. Christ will impress the minds of your hearers.
Cooperation with God means His cooperation with us. Coop-
eration with our brethren gives standing room for every one who
does the work. Cooperation is now greatly needed. Seek not for the
highest place. If you do, you will be given the lowest place. Have
courage in the Lord. But do not think that you are the only agent
through whom He will work. For Christ’s sake do your best, without
speaking one ungrateful word to God or to your brethren. Then the
Lord will bless you. We have not a moment to waste in regrets or
recrimination.
Take not your troubles to man, who may have no greater wisdom
than you yourself. Take your troubles to Him who hears and answers
prayer. Labor, labor with this poor soul and that poor soul. Keep your
head out of books and your hand from writing. Seek the salvation of [307]
those who are ready to perish. How earnestly should we be engaged
in laboring for souls as they that must give an account.—Lt 119,
1900.
Impact of Jesus’ Love on the Speaker’s Heart—There have
been entire discourses, dry and Christless, in which Jesus has
scarcely been named. The speaker’s heart is not subdued and melted
by the love of Jesus. He dwells upon dry theories. No great im-
pression is made. The speaker has not the divine unction, and how
can he move the hearts of the people? We need to repent and be

converted—yes, the preacher converted. The people must have Je-
sus lifted up before them, and they must be entreated to “Look and
live.”—Selected Messages 3:184.
Character As the Exemplar of Teacher’s Words—A digni-
fied authority is required in the teacher, else he lacks that ability
which will make him a successful teacher. The children are quick
to discern any weakness or defect of character in the teacher. The
deportment is making its impression. The words which you utter
will not give them the right mold unless they see in your character
the model.—Counsels on Sabbath School Work, 98.
Teacher’s Deportment, Student’s Reverence for God—The
one who shall accept the responsibility of teacher, if not fully quali-
fied, if he senses the responsibility of his position, will do his utmost
to learn. He will cultivate reverence, cheerfulness, and firmness. Let
[308] the deportment be of that character that your class will be educated
to have solemn thoughts and reverence toward God. While the ideas
may be presented in simplicity, the language, when speaking of
God, of Christ, His sufferings, His resurrection, as realities to you,
should carry the minds up high above earthly things, and make them
feel that they are in the presence of the Infinite One.—Counsels on
[309] Sabbath School Work, 97.
[310]
[311]
Section 6—Content of Our Discourses
Chapter 54—Christ the Sum and Substance
Glory of the Incarnate God—If Jesus were made the sum and
substance of every discourse, sinners would be convicted. By the
message borne they would know what they must do to be saved.
Lift Him up, the Man of Calvary, higher and still higher. Who can
declare the glory of the incarnate God? What language can describe
it? It is not the men learned in this world’s wisdom who have true
eloquence.—Manuscript 176, 1899.
Foundation of the Gospel—Theoretical discourses are essen-
tial, that people may see the chain of truth, link after link, uniting
in a perfect whole; but no discourse should ever be preached with-
out presenting Christ and Him crucified as the foundation of the
gospel.—Gospel Workers, 158.
True Example for Ministers—Will not our ministers wrestle
in earnest prayer that they may have a holy unction, that they may
not bring unimportant, unessential things into their labor at this
important time? Let them not bring into their ministerial labors that
[312] which can be heard in any of the denominational churches. Let
them ever keep before their hearers an uplifted Saviour, in order
to prevent their converts from attaching themselves to the man, to
bear his mold and copy his ways in their manner of conversation and
conduct. The Lord has a variety of workers, who must impress the
people in various lines. One man’s ways are not to be considered
perfect and to be adopted exclusively in any congregation. Christ is
our Example.—Manuscript 21a, 1894.
Simple Lessons of Christ—In the name of Jesus Christ, I would
appeal to the church who has been made the depository of deep and
precious truths. God has given treasures to the church not to be
hoarded, not to be buried in the earth, but to be imparted to others,
that others may be enriched as well as ourselves. How shall we
work? Let both laymen and ministers follow the example of Christ.
Let them meet the people where they are. I would entreat you to
labor in word and doctrine; do not get above the simplicity of the
200
Chapter 54—Christ the Sum and Substance 201
work. Do not soar away above the minds of the common people
so that they cannot follow you, and if they did follow you, would
neither be benefited nor blessed. Teach the simple lessons of Christ.
Tell the touching story of His life of self-denial and sacrifice. Tell of
His humiliation and death. Tell of His resurrection and ascension,
of His intercession for them in the courts of God. Tell them that
“God so loved the world, that He gave His only begotten Son, that
whosoever believeth in Him should not perish, but have everlasting [313]
life” [John 3:16].—Manuscript 38, 1894.
Spiritual Nourishment—Of all professed Christians, Seventh-
day Adventists should be foremost in uplifting Christ before the
world. Our ministers should ever be able to direct men and women
to Christ, to the One who Himself declared, “I am the Bread of life.”
Let those who minister to the spiritual necessities of the people, read
to them the words of Christ: “I am the living Bread which came
down from heaven: if any man eat of this Bread, he shall live forever:
and the Bread that I will give is My flesh, which I will give for the
life of the world.” ...
Often there are delivered to the people discourses destitute of
the Bread of life, the food essential for spiritual growth. Those who
have been appropriating for themselves the Bread of life, will be
able to break it to others....
I have felt very sad as I have seen ministers walking and work-
ing in the light of the sparks of their own kindling; ministers who
were not obtaining spiritual nourishment from Christ, the Bread of
life. Their own souls were as destitute of the heavenly manna as
the hills of Gilboa were destitute of dew and rain. In their hearts
Christ was not an abiding Presence. How could they speak in-
telligently of Him whom they had never known by experimental
knowledge?—Manuscript 21, 1891.
Practical Lessons Along With the Prophecies—A few [314]
forcible remarks upon some point of doctrine will fasten in the
mind much more firmly, than to bring in a mass of matter where
nothing lays out clear and distinct in the mind of those ignorant of
our faith. There should be interspersed with the prophecies, prac-
tical lessons of the teachings of Christ. There should ever be the
softening, subduing influence of the Spirit of God upon our own
heart. The self-denial and the sufferings of Christ should be brought
into our labors, and the great love wherewith He has loved us appear
in all our efforts.—Lt 48, 1886.
Christ in the Heart—Discourses that have little of Christ and
His righteousness in them are given in the desk. They are Christless
sermons. To preach in the demonstration of the Spirit is completely
beyond the power of those who are without Christ. They are feeble,
empty, and without nourishment. They have no Christ to carry
with them in private life. They are full of boasting, of pride, of
self-esteem, speaking evil of things of which they have no real
knowledge. They manifest an impatience of everything that does
not follow in their line. They will even scoff and mock at sacred
things, because they do not see that spiritual things are spiritually
discerned. They degrade themselves by perverting and falsifying
truth.—Manuscript 15, 1886.
The Spirit’s Power—Merely to speak to beautiful things that
[315] please the ear and attract attention should not be our purpose. We
are to present Christ and Him crucified, that souls who are dead
in trespasses and sins may be alarmed and quickened. Those who
seek to teach others need to be converted to Christ; they need to
plead with God that He will imbue them with His Holy Spirit before
they can lift up Christ as the sinner’s only hope. Flowery speeches,
pleasing tales, anecdotes, and stories do not convict the sinner. Men
listen to such words as they would listen to a pleasant song, and
the laborers gather but few sheaves into the garner. The message
the sinner should hear is, “God so loved the world, that He gave
His only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in Him should
not perish, but have everlasting life” [John 3:16]. And the truth
will subdue and tender the soul of the teacher because he feels its
practical utility.—Manuscript 12, 1891.
Life-Healing Balm From the Cross—The cross, the cross of
Calvary presented again and again, plainly dwelt upon in every
discourse, will prove the life-healing balm, will reveal the beauty
and excellence of virtue. Those who quibble over the authenticity
of the Scriptures and question the authority of revelation will not be
influenced.—Manuscript 20, 1893.
Jesus in the Discourse—“And this is life eternal, that they might
know Thee the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom Thou hast
sent” [John 17:3]. The eternal Word became flesh and dwelt among
Chapter 54—Christ the Sum and Substance 203
us. This theme will quench unbelief; and yet, sad to say, Jesus has [316]
been dropped out of many, many discourses that have been preached
by Seventh-day Adventist ministers. And why? Because these
ministers had not Jesus abiding in their hearts by faith; they were
not clothed with Christ’s righteousness.—Manuscript 16, 1890. [317]
Chapter 55—Promise of the Holy Spirit
Consequence of Silence on the Subject—Just prior to leaving

His disciples for the heavenly courts, Jesus encouraged them with
the promise of the Holy Spirit. This promise belongs to us as much
as to them, and yet how rarely is it presented to the people and its
reception spoken of in the church. In consequence of this silence
upon this most important theme, what promise do we know less
about by its practical fulfillment than this rich promise of the gift of
the Holy Spirit, whereby efficiency is to be given to all our spiritual
labor? The promise of the Holy Spirit is casually brought into the
discourses, is incidentally touched upon, and that is all. Prophecies
have been dwelt upon, doctrines have been expounded, but that
which is absolutely essential to the church in order that they may
grow in spiritual strength and efficiency, in order that the preaching
may carry conviction with it, and souls be converted to God, has
largely been left out of ministerial effort.—Manuscript 12, 1891.
Need of Presentation in Every Discourse—The Holy Spirit
is to be presented in every discourse. What wonderful statements
[318] Christ has made concerning His representative to the world. This is
the theme of encouragement to be kept before the people. In com-
prehending the office of the Holy Spirit, we shall bring all blessings
to ourselves. He will make us complete in Christ.—Manuscript 8,
1898.
Cause of Spiritual Drought—Ministers preaching present truth
will assent to the necessity of the influence of the Spirit of God in the
conviction of sin and the conversion of souls, and this influence must
attend the preaching of the Word, but they do not feel its importance
sufficiently to have a deep and practical knowledge of the same.
The scantiness of the grace and power of the divine influence of the
truth upon their own hearts prevents them from discerning spiritual
things and from presenting its positive necessity upon the church.
So they go crippling along, dwarfed in religious growth, because
they have in their ministry a legal religion. The power of the grace
204
Chapter 55—Promise of the Holy Spirit 205
of God is not felt to be a living, effectual necessity, an abiding

principle.—Manuscript 27, 1889. [319]
Chapter 56—Eternal Truth
Need of New Sermons—A familiarity with the truths of the

Scripture will give the teacher of truth qualifications that will make
him a representative of Christ. The spirit of the Saviour’s teaching
will give force and directness to his instruction and to his prayers.
His will not be a narrow, lifeless testimony; he will not preach over
and over the same set discourses; for his mind will be open to the
constant illumination of the Holy Spirit.—Gospel Workers, 252.
Converted Speakers—When men are really converted, con-
troversy and debate will be ended. The plain, searching truth will
be proclaimed by lips touched with a live coal from the altar of
God.—The Review and Herald, February 21, 1899.
Plain Presentation of Truth—Everywhere there are hearts cry-
ing out for the living God. Discourses unsatisfying to the hungry
soul have been given in the churches. In these discourses there is
not that divine manifestation which touches the mind and creates a
glow in the soul. The hearers cannot say: “Did not our heart burn
[320] within us, while He talked with us by the way, and while He opened
to us the Scriptures?” Luke 24:32. Much of the teaching given is
powerless to awaken the transgressor or convict souls of sin. The
people who come to hear the Word need a plain, straightforward
presentation of truth.—Testimonies for the Church 6:53.
Appeal to Men of High Position—Men in high positions of
trust in the world will be charmed by a plain, straightforward, Scrip-
tural statement of truth.—Evangelism, 557.
Voice Like a Trumpet—The true minister of the gospel will not
stand before the people to speak smooth words, to cry, Peace and
safety. He realizes the dangers that threaten the soul, and he presents
the truth as it is in Jesus. The truth comes from his lips clear, plain,
decided, as if he fully believed that the words spoken will be a savor
of life unto life or of death unto death. The words of the minister
who knows that he has the Spirit and power of God, will awaken
206
Chapter 56—Eternal Truth 207
the conscience of his hearers.—The Review and Herald, March 29,

1906.
Effect of Smooth Sermons—God’s ministers must lift up the
voice like a trumpet, and show the people their transgressions. The
smooth sermons so often preached make no lasting impression. Men
are not cut to the heart, because the plain, sharp truths of the Word
of God are not spoken to them.—Gospel Workers, 149
Good News of Salvation—The highest employment of the pow- [321]
ers of speech is that of imparting divine truth. Wherever the audience
may be, whoever may compose that audience, Christ’s witness is
to speak the plain, unvarnished truth. He is to minister grace to his
hearers. His words will be in harmony with the teaching of Christ.
The soul who is truly converted will have his lips touched with the
sacred fire of cleansing. To every individual he meets he will find
an opportunity of speaking the good news of salvation. He believes;
therefore he utters the sentiments of his heart. He stands as the
oracle of God, speaking to men the words of life and salvation.—Lt
222, 1907.
Fresh Manna—You have been too anxious to present lines of
thought that would bring glory to yourself. You have thought it was
necessary to dwell upon subjects which do not enlighten minds in
regard to vital truth, or make clearer the way to present salvation. For
Christ’s sake keep to the point. In every discourse break the bread of
life, present fresh manna, lay upon souls the solemn responsibilities
that God has placed upon them, and keep in view eternal realities.
Call the attention of the people to vital questions, and keep them
to the point of decision, asking them, “What are you going to do?”
Cooperate with heavenly intelligences. When you allow your mind
to be diverted from plain lines of truth and to be engrossed with
subjects that please your fancy, you are simply losing time. The Holy
Spirit does not work with you, and thus you make a mistake.—Lt
29, 1895. [322]
Self to the Background—In the first chapter of Corinthians,
Paul has given us instruction which every true laborer needs to study,
especially the following verses: “But we preach Christ crucified,
unto the Jews a stumbling block, and unto the Greeks foolishness;
but unto them which are called, both Jews and Greeks, Christ the
power of God, and the wisdom of God. Because the foolishness
of God is wiser than men; and the weakness of God is stronger

than men” [1 Corinthians 1:23-25]. Here is a lesson of special
consequence to every worker in the vineyard of the Lord. It will
not result in solid work for men to preach to please the ears of the
people, while the truth is not held forth in a manner to bring them
to the cross of Jesus Christ. The messenger of God must present
eternal truths plainly, and keep in distinct view before the people
their peril in neglecting eternal interests. While self is kept out of
sight Jesus Christ must be ever lifted up and exalted.
“For ye see your calling, brethren, how that not many wise men
after the flesh, not many mighty, not many noble, are called: but God
hath chosen the foolish things of the world to confound the wise;
and God hath chosen the weak things of the world to confound the
things which are mighty; and base things of the world, and things
which are despised, hath God chosen, yea, and things which are
not, to bring to nought things that are: that no flesh should glory
in His presence. But of Him are ye in Christ Jesus, who of God is
made unto us wisdom, and righteousness, and sanctification, and
[323] redemption: that, according as it is written, He that glorieth, let him
glory in the Lord.” 1 Corinthians 1:26-31.
“And I, brethren, when I came to you, came not with excellency
of speech or of wisdom, declaring unto you the testimony of God.
For I determined not to know any thing among you, save Jesus
Christ, and Him crucified. And I was with you in weakness, and in
fear, and in much trembling” [1 Corinthians 2:1-3].
The apostle feared lest his work should stand in the wisdom of
men and not in the power of God, and thus his labor prove to be
a work which would not produce a harvest....Especial heed should
be given to the words of the apostle: “Of these things put them in
remembrance, charging them before the Lord that they strive not
about words to no profit, but to the subverting of the hearers” [2
Timothy 2:14].
The minister of the gospel is never exhorted to strive to be a
smart preacher, a popular speaker; but is commanded to “study to
show thyself approved unto God, a workman that needeth not to be
ashamed, rightly dividing the word of truth. But shun profane and
vain babblings: for they will increase unto more ungodliness.” (2
Chapter 56—Eternal Truth 209
Timothy 2:15, 16). Will every messenger of God give heed to these
words?—Manuscript 29, 1893.
New Light, New Ideas—Some of our ministers have a runway
of discourses which they use without variation year after year. The
same illustrations, the same figures, and almost the same words.
They have ceased to be students. There is an end to improvement,
and they stagger under the load of a few set discourses to prevent
mental decrepitude. But by the ever-learning student new light, new [324]
ideas, new gems of truth will be found and eagerly grasped.... The
gospel is not properly taught and represented before unbelievers by
men who have ceased to be students, who have, as it were, graduated
as far as searching the Scriptures is concerned, and they bring a
reproach upon the truth by the manner in which they handle it. If men
obtain the ears of the people, the very best quality of preaching is
needed, because pleasing fables are presented by eloquent lips.—Lt
33, 1886.
Scriptural Study vs. Suppositions and Fables—Preach the
Word. You may have inventive minds. You may be expert, as
were the Jewish teachers, in getting up new theories; but Christ said
of them, “In vain they do worship Me, teaching for doctrines, the
commandments of men” [Matthew 15:9]. They presented traditions,
suppositions, and fables of all kinds to the people. The forms and
ceremonies they enjoined made it simply impossible for the people
to know whether they were keeping the Word of God or following
the imaginations of men.
Satan is well pleased when he can thus confuse the mind. Let
not ministers preach their own suppositions. Let them search the
Scriptures earnestly, with a solemn realization that if they teach for
doctrine the things that are not contained in God’s Word, they will
be as those represented in the last chapter of Revelation.—Lt 207,
1899. [325]
Chapter 57—Testing Truths
Truth for This Time—We are to dwell in our doctrinal dis-

courses upon the truth as it is in Jesus. Present the truth for this time
as an important message, from another world. Lift Him up, the Man
of Calvary. Come in consecration to holier ground, and still holier.
Preach the truth with the power of God sent down from heaven. Let
the truth take hold of the spiritual part of our own nature, and then
the current of divine power will be communicated to those whom we
address. Bear in mind you must have increased faith. Our faith is too
small. What can give us the aid the crisis demands is the intelligent
knowledge of the truth as it is in Jesus. We want His nature—all
our faculties and powers strengthened and vitalized by the Spirit of
Christ.—Lt 230, 1899.
The Third Angel’s Message—The present truth, the special
message given to our world, even the third angel’s message, com-
prehends a vast field, containing heavenly treasures. No one can be
excusable who says, “I will no longer have anything to do with these
[326] special messages; I will preach Christ.” No one can preach Christ,
and present the truth as it is in Jesus, unless he presents the truths
that are to come before the people at the present time, when such
important developments are taking place.—Manuscript 33, 1897.
Common Truths First—Jesus spoke before the Pharisees and
Sadducees in parables, hiding the clearness of truth under symbols
and figures because they would make a wrong use of the truths He
presented before them; but to His disciples He spoke plainly. We
should learn from Christ’s method of teaching and be careful not to
cut off the ears of the people by presenting truths which, not being
fully explained, they are in no way prepared to receive.
The truths that we hold in common should be dwelt upon first
and the confidence of the hearers obtained; then, as the people can
be brought along, we can advance slowly with the matter presented.
Great wisdom is needed to present unpopular truth before a preju-
diced people in the most cautious manner, that access may be gained
210
Chapter 57—Testing Truths 211
to their hearts. Discussions place before the people who are unen-
lightened in regard to our position and who are ignorant of Bible
truth, a set of arguments skillfully gotten up and carefully arranged
to cover over the clear points of truth. Some men have made it their
business to cover up plain statements of facts in the Word of God
by their deceptive theories, which they make plausible to those who
have not investigated for themselves.—Testimonies for the Church
3:426. [327]
Sound Arguments—It is important that in defending the doc-
trines which we consider fundamental articles of faith we should
never allow ourselves to employ arguments that are not wholly sound.
These may avail to silence an opposer, but they do not honor the
truth. We should present sound arguments that will not only silence
our opponents but will bear the closest and most searching scrutiny.
With those who have educated themselves as debaters there is great
danger that they will not handle the Word of God with fairness. In
meeting an opponent it should be our earnest effort to present sub-
jects in such a manner as to awaken conviction in his mind, instead
of seeking merely to give confidence to the believer.—Testimonies
Demonstration of the Spirit—Our work for this time is not to
be done by enticing words of man’s wisdom, such as were used by
heathen orators to gain applause. Speak in the demonstration of the
Spirit, and with the power which God alone can impart. The testing
truths for this time are to be proclaimed by men whose lips have been
touched with a live coal from off God’s altar. Such preaching will
be a decided contrast to the preaching usually heard.—The S.D.A.
Bread to the Starving—Many souls are hungering for the Bread
of life. Their cry is, “Give me bread; do not give me a stone. It
is bread that I want.” Feed these perishing, starving souls. Let our
ministers bear in mind that the strongest meat is not to be given to [328]
babes who know not the first principles of the truth as we believe it.
In every age the Lord has had a special message for the people of
that time; so we have a message for the people in this age. But while
we have many things to say, we may be compelled to withhold some
of them for a time, because the people are not prepared to receive
them now.
When a discourse is given, the people may listen with interest,

but it is all strange and new to them, and Satan is ready to suggest to
their minds many things that are not true. He will seek to pervert and
misrepresent the speaker’s words. What shall we do? The discourses
presenting the reasons of our faith should be published in little
leaflets, and circulated as widely as possible. Thus the falsehoods
and misrepresentations which the enemy of truth constantly tries to
keep in circulation would be revealed in their true character. The
people have an opportunity of knowing just what the minister said.
Those who introduce the leaven of truth amid the mass of false
theories and doctrines may expect opposition. Satan’s batteries will
be opened upon those who advocate the truth, and the standard-
bearers must expect to meet many sneers and much reviling that is
hard to bear.
The message of warning is to be given in all the highways and
byways. The cities are to be worked, not merely preached to; there
must be house-to-house labor.—Manuscript 33, 1894
Moral Beauty of Testing Truth—As you are to begin work
[329] in a new mission, be careful that your defects are not exalted as
virtues, and thus retard the work of God. It is testing truths that we
are bringing before the people, and in every movement these truths
should be elevated to stand in moral beauty before those for whom
we labor. Do not throw about the truth the peculiarities of your own
character, or your own manner of labor.—Lt 12, 1887.
The Three Angels’ Messages—It is our privilege to expect
large things, even the demonstration of the Spirit of God. This
is a power which will convict and convert the soul. Our message is
a life-and-death message, and we must let this message appear as it
is—the great power of God. Then the Lord will make it effectual.
We are to present it in all its telling force. The first and second
angels’ messages are bound up with the third angel’s message. The
power of the proclamation of the first and second angels’ messages
is to be concentrated in the third.—Lt 209, 1899.
The Testing Message—Let every discourse that does not en-
lighten the soul, that does not answer the question, What must I do to
be saved? be cut off from your program. Preach the testing message
of the third angel. It is essential that our ministers preach the truth
that has a direct bearing on the message for this time, and that they
present the subjects in the most simple language. What must I do

to be saved, and the righteousness of Christ, are themes that are of
vital importance to the people.—Lt 29, 1895. [330]
Importance of the Sabbath Truth—The Sabbath of the fourth
commandment is the test for this time, and therefore all connected
with this great memorial is to be kept before the people.—Lt 207,
1899.
Test for This Time—I write this letter to say a few things to my
ministering brethren. When you have a congregation before you
for only two weeks, do not defer the presentation of the Sabbath
question, the real genuine matter, until everything else is presented,
supposing that you are paving the way for it. Thus a mistake was
made at Ballarat and at Maitland. The Sabbath was touched upon,
but was not made the great question, the test for this time.
Lift up the standard, the commandments of God and the faith
of Jesus. Make this everything, and then by your strong arguments
wall it in, and make it of still greater force.—Lt 209, 1899.
Cause of the Shaking—I asked the meaning of the shaking I
had seen and was shown that it would be caused by the straight
testimony called forth by the counsel of the True Witness to the
Laodiceans. This will have its effect upon the heart of the receiver,
and will lead him to exalt the standard and pour forth the straight
truth. Some will not bear this straight testimony. They will rise
up against it, and this is what will cause a shaking among God’s
people.—Early Writings, 270.
John’s Revelation—To John were opened scenes of deep and
thrilling interest in the experience of the church. He saw the position, [331]
dangers, conflicts, and final deliverance of the people of God. He
records the closing messages which are to ripen the harvest of the
earth, either as sheaves for the heavenly garner or as fagots for the
fires of destruction. Subjects of vast importance were revealed to
him, especially for the last church, that those who should turn from
error to truth might be instructed concerning the perils and conflicts
before them. None need be in darkness in regard to what is coming
upon the earth.—The Great Controversy, 341, 342.
The Testimony of Christ—To John the Lord opened the sub-
jects that He saw would be needed by His people in the last days.
The instruction that He gave is found in the book of Revelation.
Those who would be co-workers with our Lord and Saviour Jesus
Christ will show a deep interest in the truths found in this book. With
pen and voice they will strive to make plain the wonderful things
that Christ came from heaven to reveal....
The solemn messages that have been given in their order in the
Revelation are to occupy the first place in the minds of God’s people.
Nothing else is to be allowed to engross our attention.
Precious time is rapidly passing, and there is danger that many
will be robbed of the time which should be given to the proclamation
of the messages that God has sent to a fallen world. Satan is pleased
to see the diversion of minds that should be engaged in a study of
[332] the truths which have to do with eternal realities.
The testimony of Christ, a testimony of the most solemn char-
acter, is to be borne to the world. All through the book of Rev-
elation there are the most precious, elevating promises, and there
are also warnings of the most fearfully solemn import. Will not
those who profess to have a knowledge of the truth read the testi-
mony given to John by Christ? Here is no guesswork, no scientific
deception. Here are the truths that concern our present and future
welfare.—Testimonies for the Church 8:301, 302.
Daniel and the Revelation—Those who accept positions as
educators should prize more and more the revealed will of God
so plainly and strikingly presented in Daniel and the Revela-
tion.—Testimonies for the Church 6:131.
Purpose of the Book of Revelation—In the book of Revelation
we read of a special work that God desires to have His people do
in these last days. He has revealed His law and shown us the truth
for this time. This truth is constantly unfolding, and God designs
that we shall be intelligent in regard to it, that we may be able to
distinguish between right and wrong, between righteousness and
unrighteousness.
The third angel’s message, the great testing truth for this time, is
to be taught in all our institutions. God designs that through them
this special warning shall be given, and bright beams of light shall
shine to the world. Time is short. The perils of the last days are upon
us, and we should watch and pray, and study and heed the lessons
[333] that are given us in the books of Daniel and the Revelation.
When John was banished from those he loved to lonely Patmos,

Christ knew where to find His faithful witness. John said: “I John,
who also am your brother, and companion in tribulation, and in the
kingdom and patience of Jesus Christ, was in the isle that is called
Patmos, for the word of God, and for the testimony of Jesus Christ.
I was in the Spirit on the Lord’s day, and heard behind me a great
voice, as of a trumpet.”
The Lord’s day is the seventh day, the Sabbath of creation. On
the day that God sanctified and blessed, Christ signified “by His
angel unto His servant John” things which must come to pass before
the close of the world’s history, and He means that we should become
intelligent with regard to them. It is not in vain that He declares:
“Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this
prophecy, and keep those things which are written therein: for the
time is at hand.” Revelation 1:9, 10, 1-3. This is the education
that is to be patiently given. Let our lessons be appropriate for the
day in which we live, and let our religious instruction be given in
accordance with the messages God sends.
We shall have to stand before magistrates to answer for our
allegiance to the law of God, to make known the reasons of our faith.
And the youth should understand these things. They should know
the things that will come to pass before the closing up of the world’s
history. These things concern our eternal welfare, and teachers and
students should give more attention to them. By pen and voice, [334]
knowledge should be imparted which will be meat in due season, not
only to the young, but to those of mature years also.—Testimonies
for the Church 6:127-129.
Solemn Scenes of Prophecy—The perils of the last days are
upon us, and in our work we are to warn the people of the danger
they are in. Let not the solemn scenes which prophecy has revealed
be left untouched. If our people were half awake, if they realized
the nearness of the events portrayed in the Revelation, a reformation
would be wrought in our churches, and many more would believe
the message. We have no time to lose; God calls upon us to watch
for souls as they that must give an account.
Advance new principles, and crowd in the clear-cut truth. It will
be as a sword cutting both ways.
But be not too ready to take a controversial attitude. There will

be times when we must stand still and see the salvation of God. Let
Daniel speak, let the Revelation speak, and tell what is truth. But
whatever phase of the subject is presented, uplift Jesus as the center
of all hope, “the Root and the Offspring of David, and the bright and
morning Star.”—Testimonies to Ministers and Gospel Workers, 118.
Perils of the Last Days—Will our brethren bear in mind that
we are living amid the perils of the last days? Read Revelation
in connection with Daniel. Teach these things.—Testimonies to
[335] Ministers and Gospel Workers, 115.
Chapter 58—Soon Coming of Christ
The Preaching of the Gospel—God does not expect His work-

ers to attend to trifling matters. They are to preach the gospel. They
will find that short discourses are the most effective. In every place
in which the work is begun, the standard is to be raised higher and
still higher. The truth of Christ’s soon coming is to be proclaimed.
And all the workers, whether they speak from the pulpit or give Bible
readings, are to be taught to speak in a clear, expressive manner.—Lt
200, 1903.
Earnest Warnings—Living power must attend the message of
Christ’s second appearing. We must not rest until we see many souls
converted to the blessed hope of the Lord’s return. In the days of
the apostles the message that they bore wrought a real work, turning
souls from idols to serve the living God. The work to be done today
is just as real, and the truth is just as much truth; only we are to
give the message with as much more earnestness as the coming of
the Lord is nearer. The message for this time is positive, simple,
and of the deepest importance. We must act like men and women
who believe it. Waiting, watching, working, praying, warning the [336]
world—this is our work.—The Review and Herald, November 13,
1913.
Practical Christian Truth—The truths of prophecy are bound
up together, and as we study them, they form a beautiful cluster of
practical Christian truth. All the discourses that we give are plainly
to reveal that we are waiting, working, and praying for the coming
of the Son of God. His coming is our hope. This hope is to be
bound up with all our words and works, with all our associations
and relationships.—Evangelism, 220.
The Second Coming, a Constant Theme—The second com-
ing of the Son of man is to be the wonderful theme kept before the
people. Here is a subject that should not be left out of our discourses.
Eternal realities must be kept before the mind’s eye, and the attrac-
tions of the world will appear as they are, altogether profitless as
217
vanity. What are we to do with the world’s vanities, its praises, its
[337] riches, its honors, or its enjoyments?—Evangelism, 220.
Chapter 59—The Way of Salvation
Burden of Every Sermon—The science of salvation is to be

the burden of every sermon, the theme of every song. Let it be
poured forth in every supplication. Let nothing be brought into the
preaching of the Word to supplement Christ, the Word and power
of God. Let His name, the only name given under heaven whereby
we may be saved, be exalted in every discourse, and from Sabbath
to Sabbath let the trumpet of the watchmen give a certain sound.
Christ is the science and eloquence of the gospel, and His ministers
are to hold forth the Word of life, presenting hope to the penitent,
peace to the troubled and desponding, and grace and completeness
and strength to the believing.—Manuscript 107, 1898.
The Lamb of God—Never should a sermon be preached,
or Bible instruction in any line be given, without pointing the
hearers to “the Lamb of God, which taketh away the sin of the
world.”—Testimonies for the Church 6:54.
Salvation in Its Simplicity—In every congregation there are
souls who are unsatisfied. Every Sabbath they want to hear some-
thing definite explaining how they can be saved, how they are to be- [338]
come Christians. The important thing for them to know is, How can
a sinner be presented before God? Let the way of salvation be pre-
sented before them in simplicity, just as plainly as you would speak
to a little child. Lift up Jesus as the sinner’s only hope.—Evangelism,
350.
Application of Truth to the Heart—It is especially true that
new and startling themes should not be presented to the people at too
great length. In every address given, let there be an application of
truth to the heart that whosoever may hear shall understand, and that
men, women, and youth may become alive unto God.—Testimonies
to Ministers and Gospel Workers, 258.
Need of a Change of Heart—Sometimes men and women de-
cide in favor of the truth because of the weight of evidence presented,
without being converted. The minister’s work is not done until he
219
has urged upon his hearers the necessity of a change of heart. In

every discourse fervent appeals should be made to the people to
forsake their sins and turn to Christ.—Gospel Workers, 159.
Refuge in Christ—The minister who has learned of Christ will
ever be conscious that he is a messenger of God, commissioned by
Him to do a work both for time and eternity. It should not be any part
of his object to call attention to himself, his learning, or his ability.
But his whole aim should be to bring sinners to repentance, pointing
[339] them, both by precept and example, to the Lamb of God that taketh
away the sins of the world. Self should be hidden in Jesus. Such
men will speak as those conscious of possessing power and authority
from God, being a mouthpiece for Him. Their discourses will have
an earnestness and fervor of persuasion that will lead sinners to see
their lost condition, and take refuge in Christ.—Evangelism, 134.
Steps in Conversion—Ministers should present the truth in a
clear, simple manner. There are among their hearers many who need
a plain explanation of the steps requisite in conversion. The great
masses of the people are more ignorant on this point than is supposed.
Among graduates from college, eloquent orators, able statesmen,
men in high positions of trust, there are many who have given their
powers to other matters, and have neglected the things of greatest
importance. When such men form part of a congregation, the speaker
often strains every power to preach an intellectual discourse, and
fails to reveal Christ. He does not show that sin is the transgression
of the law. He does not make plain the plan of salvation. That
which would have touched the hearts of his hearers, would have
been to point them to Christ dying to bring redemption within their
reach.—Gospel Workers, 170.
Remission of Sins Through Christ—Direct applications must
be made. And ever the speaker must remember that he is only the
[340] instrument. It is the Holy Spirit that impresses the hearts of high
and low, the most dignified and the most hopelessly abandoned.
The Word must be spoken in simplicity. Men must be addressed
as sinners in peril of losing their souls. All distinctions must be
overlooked; for all need the same truth. All need a crucified and
risen Saviour, who died that they might be saved.
Present the Word of God as the way in which a holy faith and a
pure character may be attained. Offer a full and free salvation, not as
Chapter 59—The Way of Salvation 221
coming from yourselves, but from Christ. Show your hearers their
need of returning through repentance and faith to their loyalty; for all
are on a level; all are condemned alike by that great moral standard
of righteousness. Proclaim remission of sins through Christ, the
only Sin-bearer, the only Sin-pardoner. Proclaim the remission of
sins through repentance toward God and faith in Christ, and God
will ratify your testimony. With all assurance you can proclaim
the means by which a holy character may be obtained—as Enoch
obtained it, through Christ Jesus.
Every messenger of God can proclaim pardon and remission of
sins through the name of Christ, who died to redeem the sinner. The
Lord’s full favor comes to those who seek Him with the whole heart,
and are willing to follow Him in doing God’s will, enthroning Christ
in the heart, planting His attributes deep in the life practice. These
have a constraining motive, a supreme love for Christ our Saviour,
which brings even the thoughts into captivity to Him.—Manuscript
138, 1897.
Convicting and Converting Truths—In every congregation [341]
there are souls upon whom the Spirit of the Lord is moving, and
they need help in order that they may understand what they must
do to be saved. You have often presented grand scenes before them
which they could not comprehend. Those who are imaginative may
grasp these lofty thoughts, but to the larger number such discourses
are only as Greek [to them]. Dwell upon truths that convict and
convert souls. God is at work in the tent, though there be few or
many present.
From unfeigned lips you should breathe a prayer that God would
guide you to give to every man his portion of meat in due season, and
so aid you that you will not get above the simplicity of the gospel to
dwell upon favorite subjects which will not enlighten the darkened
conscience, or convince men of sin, of righteousness, and judgment
to come. In distinct lines, present to your hearers what they must do
to be saved; lead them into the paths of truth and holiness. As the
flock of the pasture, lead them where they may drink the water of
salvation.—Lt 29, 1895.
Unreserved Consecration—Some time ago I wrote in my diary
the following: “We seemed to be assembled in a meeting. One of
authority was present. He said: ‘Say to ministers and evangelists,
Carry the work forward with true spirituality. Make the application
that is made in the Word of God, that the result may not be merely a
sympathetic stirring of the feelings—a result that will fade away into
[342] nothingness when the impression is removed.’ I am commissioned
to say that all who see their need can be helped. Let every step
taken be a step of advancement toward genuine conversion, toward
unreserved consecration of heart, mind, soul, and strength to the
service of the Lord. Let all that is done tend to genuine reformation
in thought, in word, in deed, in character-building. Let the true
be discerned from the false. Do not allow the enemy to lead you
to weave wrong figures into the pattern. Keep the love of Christ
prominent before the children and youth. Repeat to them often His
simple lessons.”—Lt 111, 1904.
Obedience to Parents and to God—Teach the youth that sin
in any line is defined in the Scriptures as “transgression of the law.”
1 John 3:4.... Teach them in simple language that they must be
obedient to their parents and give their hearts to God.—Counsels to
Spiritual Malaria—Unruly, debasing tendencies and passions
cannot reign in the heart controlled by the Spirit of Christ. There
are many who have never submitted their will and way fully without
any reserve to Jesus Christ.
There need to be far more lessons in the ministry of the Word
of true conversion than of the arguments of the doctrines. For it
is far easier and more natural for the heart that is not under the
control of the Spirit of Christ to choose doctrinal subjects rather than
the practical. There are many Christless discourses given no more
[343] acceptable to God than was the offering of Cain. They are not in
harmony with God.
The Lord calls upon you, my brother, to step down from the
work, leave the walls of Zion, or be a converted man. When your
own heart is sanctified through the truth there will be in it no moral
defilement. It will now require a most desperate resistance upon
your part to unholy suggestions because your soul is tainted with
spiritual malaria. You have breathed a satanic atmosphere. You
have not been a man in the sight of God. When your mind should
have been growing, your ideas elevated, and your plans and labors
Chapter 59—The Way of Salvation 223
broadened, you have been growing less and less efficient as a worker
because God is not blessing your efforts.—Lt 5, 1886. [344]
Chapter 60—Practical Godliness
Way to the Heart—Ministers would reach more hearts if they

would dwell more upon practical godliness. Frequently, when efforts
are made to present the truth in new fields, the discourses given are
largely theoretical....
In every discourse fervent appeals should be made to the people
to forsake their sins and turn to Christ. The popular sins and indul-
gences of our day should be condemned, and practical godliness
enjoined. Feeling from the heart the importance of the words he
utters, the true minister is unable to repress his concern for the souls
of those for whom he labors.—Gospel Workers, 158, 159.
A Place in Every Discourse—The most convincing arguments
may be presented, and yet sinners seem as far from salvation as
ever. Ministers should not preach sermon after sermon on doctrinal
subjects alone. Practical godliness should find a place in every
discourse.—Evangelism, 178.
Purity, Holiness, and Usefulness—Purity, holiness, and use-
fulness should be the burden of every sermon, the burden of every
[345] prayer.—Lt 27, 1888.
Store of Practical Subjects—You should be careful and study
to have a store of practical subjects that you have investigated and
that you can enter into the spirit of and present in a plain, forcible
manner to the people at the right time and place as they may need.
You have not been thoroughly furnished from the Word of Inspiration
unto all good works. When the flock have needed spiritual food,
you have frequently presented some argumentative subject that was
no more appropriate for the occasion than an oration upon national
affairs.—Testimonies for the Church 3:228.
Practical Godliness a New Revelation—The members of the
various churches are very ignorant in regard to the Bible, and the
simplest lessons on practical godliness come to them as a new rev-
elation. They need to know what is truth. Do not take up lines of
224
Chapter 60—Practical Godliness 225
thought that will simply please the fancy or gratify curiosity. Break
the bread of life to the people.—Lt 29, 1895.
Christ’s Lifestyle—Although it is not congenial to the natural
inclinations, the minister must proclaim the straight truth which will
make the ears of them that hear tingle; for they must lay before those
who are lovers of pleasure more than lovers of God the dangers
and the perils that are around them, and the doom that awaits the
impenitent. Because this message is not agreeable to their inclination
or welcome to those who must be warned, they are solemnly charged
to be faithful in its declaration. The minister will meet wrongs that [346]
will seem to defy correction. They will be made aware of sins that
seem to be covered that will need to be exposed on the right hand
and on the left. The prophet says, “Cry aloud, spare not, lift up thy
voice like a trumpet, and show My people their transgression, and
the house of Jacob their sins. Yet they seek Me daily, and delight to
know My ways, as a nation that did righteousness, and forsook not
the ordinances of their God” [Isaiah 58:1, 2].
“I charge thee therefore before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ,
who shall judge the quick and the dead at His appearing and His king-
dom; Preach the word; be instant in season, out of season; reprove,
rebuke, exhort with all longsuffering and doctrine” [2 Timothy 4:1,
2].
The minister is not to indulge in the relation of anecdotes, but he
is to preach the Word. “Them that sin rebuke before all, that others
also may fear. I charge thee before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ,
and the elect angels, that thou observe these things without preferring
one before another, doing nothing by partiality” [1 Timothy 5:20,
21]. “Be thou an example of the believers, in word, in conversation,
in charity, in spirit, in faith, in purity” [1 Timothy 4:12]. “Study to
show thyself approved unto God, a workman that needeth not to be
ashamed, rightly dividing the word of truth” [2 Timothy 2:15].
We are to present Christ to the people, following the words of the
apostle, where he says, “Whom we preach, warning every man, and
teaching every man in all wisdom; that we may present every man
perfect in Christ Jesus: whereunto I also labor, striving according to [347]
His working, which worketh in me mightily” [Colossians 1:28, 29].
Was it essential for Paul to have this experience? Read carefully his
words, and see if it is safe for any of the ministers of Christ to shape
their life according to any lower standard of godliness.—Lt 3, 1892.
Plain, Sensible Discourses—No worker is to consider it his
duty to administer reproof, and point out existing evils, and stop with
this. Such work does not accomplish any good, but only disheartens
and discourages. Plain, sensible, intelligent discourses should be
preached to the churches that will show the need of seeking the
Lord in prayer, and of opening the heart to the Light of life, and that
will lead church members to engage in humble work for God. To
every man God has given a work; to each worker who engages in
service for Him, He gives a part to act in communicating light and
truth.—Manuscript 95, 190795, 1907.
Renewal of Grace—I am determined to keep before the people
the fact that we must have unity. We must cease all criticism. We
must urge that the great peculiarity distinguishing Christians from
all others, is the union that exists between them and the Lord Jesus
Christ, by constant exercise of the faith that works by love and
purifies the soul. This union, oneness with Christ, leads to unity
with and love toward one another. Christians delight to honor God
by obeying all His commandments. Bound together in love with
[348] Christ, they have love toward one another.
We must dwell upon this theme more than we have done. The
subject of His renewing grace, dwelt upon in discourses, will be
pleasing to the Lord, and His Holy Spirit will come into the hearts
[349] of those who listen.—Lt 42, 1906.
[350]
[351]
Section 7—Examples of Effective Speakers
Chapter 61—Men and Women of the Bible
Enoch
Conversation on Heavenly Things—Enoch’s case is before us.
Hundreds of years he walked with God. He lived in a corrupt age,
when moral pollution was teeming all around him; yet he trained
his mind to devotion, to love purity. His conversation was upon
heavenly things. He educated his mind to run in this channel, and
he bore the impress of the divine. His countenance was lighted up
with the light which shineth in the face of Jesus.—Testimonies for
the Church 2:122.
Preacher of Righteousness—As the scenes of the future were
opened to his view, Enoch became a preacher of righteousness,
bearing God’s message to all who would hear the words of warning.
In the land where Cain had sought to flee from the divine presence,
the prophet of God made known the wonderful scenes that had
passed before his vision. “Behold,” he declared, “the Lord cometh
with ten thousands of His saints, to execute judgment upon all, and
to convince all that are ungodly among them of all their ungodly
[352] deeds.”
The power of God that wrought with His servant was felt by
those who heard. Some gave heed to the warning and renounced
their sins; but the multitudes mocked at the solemn message. The
servants of God are to bear a similar message to the world in the last
days, and it also will be received by the majority with unbelief and
mockery.
As year after year passed, deeper and deeper grew the tide of hu-
man guilt, darker and darker gathered the clouds of divine judgment.
Yet Enoch, the witness of faith, held on his way, warning, pleading,
and teaching, striving to turn back the tide of guilt and to stay the
bolts of vengeance.—Gospel Workers, 52, 53.
Reprover of Sin—He was a fearless reprover of sin. While he
preached the love of God in Christ to the people of his time, and
228
Chapter 61—Men and Women of the Bible 229
pleaded with them to forsake their evil ways, he rebuked the prevail-
ing iniquity, and warned the men of his generation that judgment
would surely be visited upon the transgressor. It was the Spirit of
Christ that spoke through Enoch; that Spirit is manifested, not alone
in utterances of love, compassion, and entreaty; it is not smooth
things only that are spoken by holy men. God puts into the heart and
lips of His messengers truths to utter that are keen and cutting as a
two-edged sword.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 86.
Fruitage of His Message—After proclaiming his message, he
always took back with him to his place of retirement some who had
received the warning. Some of these became overcomers, and died
before the Flood came. But some had lived so long in the corrupting [353]
influence of sin that they could not endure righteousness.—The
Jochebed
Teacher of Moses—Jochebed was a woman and a slave. Her
lot in life was humble, her burden heavy. But through no other
woman, save Mary of Nazareth, has the world received greater
blessing. Knowing that her child must soon pass beyond her care, to
the guardianship of those who knew not God, she the more earnestly
endeavored to link his soul with heaven. She sought to implant
in his heart love and loyalty to God. And faithfully was the work
accomplished. Those principles of truth that were the burden of his
mother’s teaching and the lesson of her life, no after influence could
induce Moses to renounce.—Education, 61.
Educator for God—God had heard the mother’s prayers; her
faith had been rewarded. It was with deep gratitude that she entered
upon her now safe and happy task. She faithfully improved her
opportunity to educate her child for God. She felt confident that
he had been preserved for some great work, and she knew that he
must soon be given up to his royal mother, to be surrounded with
influences that would tend to lead him away from God. All this
rendered her more diligent and careful in his instruction than in that
of her other children. She endeavored to imbue his mind with the
fear of God and the love of truth and justice, and earnestly prayed [354]
that he might be preserved from every corrupting influence. She
showed him the folly and sin of idolatry, and early taught him to
bow down and pray to the living God, who alone could hear him
and help him in every emergency.
She kept the boy as long as she could, but was obliged to give
him up when he was about twelve years old. From his humble
cabin home he was taken to the royal palace, to the daughter of
Pharaoh, “and he became her son.” Yet even here he did not lose
the impressions received in childhood. The lessons learned at his
mother’s side could not be forgotten. They were a shield from the
pride, the infidelity, and the vice that flourished amid the splendor
of the court.
How far-reaching in its results was the influence of that one
Hebrew woman, and she an exile and a slave! The whole future
life of Moses, the great mission which he fulfilled as the leader
of Israel, testifies to the importance of the work of the Christian
mother.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 243, 244.
Faithful Women As Mothers—Especially does responsibility
rest upon the mother. She, by whose lifeblood the child is nourished
and its physical frame built up, imparts to it also mental and spiritual
influences that tend to the shaping of mind and character. It was
Jochebed, the Hebrew mother, who, strong in faith, was “not afraid
of the king’s commandment” (Hebrews 11:23), of whom was born
[355] Moses, the deliverer of Israel. It was Hannah, the woman of prayer
and self-sacrifice and heavenly inspiration, who gave birth to Samuel,
the heaven-instructed child, the incorruptible judge, the founder of
Israel’s sacred schools. It was Elisabeth, the kinswoman and kindred
spirit of Mary of Nazareth, who was the mother of the Saviour’s
herald.—The Ministry of Healing, 372.
Moses
Words of Eloquence—The life of Moses was marked with
supreme love to God. His piety, humility, and forbearance gave
him influence with the host of Israel. His zeal and faith in God
were greater than those of any other man upon the earth. He had
often addressed his people in words of stirring eloquence. No one
knew better than he how to move the affections of the people. He
conducted all matters connected with the religious interests of the

people with great wisdom.—Spiritual Gifts 3:57.
King Saul
Fluency and Wisdom—As Saul approached them [a band of
prophets], the Spirit of the Lord came upon him also, and he joined
in their song of praise, and prophesied with them. He spoke with
so great fluency and wisdom, and joined so earnestly in the service,
that those who had known him exclaimed in astonishment, “What
is this that is come unto the son of Kish? Is Saul also among the
prophets?”—Patriarchs and Prophets, 610. [356]
Abigail
Kindness and Peace—The piety of Abigail, like the fragrance
of a flower, breathed out all unconsciously in face and word and
action. The Spirit of the Son of God was abiding in her soul. Her
speech, seasoned with grace, and full of kindness and peace, shed a
heavenly influence. Better impulses came to David, and he trembled
as he thought what might have been the consequences of his rash
purpose. “Blessed are the peacemakers: for they shall be called the
children of God.” Matthew 5:9. Would that there were many more
like this woman of Israel, who would soothe the irritated feelings,
prevent rash impulses, and quell great evils by words of calm and
well-directed wisdom.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 667.
Elijah
Clear, Trumpetlike Tones—Looking first upon the broken-
down altar of Jehovah, and then upon the multitude, Elijah cries
out in clear, trumpetlike tones, “How long halt ye between two
opinions?”—Prophets and Kings, 147.
Children of Israel
Responsibility of Parents—God commanded the Hebrews to
teach their children His requirements, and to make them acquainted
with all His dealings with their people. The home and the school
[357] were one. In the place of stranger lips, the loving hearts of the father
and mother were to give instruction to their children. Thoughts of
God were associated with all the events of daily life in the home
dwelling. The mighty works of God in the deliverance of His people
were recounted with eloquence and reverential awe. The great truths
of God’s providence and of the future life were impressed on the
young mind. It became acquainted with the true, the good, the
beautiful.
By the use of figures and symbols the lessons given were il-
lustrated, and thus more firmly fixed in the memory. Through this
animated imagery the child was, almost from infancy, initiated into
the mysteries, the wisdom, and the hopes of his fathers, and guided in
a way of thinking and feeling and anticipating, that reached beyond
things seen and transitory, to the unseen and eternal.—Fundamentals
of Christian Education, 95.
John the Baptist

Pure, Native Eloquence—The voice of John was lifted up like a
trumpet. His commission was, “Show My people their transgression,
and the house of Jacob their sins.” Isaiah 58:1. He had obtained no
human scholarship. God and nature had been his teachers. But one
was needed to prepare the way before Christ who was bold enough
to make his voice heard like the prophets of old, summoning the
degenerate nation to repentance.
And all went forth into the wilderness to hear him. Unlearned
fishermen and peasants came from the surrounding countries and
[358] from regions nigh and afar off. The Roman soldiers from the bar-
racks of Herod came to hear. Chieftains came with their swords
girded by their sides, to put down anything that savored of riot or
rebellion. The avaricious tax gatherers came from the regions round
about; and from the Sanhedrin came forth the phylacteried priests.
All listened as if spellbound; and all came away, even the Pharisee,
the Sadducee, and the cold, unimpressionable scoffer of the age,
with the sneer gone, and cut to the heart with a sense of their sin.
There were no long arguments, no finely cut theories, elaborately
delivered in their “firstly,” “secondly,” and “thirdly.” But pure native
eloquence was revealed in the short sentences, every word carrying

with it the certainty and truth of the weighty warnings given....
John the Baptist met sin with open rebuke in men of humble
occupation and in men of high degree. He declared the truth to
kings and nobles, whether they would hear or reject it.—Selected
Messages 2:148, 149.
The Power of His Words—It was the purpose of John to startle
and arouse the people, and cause them to tremble because of their
great wickedness. In simplicity and plainness, he pointed out the
errors and crimes of men. A power attended his words, and, reluctant
as the people were to hear the denunciation of their unholy lives,
they could not resist his words. He flattered none; neither would
he receive flattery of any. The people, as if with common consent,
came to him repenting, and confessing their sins, and were baptized
of him in Jordan. [359]
Kings and rulers came to the wilderness to hear the prophet,
and were interested and deeply convicted as he fearlessly pointed
out their particular sins. His discernment of character and spiritual
sight read the purposes and hearts of those who came to him, and he
fearlessly told both rich and poor, the honorable and the lowly, that
without repentance of their sins and a thorough conversion, although
they might claim to be righteous, they could not enjoy the favor of
God and have part in the kingdom of the Messiah, whose coming he
announced.
In the spirit and with the power of Elijah, John denounced the
corruptions of the Jews, and raised his voice in reproving their
prevailing sins. His discourses were plain, pointed, and convinc-
ing.—The Review and Herald, January 7, 1873.
Voice Startling and Stern—With no elaborate arguments or
fine-spun theories did John declare his message. Startling and stern,
yet full of hope, his voice was heard from the wilderness: “Repent
ye: for the kingdom of heaven is at hand.” Matthew 3:2. With a new,
strange power it moved the people. The whole nation was stirred.
Multitudes flocked to the wilderness.—Testimonies for the Church
8:332.
Burden of His Mission—With vision illuminated by the divine
Spirit he studied the characters of men, that he might understand
how to reach their hearts with the message of heaven. The burden of
his mission was upon him. In solitude, by meditation and prayer, he

[360] sought to gird up his soul for the lifework before him—The Desire
of Ages, 102.
Trumpet Tones—John had preached the coming of the Messiah.
In trumpet tones the words of the forerunner of Christ had rung in
their ears.—The Review and Herald, February 13, 1900.
One of the Greatest of Prophets—Christ declared John the
Baptist to be one of the greatest of the prophets, and He showed
His hearers that they had had sufficient evidence that John was a
messenger from God. The words of the preacher in the wilderness
were with power. He bore his message unflinchingly, rebuking the
sins of priests and rulers, and enjoining upon them the works of the
kingdom of heaven.—Christ’s Object Lessons, 278.
Mary, the Mother of Jesus

Teacher of the Child Jesus—The child Jesus did not receive
instruction in the synagogue schools. His mother was His first
human teacher. From her lips and from the scrolls of the prophets,
He learned of heavenly things.—The Desire of Ages, 70.
Class at His Mother’s Knee—In childhood, youth, and
manhood, Jesus studied the Scriptures. As a little child He
was daily at His mother’s knee, taught from the scrolls of the
[361] prophets.—Education, 185.
The Apostles
Simple, Accurate Speech—The apostles and their associates
were unlettered men, yet through the outpouring of the Spirit on the
day of Pentecost, their speech, whether in their own or a foreign
language, became pure, simple, and accurate, both in word and in
accent.—The Desire of Ages, 821.
Elevated Truths—From this time [Pentecost] forth the language
of the disciples was pure, simple, and accurate in word and accent,
whether they spoke their native tongue or a foreign language. These
humble men, who had never learned in the school of the prophets,
presented truths so elevated and pure as to astonish those who heard
them.—The Story of Redemption, 246.
Words As Sharp Arrows—The arguments of the apostles

alone, though clear and convincing, would not have removed the
prejudice that had withstood so much evidence. But the Holy Spirit
sent the arguments home to hearts with divine power. The words
of the apostles were as sharp arrows of the Almighty, convicting
men of their terrible guilt in rejecting and crucifying the Lord of
glory.—The Acts of the Apostles, 45.
Heroes of Faith—The disciples were but humble men, without
wealth and with no weapon but the Word of God; yet in Christ’s
strength they went forth to tell the wonderful story of the manger
and the cross, and to triumph over all opposition. Without earthly
honor or recognition, they were heroes of faith. From their lips came [362]
words of divine eloquence that shook the world.—The Acts of the
Apostles, 77.
Preachers of a Creator God—The apostles endeavored to im-
part to these idolaters a knowledge of God the Creator, and of His
Son, the Saviour of the human race. They first directed attention to
the wonderful works of God—the sun, the moon, and the stars, the
beautiful order of the recurring seasons, the mighty snow-capped
mountains, the lofty trees, and other varied wonders of nature, which
showed a skill beyond human comprehension. Through these works
of the Almighty, the apostles led the minds of the heathen to a
contemplation of the great Ruler of the universe.
Having made plain these fundamental truths concerning the
Creator, the apostles told the Lystrians of the Son of God, who
came from heaven to our world because He loved the children of
men.—The Acts of the Apostles, 180.
Clear, Plain Message—The gospel workers in Corinth realized
the terrible dangers threatening the souls of those for whom they
were laboring; and it was with a sense of the responsibility resting
on them that they presented the truth as it is in Jesus. Clear, plain,
and decided was their message—a savor of life unto life, or of death
unto death. And not only in their words, but in the daily life, was
the gospel revealed.—The Acts of the Apostles, 249.
Simplicity and Clarity—They had presented the truth with sim- [363]
plicity and clearness, praying for the conviction and conversion of
souls. And they had endeavored to bring their conduct into harmony
with their teaching, that the truth presented might commend itself to
every man’s conscience.—The Acts of the Apostles, 330.
Boldness and Power—The people were amazed at the boldness
of the disciples. They supposed, because they were ignorant fisher-
men, they would be overcome with embarrassment when confronted
by the priests, scribes, and elders. But they took knowledge that they
had been with Jesus. The apostles spoke as He had spoken, with
a convincing power that silenced their adversaries.—The Story of
Redemption, 252.
John the Apostle

Faithful, Earnest Laborer—After the ascension of Christ, John
stands forth as a faithful, earnest laborer for the Master. With the
other disciples he enjoyed the outpouring of the Spirit on the day
of Pentecost, and with fresh zeal and power he continued to speak
to the people the words of life, seeking to lead their thoughts to the
Unseen. He was a powerful preacher, fervent, and deeply in earnest.
In beautiful language and with a musical voice he told of the words
and works of Christ, speaking in a way that impressed the hearts
of those who heard him. The simplicity of his words, the sublime
power of the truths he uttered, and the fervor that characterized his
teachings, gave him access to all classes.—The Acts of the Apostles,
[364] 546.
No Controversy—As a witness for Christ, John entered into no
controversy, no wearisome contention. He declared what he knew,
what he had seen and heard.—The Acts of the Apostles, 555.
Focus on Gospel Story—When the faith of the Christians would
seem to waver under the fierce opposition they were forced to meet,
the old, tried servant of Jesus would repeat with power and elo-
quence the story of the crucified and risen Saviour.—The Acts of
the Apostles, 568.
Simplicity of Language—When he testified of the Saviour’s
grace, the simplicity of his language was eloquent with the love that
pervaded his whole being. He had not a doubt nor a suspicion. He
entered into no controversy, no wearisome contention.—Manuscript
8a, 1888.
Powerful Preacher—The apostle’s life was in harmony with

his teachings. The love which glowed in his heart for Christ, led
him to put forth the most earnest, untiring labor for his fellow men,
especially for his brethren in the Christian church. He was a powerful
preacher, fervent, and deeply in earnest, and his words carried with
them a weight of conviction.—The Review and Herald, February
15, 1881.
Candor in the Emperor’s Court—John was accordingly sum-
moned to Rome to be tried for his faith. Here before the authorities
the apostle’s doctrines were misstated. False witnesses accused him
of teaching seditious heresies. By these accusations his enemies [365]
hoped to bring about the disciple’s death.
John answered for himself in a clear and convincing manner,
and with such simplicity and candor that his words had a powerful
effect. His hearers were astonished at his wisdom and eloquence.
But the more convincing his testimony, the deeper was the hatred of
his opposers. The emperor Domitian was filled with rage. He could
neither dispute the reasoning of Christ’s faithful advocate, nor match
the power that attended his utterance of truth; yet he determined that
he would silence his voice.—The Acts of the Apostles, 569, 570.
Influence of the Holy Spirit—The simplicity of his words, the
sublime power of the truths he uttered, and the spiritual fervor that
characterized his teachings, gave him access to all classes. Yet even
believers were unable to fully comprehend the sacred mysteries of
divine truth unfolded in his discourses. He seemed to be constantly
imbued with the Holy Spirit. He sought to bring the thoughts of the
people up to grasp the unseen. The wisdom with which he spoke
caused his words to drop as the dew, softening and subduing the
soul.—The Review and Herald, February 15, 1881.
Peter
Adaptation to His Audience—With clearness and power Peter
bore witness of the death and resurrection of Christ: “Ye men of
Israel, hear these words: [366]
Jesus of Nazareth, a man approved of God among you by mir-
acles and wonders and signs, which God did by Him in the midst
of you, as ye yourselves also know: Him ... ye have taken, and by
wicked hands have crucified and slain: whom God hath raised up,
having loosed the pains of death: because it was not possible that
He should be holden of it.”
Peter did not refer to the teachings of Christ to prove his position,
because he knew that the prejudice of his hearers was so great that
his words on this subject would be of no effect. Instead, he spoke
to them of David, who was regarded by the Jews as one of the
patriarchs of their nation.—The Acts of the Apostles, 41.
Christ As His Example—This courageous defense appalled the
Jewish leaders. They had supposed that the disciples would be over-
come with fear and confusion when brought before the Sanhedrin.
But instead, these witnesses spoke as Christ had spoken, with a
convincing power that silenced their adversaries. There was no trace
of fear in Peter’s voice as he declared of Christ, “This is the stone
which was set at naught of you builders, which is become the head
of the corner.”
Peter here used a figure of speech familiar to the priests.—The
Acts of the Apostles, 63, 64.
Stephen
Defender of Truth—Stephen, the foremost of the seven dea-
cons, was a man of deep piety and broad faith. Though a Jew by
[367] birth, he spoke the Greek language, and was familiar with the cus-
toms and manners of the Greeks. He therefore found opportunity
to preach the gospel in the synagogues of the Greek Jews. He was
very active in the cause of Christ, and boldly proclaimed his faith.
Learned rabbis and doctors of the law engaged in public discussion
with him, confidently expecting an easy victory. But “they were not
able to resist the wisdom and the spirit by which he spake.” Not only
did he speak in the power of the Holy Spirit, but it was plain that he
was a student of the prophecies, and learned in all matters of the law.
He ably defended the truths that he advocated, and utterly defeated
his opponents.—The Acts of the Apostles, 97.
Clear, Thrilling Voice—When Stephen was questioned as to
the truth of the charges against him, he began his defense in a clear,
thrilling voice, which rang through the council hall. In words that
held the assembly spellbound, he proceeded to rehearse the history

of the chosen people of God.—The Acts of the Apostles, 99.
Wisdom and Power—With power from on high, Stephen re-
proved the unbelieving priests and elders, and exalted Jesus before
them. They could not withstand the wisdom and power with which
he spoke.—Early Writings, 197.
Paul
Instruction From God—Paul did not come to the churches as [368]
an orator or as a scientific philosopher. He did not seek merely to
please the ear by flowery words and phrases. In eloquent simplicity
he proclaimed the things that had been revealed to him. He was
able to speak with power and authority, for he frequently received
instruction from God in vision.—The S.D.A. Bible Commentary
6:1084.
Good Reasoning Powers—He could reason with extraordinary
clearness, and by his withering sarcasm could place an opponent in
no enviable light ... An eloquent speaker and a severe critic, Paul,
with his stern purpose and undaunted courage, possessed the very
qualifications needed in the early church.—The Acts of the Apostles,
124.
His Life an Example—Paul carried with him the atmosphere
of heaven. All who associated with him felt the influence of his
union with Christ. The fact that his own life exemplified the truth
he proclaimed, gave convincing power to his preaching. Here lies
the power of the truth. The unstudied, unconscious influence of a
holy life is the most convincing sermon that can be given in favor of
Christianity. Argument, even when unanswerable, may provoke only
opposition; but a godly example has a power that it is impossible
wholly to resist.—Gospel Workers, 59.
Sensible, Intelligent Appeals—His toil-worn hands, as he pre-
sented them before the people, bore testimony that he was not charge-
able to any man for his support. They detracted nothing, he deemed, [369]
from the force of his pathetic appeals, sensible, intelligent, and elo-
quent beyond those of any other man who had acted a part in the
Christian ministry.—The S.D.A. Bible Commentary 6:1064.
Step-by-Step Approach—Paul did not approach the Jews in

such a way as to arouse their prejudices. He did not at first tell
them that they must believe in Jesus of Nazareth; but dwelt upon the
prophecies that spoke of Christ, His mission and His work. Step by
step he led his hearers on, showing the importance of honoring the
law of God. He gave due honor to the ceremonial law, showing that
it was Christ who instituted the Jewish economy and the sacrificial
service. Then he brought them down to the first advent of the
Redeemer, and showed that in the life and death of Christ every
specification of the sacrificial service had been fulfilled.
The Gentiles, Paul approached by exalting Christ, and then pre-
senting the binding claims of the law. He showed how the light
reflected by the cross of Calvary gave significance and glory to the
whole Jewish economy.
Thus the apostle varied his manner of labor, shaping his message
to the circumstances under which he was placed. After patient labor
he was successful to a large degree; yet there were many who would
not be convinced.—Gospel Workers, 118.
Modest Language—There is a striking contrast between the
[370] boastful, self-righteous claims of those who profess to be without
sin, and the modest language of the apostle. Yet it was the purity and
faithfulness of his own life that gave such power to his exhortations
to his brethren.—The Sanctified Life, 86.
Forcible Manner—With the Spirit of God resting upon him, he
would in a clear and forcible manner carry his hearers down through
the prophecies to the time of Christ’s first advent and show them that
the scriptures had been fulfilled which referred to His sufferings,
death, and resurrection.—Early Writings, 201, 202.
Convincing Arguments—Among those who encountered Paul
in the marketplace were “certain philosophers of the Epicureans, and
of the Stoics”; but they, and all others who came in contact with him,
soon saw that he had a store of knowledge even greater than their
own. His intellectual power commanded the respect of the learned;
while his earnest, logical reasoning and the power of his oratory
held the attention of all in the audience. His hearers recognized the
fact that he was no novice, but was able to meet all classes with
convincing arguments in support of the doctrines he taught. Thus the
apostle stood undaunted, meeting his opposers on their own ground,
matching logic with logic, philosophy with philosophy, eloquence

with eloquence.
His heathen opponents called his attention to the fate of Socrates,
who, because he was a setter-forth of strange gods, had been con-
demned to death; and they counseled Paul not to endanger his life
in the same way. But the apostle’s discourses riveted the attention [371]
of the people, and his unaffected wisdom commanded their respect
and admiration.—The Acts of the Apostles, 235, 236.
Failure of Mere Eloquence and Logic—It had been Paul’s
custom to adopt an oratorical style in his preaching. He was a man
fitted to speak before kings, before the great and learned men of
Athens, and his intellectual acquirements were often of value to him
in preparing the way for the gospel. He tried to do this in Athens,
meeting eloquence with eloquence, philosophy with philosophy, and
logic with logic; but he failed to meet with the success he had hoped
for.—The S.D.A. Bible Commentary 6:1084.
Simple Presentation of Christ—The experience of the apostle
Paul in meeting the philosophers of Athens has a lesson for us. In
presenting the gospel before the court of the Areopagus, Paul met
logic with logic, science with science, philosophy with philosophy.
The wisest of his hearers were astonished and silenced. His words
could not be controverted. But the effort bore little fruit. Few were
led to accept the gospel. Henceforth Paul adopted a different manner
of labor. He avoided elaborate arguments and discussion of theories,
and in simplicity pointed men and women to Christ as the Saviour
of sinners.
Writing to the Corinthians of his work among them, he said:
“I, brethren, when I came to you, came not with excellency of
speech or of wisdom, declaring unto you the testimony of God. For I [372]
determined not to know anything among you, save Jesus Christ, and
Him crucified.... My speech and my preaching was not with enticing
words of man’s wisdom, but in demonstration of the Spirit and of
power: that your faith should not stand in the wisdom of men, but in
the power of God.” 1 Corinthians 2:1-5.—The Ministry of Healing,
214, 215.
Deep Reasoning—The facts in the case were that Paul was a
man of great learning, and his wisdom and manners charmed his
hearers. Learned men were pleased with his knowledge, and many
of them believed on Jesus. When before kings and large assemblies,

he would pour forth such eloquence as would fascinate all before
him. This greatly enraged the priests and elders. Paul could readily
enter into deep reasoning and, soaring up, carry the people with
him in the most exalted trains of thought, bringing to view the deep
riches of the grace of God and portraying before them the amazing
love of Christ. Then with simplicity he would come down to the
understanding of the common people and in a most powerful manner
relate his experience, which called forth from them an ardent desire
to become the disciples of Christ.—Early Writings, 206, 207.
Creative Power of the True God—The people were carried
away with admiration for Paul’s earnest and logical presentation
of the attributes of the true God—of His creative power, and the
[373] existence of His overruling providence. With earnest and fervid
eloquence, the apostle declared, “God that made the world and all
things therein, seeing that He is Lord of heaven and earth, dwelleth
not in temples made with hands; neither is worshiped with men’s
hands, as though He needed anything, seeing He giveth to all life,
and breath, and all things.”—The Acts of the Apostles, 238.
Tact With Heathen Audiences—Paul’s words contain a trea-
sure of knowledge for the church. He was in a position where he
might easily have said that which would have irritated his proud
listeners, and brought himself into difficulty. Had his oration been a
direct attack upon their gods and the great men of the city, he would
have been in danger of meeting the fate of Socrates. But with a
tact born of divine love, he carefully drew their minds away from
heathen deities, by revealing to them the true God, who was to them
unknown.—The Acts of the Apostles, 241.
Christ the Center of His Mind—His words were spoken with
solemn earnestness, and his hearers could not but discern that he
loved with all his heart the crucified and risen Saviour. They saw
that his mind was centered in Christ, that his whole life was bound
up with his Lord. So impressive were his words, that only those who
were filled with the bitterest hatred against the Christian religion
could stand unmoved by them.—The Acts of the Apostles, 247, 248.
Sound, Practical Instruction—Paul was an eloquent speaker.
Before his conversion, he had often sought to impress his hearers by
[374] flights of oratory. But now he set all this aside. Instead of indulging
in poetic descriptions and fanciful representations, which might

please the senses and feed the imagination, but which would not
touch the daily experience, Paul sought by the use of simple language
to bring home to the heart the truths that are of vital importance.
Fanciful representations of truth may cause an ecstasy of feeling;
but all too often, truths presented in this way do not supply the food
necessary to strengthen and fortify the believer for the battles of life.
The immediate needs, the present trials, of struggling souls—these
must be met with sound, practical instruction in the fundamental
principles of Christianity.—The Acts of the Apostles, 251, 252.
Gospel in Its Simplicity—During the year and a half that Paul
had spent in Corinth, he had purposely presented the gospel in
its simplicity. “Not with excellency of speech or of wisdom” had
he come to the Corinthians; but with fear and trembling, and “in
demonstration of the Spirit and of power,” had he declared “the
testimony of God,” that their “faith should not stand in the wisdom
of men, but in the power of God.” 1 Corinthians 2:1, 4, 5.
Paul had necessarily adapted his manner of teaching to the con-
dition of the church. “I, brethren, could not speak unto you as
unto spiritual,” he afterward explained to them, “but as unto carnal,
even as unto babes in Christ.” 1 Corinthians 3:1.—The Acts of the
Apostles, 270, 271.
His Religion Not a Mere Profession—His conversation, his
influence, his refusal to yield to self-gratification, must show that his [375]
religion was not a profession merely, but a daily, living connection
with God. One goal he kept ever before him, and strove earnestly
to reach—“the righteousness which is of God by faith.” Philippians
3:9.—The Acts of the Apostles, 314.
Convincing Power—With convincing power the apostle set
forth the great truth of the resurrection.—The Acts of the Apos-
tles, 320.
Plain Speech—The apostle, in the most decided and impressive
manner, endeavored to correct the false and dangerous ideas and
practices that were prevailing in the Corinthian church. He spoke
plainly, yet in love for their souls.—The Acts of the Apostles, 321.
Calm, Self-Possessed Bearing—In the midst of the tumult [see
Acts 21:33-40] the apostle was calm and self-possessed. His mind
was stayed upon God, and he knew that angels of heaven were
about him. He felt unwilling to leave the temple without making an

effort to set the truth before his countrymen. As he was about to be
led into the castle, he said to the chief captain, “May I speak unto
thee?” Lysias responded, “Canst thou speak Greek? Art not thou that
Egyptian, which before these days madest an uproar, and leddest
out into the wilderness four thousand men that were murderers?” In
reply Paul said, “I am a man which am a Jew of Tarsus, a city in
Cilicia, a citizen of no mean city: and, I beseech thee, suffer me to
speak unto the people.”
[376] The request was granted, and “Paul stood on the stairs, and
beckoned with the hand unto the people.” The gesture attracted their
attention, while his bearing commanded respect.—The Acts of the
Apostles, 408.
Personal Experience—Had he attempted to enter into argument
with his opponents, they would have stubbornly refused to listen
to his words; but the relation of his experience was attended with
a convincing power that for the time seemed to soften and subdue
their hearts.—The Acts of the Apostles, 409.
Evident Sincerity—In a candid, straightforward manner he
stated the object of his visit to Jerusalem, and the circumstances
of his arrest and trial.... The apostle spoke with earnestness and
evident sincerity, and his words carried with them a weight of con-
viction.—The Acts of the Apostles, 421.
Clear Defense Before Agrippa—With clearness and power
Paul outlined before Agrippa the leading events connected with
the life of Christ on earth.—The Acts of the Apostles, 436.
True Courtesy—Look at Paul when brought before rulers. His
speech before Agrippa is an illustration of true courtesy as well as
persuasive eloquence.—The Ministry of Healing, 489, 490.
Caution and Kindness—He said nothing of the abuse which
he had suffered at the hands of the Jews, or of their repeated plots to
[377] assassinate him. His words were marked with caution and kindness.
... He related his own experience, and presented arguments from the
Old Testament Scriptures with simplicity, sincerity, and power.—The
Acts of the Apostles, 450, 451.
As a Voice From Heaven—With more than human eloquence
and power, Paul presents the truths of the gospel. He points his
hearers to the sacrifice made for the fallen race. He declares that an
infinite price has been paid for man’s redemption....
Thus pleads the advocate of truth. Faithful among the faithless,
loyal among the disloyal, he stands as God’s representative, and his
voice is as a voice from heaven. There is no fear, no sadness, no
discouragement in word or look....
Many who that day looked upon him, “saw his face as it had
been the face of an angel.” Acts 6:15.
Never before had that company listened to words like these.
They struck a chord that vibrated in the hearts of even the most
hardened. Truth, clear and convincing, overthrew error.—The Acts
of the Apostles, 495, 496.
Timothy
Home Instruction—Timothy’s father was a Greek and his
mother a Jewess. From a child he had known the Scriptures. The
piety that he saw in his home life was sound and sensible. The faith
of his mother and his grandmother in the sacred oracles was to him
a constant reminder of the blessing in doing God’s will. The Word
of God was the rule by which these two godly women had guided
Timothy. The spiritual power of the lessons that he had received [378]
from them kept him pure in speech and unsullied by the evil influ-
ences with which he was surrounded. Thus his home instructors had
cooperated with God in preparing him to bear burdens.
Paul saw that Timothy was faithful, steadfast, and true, and he
chose him as a companion in labor and travel. Those who had taught
Timothy in his childhood were rewarded by seeing the son of their
care linked in close fellowship with the great apostle. Timothy was
a mere youth when he was chosen by God to be a teacher; but his
principles had been so established by his early education that he
was fitted to take his place as Paul’s helper. And though young, he
bore his responsibilities with Christian meekness.—The Acts of the
Apostles, 203, 204. [379]
Chapter 62—Medieval Reformers
Wycliffe
Able Teacher and Preacher—He was an able and earnest
teacher, and an eloquent preacher, and his daily life was a demon-
stration of the truths he preached. His knowledge of the Scriptures,
the force of his reasoning, the purity of his life, and his unbend-
ing courage and integrity, won for him general esteem and confi-
dence.—The Great Controversy, 81.
Lack of Fear—Wycliffe appealed from the synod to Parliament;
he fearlessly arraigned the hierarchy before the national council,
and demanded a reform of the enormous abuses sanctioned by the
church. With convincing power he portrayed the usurpations and
corruptions of the papal see.—The Great Controversy, 89.
Fearlessness and Humility—He fearlessly maintained his
teachings, and repelled the accusations of his persecutors. Losing
sight of himself, of his position, of the occasion, he summoned his
[380] hearers before the divine tribunal, and weighed their sophistries and
deceptions in the balances of eternal truth.—The Great Controversy,
90.
Huss
Preacher of God’s Word—But it was in another field that Huss
began the work of reform. Several years after taking priest’s orders
he was appointed preacher of the chapel of Bethlehem. The founder
of this chapel had advocated, as a matter of great importance, the
preaching of the Scriptures in the language of the people. Notwith-
standing Rome’s opposition to this practice, it had not been wholly
discontinued in Bohemia. But there was great ignorance of the Bible,
and the worst vices prevailed among the people of all ranks. These
evils Huss unsparingly denounced, appealing to the Word of God to
enforce the principles of truth and purity which he inculcated.—The
Great Controversy, 99.
246
Chapter 62—Medieval Reformers 247
Jerome
Clarity and Power—The words of Jerome excited astonish-
ment and admiration, even in his enemies. For a whole year he
had been immured in a dungeon, unable to read or even to see,
in great physical suffering and mental anxiety. Yet his arguments
were presented with as much clearness and power as if he had had
undisturbed opportunity for study.—The Great Controversy, 112,
113. [381]
Luther
Deep Fervor—Luther was ordained a priest, and was called
from the cloister to a professorship in the University of Wittenberg.
Here he applied himself to the study of the Scriptures in the original
tongues. He began to lecture upon the Bible; and the book of Psalm,
the Gospels, and the Epistles were opened to the understanding of
crowds of delighted listeners. He was mighty in the Scriptures and
the grace of God rested upon him. His eloquence captivated his
hearers, the clearness and power with which he presented the truth
convinced their understanding, and his deep fervor touched their
hearts.—The Story of Redemption, 341.
Fearless Bearing—The simple energy of his words, his fearless
bearing, his calm, speaking eye, and the unalterable determination
expressed in every word and act made a deep impression upon the
assembly. It was evident that he could not be induced, either by
promises or threats, to yield to the mandate of Rome.
Christ had spoken through Luther’s testimony with a power and
grandeur that for the time inspired both friends and foes with awe
and wonder.—The Story of Redemption, 348.
God’s Chosen Instrument—Luther was God’s chosen instru-
ment to tear off the garb of hypocrisy from the papal church and
expose her corruption. He raised his voice zealously, and in the
power of the Holy Spirit cried out against and rebuked the existing [382]
sins of the leaders of the people.—Testimonies for the Church 1:372.
Calm, Dignified Power—The calm, dignified power of Luther
humbled his enemies, and dealt a most dreadful blow to the pa-
pacy.—Testimonies for the Church 1:373.
Words With Majesty—Luther’s prayer was heard. His courage

and faith returned as he met his enemies. Meek as a lamb he stood,
surrounded by the great men of the earth, who, like angry wolves,
fastened their eyes upon him, hoping to awe him with their power
and greatness. But he had taken hold of the strength of God and
feared not. His words were spoken with such majesty and power
that his enemies could do nothing against him....
The calm bearing of Luther was in striking contrast to the passion
and rage exhibited by those so-called great men. They could not
frighten him into a recantation of the truth. In noble simplicity and
calm firmness he stood like a rock.—Testimonies for the Church
1:374, 375.
Forcible Exposition—At the next interview, Luther presented a
clear, concise, and forcible exposition of his views, fully supported
by many quotations from Scripture.—The Great Controversy, 136.
Solemnity and Earnestness—The solemnity and deep earnest-
ness of his words gave him a power that even his enemies could not
[383] wholly withstand.—The Great Controversy, 154.
Prudence and Dignity—“For this reason I entreat your imperial
majesty, with all humility, to allow me time, that I may answer
without offending against the Word of God.”
In making this request, Luther moved wisely. His course con-
vinced the assembly that he did not act from passion or impulse.
Such calmness and self-command, unexpected in one who had
shown himself bold and uncompromising, added to his power, and
enabled him afterward to answer with a prudence, decision, wis-
dom, and dignity that surprised and disappointed his adversaries, and
rebuked their insolence and pride.—The Great Controversy, 156.
Careful Preparation of His Defense—With his mind stayed
upon God, Luther prepared for the struggle before him. He thought
upon the plan of his answer, examined passages in his own writings,
and drew from the Holy Scriptures suitable proofs to sustain his
positions.—The Great Controversy, 157.
Subdued, Humble Tone—The imperial officer now demanded
his decision as to whether he desired to retract his doctrines. Luther
made his answer in a subdued and humble tone, without violence
or passion. His demeanor was diffident and respectful; yet he mani-
fested a confidence and joy that surprised the assembly.—The Great

Controversy, 158.
Courage and Firmness—The courage and firmness which he
now displayed, as well as the power and clearness of his reasoning,
filled all parties with surprise.—The Great Controversy, 160, 161. [384]
In the Presence of God—The papal leaders were chagrined that
their power, which had caused kings and nobles to tremble, should
be thus despised by a humble monk; they longed to make him feel
their wrath by torturing his life away. But Luther, understanding
his danger, had spoken to all with Christian dignity and calmness.
His words had been free from pride, passion, and misrepresentation.
He had lost sight of himself, and of the great men surrounding him,
and felt only that he was in the presence of One infinitely superior
to popes, prelates, kings, and emperors. Christ had spoken through
Luther’s testimony with a power and grandeur that for the time
inspired both friends and foes with awe and wonder....
The elector Frederick had looked forward anxiously to Luther’s
appearance before the Diet, and with deep emotion he listened to
his speech. With joy and pride he witnessed the doctor’s courage,
firmness, and self-possession, and determined to stand more firmly
in his defense.—The Great Controversy, 161, 162.
Clear Reasoning—The contrast between the two disputants
[Oecolampadius and Eck] was not without effect. The calm, clear
reasoning of the Reformer, so gently and modestly presented, ap-
pealed to minds that turned in disgust from Eck’s boastful and bois-
terous assumptions.—The Great Controversy, 184.
The Wesleys and Whitefield

Justification and Renewal—Wesley’s life was devoted to the [385]
preaching of the great truths which he had received—justification
through faith in the atoning blood of Christ, and the renewing power
of the Holy Spirit upon the heart, bringing forth fruit in a life con-
formed to the example of Christ.
Whitefield and the Wesleys had been prepared for their work
by long and sharp personal convictions of their own lost condition;
and that they might be able to endure hardness as good soldiers of
Christ, they had been subjected to the fiery ordeal of scorn, derision,
and persecution, both in the university and as they were entering the
ministry....
As members of the Church of England, they were strongly at-
tached to her forms of worship, but the Lord had presented before
them in His Word a higher standard. The Holy Spirit urged them to
preach Christ and Him crucified. The power of the Highest attended
their labors. Thousands were convicted and truly converted. It was
necessary that these sheep be protected from ravening wolves. Wes-
ley had no thought of forming a new denomination, but he organized
them under what was called the Methodist Connection.—The Great
Controversy, 256, 257.
Gospel of the Grace of God—Thus while preaching the gospel
of the grace of God, [John] Wesley, like his Master, sought to “mag-
nify the law, and make it honorable.” Faithfully did he accomplish
the work given him of God, and glorious were the results which he
was permitted to behold. At the close of his long life of more than
[386] fourscore years—above half a century spent in itinerant ministry—
his avowed adherents numbered more than half a million souls. But
the multitude that through his labors had been lifted from the ruin
and degradation of sin to a higher and a purer life, and the number
who by his teaching had attained to a deeper and richer experience,
will never be known till the whole family of the redeemed shall
be gathered into the kingdom of God. His life presents a lesson
of priceless worth to every Christian. Would that the faith and hu-
mility, the untiring zeal, self-sacrifice, and devotion of this servant
of Christ, might be reflected in the churches of today!—The Great
Controversy, 264.
Humble Men of Reformation Times

Simple, Straightforward Reasoning—By argument, sophistry,
the traditions of the Fathers, and the authority of the church, many
endeavored to overthrow the truth. Its advocates were driven to their
Bibles to defend the validity of the fourth commandment. Humble
men, armed with the Word of truth alone, withstood the attacks of
men of learning, who, with surprise and anger, found their eloquent
sophistry powerless against the simple, straightforward reasoning of
men who were versed in the Scriptures rather than in the subtleties
of the schools.—The Great Controversy, 455. [387]
Chapter 63—Adventist Pioneers
William Miller
Language of Truth—Mr. Miller’s manner of preaching was not
flowery or oratorical, but he dealt in plain and startling facts that
roused his hearers from their careless indifference. He supported
his statements and theories by Scripture proof as he progressed. A
convincing power attended his words, that seemed to stamp them as
the language of truth....
He was an interesting speaker, and his exhortations, both to pro-
fessed Christians and the impenitent, were appropriate and powerful.
Sometimes a solemnity so marked as to be painful, pervaded his
meetings. A sense of the impending crisis of human events im-
pressed the minds of the listening crowds.—Life Sketches of Ellen
G. White, 27.
James White
Boldness in Acting and Speaking—God should have the glory
for the unbending integrity and noble courage to vindicate the right
and condemn the wrong which my husband has had. Just such firm-
[388] ness and decision were necessary at the commencement of the work,
and they have been needed all along, as it progressed step by step.
He has stood in defense of the truth without yielding a single prin-
ciple to please the best friend. He has had an ardent temperament,
bold and fearless in acting and speaking. This has often led him into
difficulties which he might frequently have avoided. He has been
obliged to stand more firmly, to be more decided, to speak more
earnestly and boldly, because of the very different temperament of
the men connected with him in his labor.—Life Sketches of Ellen G.
White, 243.
Clearness of Mind—After God had tested and proved us in the
furnace of affliction, He raised up my husband and gave him greater
clearness of mind and power of intellect to plan and execute than
252
Chapter 63—Adventist Pioneers 253
he had before his affliction. When my husband felt his own weak-
ness and moved in the fear of God, then the Lord was his strength.
Prompt in speech and action, he has pushed forward reforms where
they would otherwise have languished. He has made very liberal
donations, fearing that his means would prove a snare to him.—Life
Sketches of Ellen G. White, 244.
Precious Light of Truth for Himself—God has permitted
the precious light of truth to shine upon His Word and illumi-
nate the mind of my husband. He may reflect the rays of light
from the presence of Jesus upon others by his preaching and writ-
ing.—Testimonies for the Church 3:502. [389]
Greater Light for Others—I was shown that his relation to
the people of God was similar, in some respects, to that of Moses
to Israel. There were murmurers against Moses, when in adverse
circumstances, and there have been murmurers against him.... He
has also given my husband great light upon Bible subjects, not for
himself alone, but for others. I saw that these things should be
written and talked out, and that new light would continue to shine
upon the Word.—Testimonies for the Church 3:85.
Instrument of God for Reproof—As my husband has stood by
my side to sustain me in my work, and has borne a plain testimony
in unison with the work of the Spirit of God, many have felt that
it was he personally who was injuring them, when it was the Lord
who laid upon him the burden and who was, through His servant,
reproving them and seeking to bring them where they would repent
of their wrongs and have the favor of God.—Testimonies for the
Church 3:261.
Influence of His Writings—My husband has labored untiringly
to bring the publishing interest up to its present state of prosperity.
I saw that he had had more sympathy and love from his brethren
than he has thought he had. They eagerly search the paper to find
something from his pen. If there is a tone of cheerfulness in his
writings, if he speaks encouragingly, their hearts are lightened, and
some even weep with tender feelings of joy. But if gloom and
sadness are expressed, the countenances of his brethren and sisters, [390]
as they read, grow sad, and the spirit which characterizes his writings
is reflected upon them.—Testimonies for the Church 3:96, 97.
W. W. Prescott
Source of Success—I know that since coming to this place he
has had the outpouring of the Holy Spirit; his lips have been touched
with a live coal from off the altar. We know and can distinguish the
voice of the True Shepherd. The truth has been poured forth from
the lips of the servant of God as the people had never heard it before;
unbelievers turn pale, and say, “That man is inspired.” The people
do not stroll about the grounds, but go immediately into the tent, and
listen as if spellbound.
Every day some of our workers go out into the suburbs with
[copies of the Bible] Echoes, notices, and invitations to come to the
meeting, where such wonderful things are presented from the Word
of God. The Lord is pouring into the chambers of the mind and
the soul temple fresh light, as precious as gold. I never heard the
Word presented with greater fervency and power. I know it must be
through the constraining power of God upon the human instrument.
It is remarked by many that there is no manner of disturbance upon
the ground. Every time I enter the encampment, I think the angels
[391] of God are here.—Lt 82, 1895.
God’s Modern Messenger

First Speech (Poland, Maine, 1845)—For three months my
throat and lungs had been so diseased that I could talk but little, and
that in a low and husky tone. On this occasion I stood up in meeting
and commenced to speak in a whisper. I continued thus for about
five minutes, when the soreness and obstruction left me, my voice
became clear and strong, and I spoke with perfect ease and freedom
for nearly two hours. When my message was ended, my voice was
gone until I again stood before the people, when the same singular
restoration was repeated. I felt a constant assurance that I was doing
the will of God, and saw marked results attending my efforts.—Life
Sketches of Ellen G. White, 72, 73.
Strength From the Lord—Sabbath I was very feeble. After
speaking to the people I was so wearied I came near fainting. The
people said they had never seen me look so wretched before. I lost
fifteen pounds of flesh in three weeks. Sunday I entreated the Lord to
give me strength to bear my testimony to the people, and I believed.

I went upon the stand in great weakness, talked one hour and a half,
and left the stand much stronger than I went upon it, and kept all the
strength that was given me on that occasion.... [392]
I have just received an appeal from the most influential men of
Dunlap—bankers, ministers, and merchants—to repeat my discourse
given Sunday under the tent, on temperance, in the Congregational
church.—Lt 22, 1879.
Power by the Holy Spirit—When I have been expected to speak
to many people, at times I have felt that it was impossible for me to
appear day after day before great congregations. But I have tried to
place myself physically in right relation to God. Then I have said
to Him, “I have done all I can do, Lord, using Thine own means,
and now I ask for the special blessing which Thou alone canst give
to sustain me.” With trembling steps I have walked into the desk to
speak to assembled thousands; but the moment I have stood before
the congregation, the Spirit of God has always come to me with
strengthening power.
Often I said to my husband while he was with me, “If only I could
have the assurance beforehand, how much good it would do me.” He
would answer, “God has never failed to bless you the moment you
rise to speak; so whatever may be your feelings, you must put your
trust in Him, hanging your helpless soul on His promises.” This I
have tried to do. I have learned that we must act our part, cooperating
with God. He gives strength for every duty.—Manuscript 8a, 1888.
Voice Given Her of God—When I was only about eleven years
old, I heard a minister read the account of Peter’s imprisonment, as [393]
recorded in the book of Acts; and he read in so impressive a manner
that the details of the story in all their reality seemed to be passing
before my eyes. So deep was the impression made upon my mind
that I have never forgotten it.
When, a few years afterward, I was speaking in general meetings,
I met this man again, and at the close of my discourse he asked,
“How did you get that wonderful voice?” I told him that the Lord
had given it to me. When I began my public labors, I had no voice,
except when I stood before the congregations to speak. At other
times I could not speak above a whisper. “And,” I added, “I have
often thought of what you said to the people when someone asked
you how you became a minister. You told them that your friends
said you could never be a minister, because you could not speak
properly; but that you went away by yourself and talked to the trees
in the woods; and then when driving the oxen, you would talk to
them just as if you were in meeting. ‘This,’ you said, ‘is the way I
learned to speak in public. “”—Manuscript 91, 1903.
Divine Aid in Speaking—The following day I was ill, and very
weak. The cold had taken a firm hold on my system. I doubted if
I should be able to speak on the morrow. However, I ventured to
allow the brethren to make an appointment for me to address the
people Sabbath forenoon. I made the Lord my entire dependence;
for I knew that unless He should be my helper, I could not speak
[394] more than a few words. My throat and head were greatly troubled. I
was so hoarse that I could scarcely speak aloud.
Sabbath morning I felt no better. At the appointed hour, I went
over to the chapel, and found it crowded. I feared I should fail, but
began talking. The moment I began to speak, strength was imparted.
I was relieved of hoarseness, and spoke without difficulty for nearly
an hour. My illness seemed to disappear, and my mind was clear.
As soon as I finished speaking, the hoarseness came upon me again,
and I began coughing and sneezing as before.
To me, this experience was a marked evidence of divine
help.—The Review and Herald, July 19, 1906.
Long Sermons by Ellen White—[This entry as well as the
next form part of an impromptu discussion during a talk Ellen White
gave to the General Conference at Lake Goguac, Michigan, July 14,
1890.] Elder Underwood: “Do we preach too long?”
Ellen White: “Yes, indeed; and I, too; I take that right to myself.
I preach too long.”
W. C. White: “Let me ask a question. Are we to take your
example as an exponent of your views?”
Ellen White: “Well, didn’t I just make my confession? And
haven’t I given you an example? I consider myself an exception,
but I think I have ventured too far even in the exception. But I will
tell you why I consider myself an exception. I have been taken by
my husband and carried on the cars and laid on the seat, and I have
[395] gone to a place of meeting and have stood under paralysis that had
been upon me for weeks, so that I have not been able to command
my language to speak a sentence correctly. And yet I would stand

on my feet before the public and make my testimony as straight as
a string. The Spirit of the Lord was upon me. Everyone is not an
exception. Now, how can I tell when I am going too far? I have been
brought up to that point again and again....
“Now, how far shall I go? I have taken the position that if the
Lord gives me a burden for the Battle Creek church, I will tell it to
them; but unless I have a burden, I have nothing more to say. I spoke
21 times in as many days there at Battle Creek. I did not speak every
day, but some days spoke twice. This was before I left; and I never
got rested until it resulted in this terrible sickness. I knew, and told
them at Fresno, that I was fighting my last round. And then in those
private meetings the labor was worse than speaking in public, and
having to tell them such straight things as I had to tell them.
“Now I do not know whether your question is answered or not;
perhaps it is like a long sermon: it is so long that you have lost the
main point.”
Elder White: “Now I have questioned somewhat whether one
person had the right to shape his action on another’s experience. I
have questioned if it was not our duty to shape our action on our
own experience.”
Ellen White: “Well, now, it has been like this. I have been sick
and in pain; and I want to tell you that there is never a time when
I make an appointment but that before that appointment comes I [396]
have wrestled with the most terrible difficulty of the heart, or some
infirmity, that makes it seem like an impossibility for me to go before
the public. And yet just as soon as I stand on my feet before the
people I feel just as sure that the angels of God are right by my side
as if I opened my eyes and looked upon them as I did at Christ at
the time He restored me. I am taken right out of and above myself.
I feel just as though, as it were, the judgment is right before me;
just as though the universe of heaven is looking upon me, and as
though I have these things to do and I must say them if I drop dead
in the desk. Now, I do not believe it is the duty of others to do that.
And every day I feel that way. It is because the terrible realities of
eternity are opened before me, and as soon as I get up on my feet the
terrible realities seem to enshroud me like a garment.”—Manuscript
19b, 1890.
Voice, Volume, and Speed—Elder Farnsworth: “Don’t you

think, sister White, a great many of our ministers have received
great injury from their manner of speaking?”
Ellen White: “Oh, yes, indeed; I have seen it over and over. My
husband got in the way of sometimes raising his voice very loud,
and it seemed as though he could not get out of that way. And there
is a brother in Texas, Brother A, that is dying just as sure as if he put
a knife to his throat. Now since I have come here I have thought of
[397] that and I must write to him.”
Elder Kilgore: “He has been told about that.”
Elder Farnsworth: “They are all around in every conference.”
Ellen White: “In my younger days I used to talk too loud. The
Lord has shown me that I could not make the proper impression
upon the people by getting the voice to an unnatural pitch. Then
Christ was presented before me, and His manner of talking. There
was a sweet melody in His voice. His voice, in a slow, calm manner,
reached those who listened; His words penetrated their hearts, and
they were able to catch on to what He said before the next sentence
was spoken. Some seem to think they must race right straight along
or else they will lose the inspiration and the people will lose the
inspiration. If that is inspiration, let them lose it, and the sooner the
better.
“Well, I wrote an article on that point when I was at St. Helena
because I felt as though our ministers were going down, and there
was some cause for it.”—Manuscript 19b, 1890.
Messages From God’s Spirit—When I am speaking to the peo-
ple I say much that I have not premeditated. The Spirit of the Lord
frequently comes upon me. I seem to be carried out of, and away
from, myself; the life and character of different persons are clearly
presented before my mind. I see their errors and dangers, and feel
compelled to speak of what is thus brought before me.—Testimonies
[398] for the Church 5:678.
Revelation Through Visions—Before I stand on my feet, I have
no thought of speaking as plainly as I do. But the Spirit of God rests
upon me with power, and I cannot but speak the words given me. I
dare not withhold one word of the testimony.... I speak the words
given me by a Power higher than human power, and I cannot, if I
would, recall one sentence.
In the night season the Lord gives me instruction in symbols,

and then explains their meaning. He gives me the word, and I
dare not refuse to give it to the people. The love of Christ, and, I
venture to add, the love of souls, constrains me, and I cannot hold
my peace.—Manuscript 22, 1890.
Husband and Wife a Speaking Team—At first I moved out
timidly in the work of public speaking. If I had confidence, it was
given me by the Holy Spirit. If I spoke with freedom and power,
it was given me of God. Our meetings were usually conducted
in such a manner that both of us took part. My husband would
give a doctrinal discourse, then I would follow with an exhortation
of considerable length, melting my way into the feelings of the
congregation. Thus my husband sowed and I watered the seed of
truth, and God did give the increase.—Testimonies for the Church
1:75.
Life of Christ and the Health Question—Evening after the
Sabbath, I spoke again to a large number. Sunday the Methodist
church was opened. Father spoke in the forenoon and I spoke in the
afternoon upon the life, sufferings, and resurrection of Christ. An [399]
appointment was given out for the evening for me to speak at the
hall upon the health question. Long before the hour, the hall was full
to overflowing and a number stood in the street unable to get into
the hall. We crowded our passage through. But fears were expressed
that the floor might give way. Men who knew assured them there
was not the least danger.
Persons proposed going to the Methodist house which was open
for their reception and more convenient and better ventilated. They
stated that quite a number were already there. One cried out, “Divide
the preachers.” Your father made answer [that] he would not venture
to try the experiment, fearing he would not get his share of hearers.
Finally a general move was made to the meetinghouse which was
crowded and extra seats prepared. I had a very respectful, attentive
congregation. I spoke one hour and a half, with freedom. The
meeting closed well. We have another appointment out tonight. May
the Lord go with us and aid us in our labor, is our prayer. [Letter to
Ellen White’s son, W. C. White]—Lt 17, 1870.
Sermon on Colossians 1:24-29—Brother D. T. Bourdeau spoke
in the early morning meeting. In the afternoon I spoke to the people
from Colossians 1:24-29. I felt great weakness before going into

the desk. I pleaded most earnestly with God in prayer to help me
and to bless the people in a special manner. The Spirit of the Lord
[400] rested upon me and upon the people. I was followed by three inter-
preters—German, French, and Danish—but this did not embarrass
me in the least. The heavenly angels were in our midst. I was
blessed in speaking, the people blessed in hearing. I cannot see but
that my message is having a better impression than on the minds of
my American brethren and sisters.
After the discourse we had a most precious meeting. Our
brethren of all nationalities spoke of being greatly blessed, and
of being very grateful to God for the word spoken.—Lt 23, 1885.
Message on Matthew 9:28-30—My text was Matthew 9:28-30.
The congregation were, many of them, intelligent men and women.
I presented the truth in its simplicity, that old and young could
understand. This was the manner of Jesus’ preaching. He taught the
people in simplicity. He used no large words that the unlearned could
not understand. The unlearned, the veriest child, could understand
His words.
Jesus declared in Nazareth, “The Spirit of the Lord is upon Me,
because He hath anointed Me to preach the gospel to the poor; He
hath sent Me to heal the brokenhearted, to preach deliverance to
the captives, and recovery of sight to the blind, to set at liberty
them that are bruised.” Luke 4:18. How many of the professed
ministers of Jesus Christ are copying this example of our divine
Teacher?—Manuscript 55, 1886.
[401] Preaching on the Parable of the Talents—An appointment
had been made for me to speak Sabbath afternoon, January 7th,
but as I rode the five miles to the meeting, I was in such a state of
exhaustion that I feared and trembled and was beset with temptations.
Looking at appearance, it was impossible for me to speak. I prayed
all the way. When I stood upon the platform, such an assurance was
given me by the Lord that He had sent His angel to sustain me, that
I could not doubt. These words seemed spoken to me: “Be strong
in the Lord; yea, be strong.” I never spoke with greater ease and
freedom from infirmity. The hearers said my voice was clear and
musical, and the congregation could not but know that the Spirit and
power of God was upon me.
I spoke for an hour upon the parable of the talents, dwelling

with considerable definiteness on the slothful servant who hid his
one talent in the earth, and presented it to the Lord with a bitter
complaint, accusing God of being a hard Master. The Lord spoke
through clay, and hearts were touched. Some were deeply moved.
A minister of the Church of England, who came from Tasmania
in company with Brethren Baker and Rousseau, and who has just
begun to keep the Sabbath, was present.—Lt 23a, 1893.
Prudence and Solemnity—The Lord is soon to work in greater
power among us, but there is danger of allowing our impulses to
carry us where the Lord would not want us to go. We must not
make one step that we will have to retract. We must move solemnly, [402]
prudently, and not make use of extravagant expressions, or allow
our feelings to become overwrought. We must think calmly, and
work without excitement; for there will be those who become easily
wrought up who will catch up unguarded expressions, and make use
of extreme utterances to create excitement, and thus counteract the
very work that God would do.
There are a class of people who are always ready to go off
on some tangent, who want to catch up something strange and
wonderful and new; but God would have all [of us] move calmly,
considerately choosing our words in harmony with the solid truth
for this time, which requires [that it] be presented to the mind as
free from that which is emotional as possible, while still bearing
the intensity and solemnity that it is proper it should bear. We must
guard against creating extremes, guard against encouraging those
who would be either in the fire or in the water.—Lt 37, 1894.
Subject From Holy Spirit for Special Occasion—On Sunday,
June 23, [1895], I spoke under the tent at Canterbury. A general
meeting had been appointed, and many of our people were present
from Ashfield, Sydney, and Petersham. Several souls were con-
vinced of the truth who had not fully decided to obey. As I entered
the desk I could not seem to fasten my mind upon any subject
upon which to speak, but as soon as I rose to my feet, everything
was clear, and the text given me was the question of the lawyer to
Christ—“What shall I do that I may have eternal life?” [403]
The power of God came upon me, and the truth of God was
presented by His human agent in a most clear and powerful way.
Elder Corliss said that he had heard me speak under almost every
circumstance for the last forty years but that this was the most pow-
erful discourse he had ever heard me give. I seemed to be lifted up
and away from myself. It was the Lord’s Spirit that came upon me,
and to His name be all the glory. In my next letter to you, I will give
the substance of what was spoken.
After the discourse we spent about one hour in social meeting.
The testimonies borne were excellent, and our meeting closed, leav-
ing a most favorable impression upon the minds of those who were
hesitating at the cross, and wondering how they should make a living
if they accepted the truth.—Lt 28, 1895.
Message About the Fruitless Fig Tree—Afternoon. I have just
returned from the services in the tent. I have spoken twice today,
nearly one hour in the half-past-six morning meeting, and again this
afternoon. I generally speak on Wednesday afternoons because it is
a holiday, but this week I consented to speak on Tuesday because
it is Cup Day.... The tent was full. Extra seats were furnished, and
some had to stand.
I spoke upon the fruitless fig tree, making application of the same
to the churches that bear no fruit. The Lord gave me freedom before
[404] that large assembly. There were present before me noble-looking
countenances, and many, both men and women, wept. None left
their seats, but all listened with most profound attention. The Lord
did give me a message for the people. I know that the Holy Spirit
worked upon minds and hearts. I have never in any of our camp
meetings seen such eagerness to hear the truth.
I have already spoken twelve times above one hour, and several
times short discourses. The Lord’s presence is upon this encamp-
[405] ment, and many hearts are stirred.—Lt 82, 1895.
[406]
[407]
Section 8—Use of the Voice in Singing
Chapter 64—The Power of Song
A Means of Education—The history of the songs of the Bible

is full of suggestion as to the uses and benefits of music and song.
Music is often perverted to serve purposes of evil, and it thus be-
comes one of the most alluring agencies of temptation. But, rightly
employed, it is a precious gift of God, designed to uplift the thoughts
to high and noble themes, to inspire and elevate the soul.
As the children of Israel, journeying through the wilderness,
cheered their way by the music of sacred song, so God bids His
children today gladden their pilgrim life. There are few means more
effective for fixing His words in the memory than repeating them in
song. And such song has wonderful power. It has power to subdue
rude and uncultivated natures; power to quicken thought and to
awaken sympathy, to promote harmony of action, and to banish the
gloom and foreboding that destroy courage and weaken effort.
It is one of the most effective means of impressing the heart
with spiritual truth. How often to the soul hard-pressed and ready to
despair, memory recalls some word of God’s—the long-forgotten
[408] burden of a childhood song—and temptations lose their power, life
takes on new meaning and new purpose, and courage and gladness
are imparted to other souls!
The value of song as a means of education should never be lost
sight of. Let there be singing in the home, of songs that are sweet
and pure, and there will be fewer words of censure and more of
cheerfulness and hope and joy. Let there be singing in the school,
and the pupils will be drawn closer to God, to their teachers, and to
one another.
As a part of religious service, singing is as much an act of wor-
ship as is prayer. Indeed, many a song is prayer. If the child is taught
to realize this, he will think more of the meaning of the words he
sings and will be more susceptible to their power.—Education, 167,
168.
264
Chapter 64—The Power of Song 265
Talent of Singing—One night I seemed to be in a council meet-

ing where these matters [the place to give messages of warning and
instruction] were being talked over. And a very grave, dignified
man said, “You are praying for the Lord to raise up men and women
of talent to give themselves to the work. You have talent in your
midst which needs to be recognized.” Several wise propositions were
made and then words were spoken in substance as I write them. He
said, “I call your attention to the singing talent which should be
cultivated; for the human voice in singing is one of God’s entrusted
talents to be employed to His glory. The enemy of righteousness
makes a great account of this talent in his service. And that which is
the gift of God, to be a blessing to souls, is perverted, misapplied, [409]
and serves the purpose of Satan. This talent of voice is a blessing
if consecrated to the Lord to serve His cause. _______ has talent,
but it is not appreciated. Her position should be considered and
her talent will attract the people, and they will hear the message of
truth.—Evangelism, 497, 498.
A Living Connection With God—There must be a living con-
nection with God in prayer, a living connection with God in songs
of praise and thanksgiving.—Evangelism, 498.
Education of the Tongue—If you sit in heavenly places with
Christ, you cannot refrain from praising God. Begin to educate your
tongues to praise Him, and train your hearts to make melody to God;
and when the evil one begins to settle his gloom about you, sing
praise to God.—In Heavenly Places, 95.
Aid in the Resisting of Temptation—Let praise and thanksgiv-
ing be expressed in song. When tempted, instead of giving utterance
to our feelings, let us by faith lift up a song of thanksgiving to God....
Song is a weapon that we can always use against discouragement.
As we thus open the heart to the sunlight of the Saviour’s presence,
we shall have health and His blessing.—The Ministry of Healing,
254.
Means of Victory Over the Enemy—I saw we must be daily
rising, and keep the ascendancy above the powers of darkness. Our
God is mighty. I saw singing to the glory of God often drove [off] [410]
the enemy, and praising God would beat him back and give us the
victory.—Lt 5, 1850.
Effects of Holy Song—Great have been the blessings received

by men in response to songs of praise.... How often in spiritual
experience is this history repeated! How often by words of holy
song are unsealed in the soul the springs of penitence and faith, of
hope and love and joy!—Education, 162.
Way of Making Work Pleasant—Make your work pleasant
with songs of praise.—Child Guidance, 148.
Song in the Home—Evening and morning join with your chil-
dren in God’s worship, reading His Word and singing His praise.
Teach them to repeat God’s law. Concerning the commandments,
the Israelites were instructed: “Thou shalt teach them diligently unto
thy children, and shalt talk of them when thou sittest in thine house,
and when thou walkest by the way, and when thou liest down, and
when thou risest up.” Accordingly, Moses directed the Israelites to
set the words of the law to music....
If it was essential for Moses to embody the commandments in
sacred song, so that as they marched in the wilderness the children
could learn to sing the law verse by verse, how essential it is at this
time to teach our children God’s Word! Let us come up to the help
of the Lord, instructing our children to keep the commandments to
[411] the letter. Let us do everything in our power to make music in our
homes, that God may come in.—Evangelism, 499.
Family Union in Song—Happy the father and mother who can
teach their children God’s written Word with illustrations from the
open pages of the book of nature; who can gather under the green
trees, in the fresh, pure air, to study the Word and to sing the praise
of the Father above. By such associations parents may bind their
children to their hearts, and thus to God, by ties that can never be
broken.—Education, 251.
Songs by Children—Let the services be brief and full of life,
adapted to the occasion, and varied from time to time. Let all join
in the Bible reading, and learn and often repeat God’s law. It will
add to the interest of the children if they are sometimes permitted to
select the reading. Question them upon it, and let them ask questions.
Mention anything that will serve to illustrate its meaning. When the
service is not thus made too lengthy, let the little ones take part in
prayer, and let them join in song, if it be but a single verse.—Child
[412] Guidance, 522.
Chapter 65—Christ’s Singing
Christ a Victor Over Temptation As a Child—When Christ

was a child like these children here, He was tempted to sin, but He
did not yield to temptation. As He grew older He was tempted, but
the songs His mother had taught Him to sing came into His mind,
and He would lift His voice in praise. And before His companions
were aware of it, they would be singing with Him. God wants us
to use every facility which Heaven has provided for resisting the
enemy.—Manuscript 65, 1901.
Songs of Faith and Holy Cheer—With a song, Jesus in His
earthly life met temptation. Often when sharp, stinging words were
spoken, often when the atmosphere about Him was heavy with
gloom, with dissatisfaction, distrust, or oppressive fear, was heard
His song of faith and holy cheer.—Education, 166.
Communion With Heaven Through Song—Christ descended
to poverty that He might teach how closely in our daily life we may
walk with God. He took human nature that He might be able to
sympathize with all hearts. He was capable of sympathizing with [413]
all. He could engage in toil, bear His part in sustaining the family in
their necessity, become accustomed to weariness, and yet show no
impatience. His spirit was never so full of worldly cares as to leave
no time nor thought for heavenly things. He often held communion
with heaven in song. The men of Nazareth often heard His voice
raised in prayer and thanksgiving to God; and those who associated
with Him, who often complained of their weariness, were cheered by
the sweet melody that fell from His lips.—The Review and Herald,
October 24, 1899.
At the Start of the Day—The early morning often found Him
in some secluded place, meditating, searching the Scriptures, or
in prayer. With the voice of singing He welcomed the morning
light. With songs of thanksgiving He cheered His hours of labor and
brought heaven’s gladness to the toilworn and disheartened.—The
267
As Incense, the Fragrance of Singing—Often He expressed

the gladness of His heart by singing psalms and heavenly songs.
Often the dwellers in Nazareth heard His voice raised in praise and
thanksgiving to God. He held communion with heaven in song; and
as His companions complained of weariness from labor, they were
cheered by the sweet melody from His lips. His praise seemed to
banish the evil angels, and, like incense, fill the place with fragrance.
The minds of His hearers were carried away from their earthly exile,
[414] to the heavenly home.—The Desire of Ages, 73, 74.
Chapter 66—Voice Culture and Song
A Subject for Every School—I am glad that a musical element

has been brought into the Healdsburg School. In every school,
instruction in singing is greatly needed. There should be much
more interest in voice culture than is now generally manifested.
Students who have learned to sing sweet gospel songs with melody
and distinctness, can do much good as singing evangelists. They will
find many opportunities to use the talent that God has given them,
carrying melody and sunshine into many lonely places darkened
by sin and sorrow and affliction, singing to those who seldom have
church privileges.—The Review and Herald, August 27, 1903.
Correct Intonation and Pronunciation—No words can prop-
erly set forth the deep blessedness of genuine worship. When human
beings sing with the spirit and the understanding, heavenly musi-
cians take up the strain and join in the song of thanksgiving. He
who has bestowed upon us all the gifts that enable us to be workers
together with God, expects His servants to cultivate their voices
so that they can speak and sing in a way that all can understand. [415]
It is not loud singing that is needed, but clear intonation, correct
pronunciation, and distinct utterance. Let all take time to cultivate
the voice so that God’s praise can be sung in clear, soft tones, not
with harshness and shrillness that offend the ear. The ability to sing
is the gift of God; let it be used to His glory.—Testimonies for the
Church 9:143, 144.
Beauty, Pathos, and Power—Music can be a great power for
good; yet we do not make the most of this branch of worship. The
singing is generally done from impulse or to meet special cases, and
at other times those who sing are left to blunder along, and the music
loses its proper effect upon the minds of those present. Music should
have beauty, pathos, and power. Let the voices be lifted in songs of
praise and devotion. Call to your aid, if practicable, instrumental
music, and let the glorious harmony ascend to God, an acceptable
offering.
269
But it is sometimes more difficult to discipline the singers and

keep them in working order, than to improve the habits of praying
and exhorting. Many want to do things after their own style; they
object to consultation, and are impatient under leadership. Well-
matured plans are needed in the service of God. Common sense is
an excellent thing in the worship of the Lord.—Evangelism, 505.
Characteristics of Good Singing—Great improvement can be
made in singing. Some think that the louder they sing the more
music they make; but noise is not music. Good singing is like the
[416] music of the birds—subdued and melodious.
In some of our churches I have heard solos that were altogether
unsuitable for the service in the Lord’s house. The long-drawn-out
notes and the peculiar sounds common in operatic singing are not
pleasing to the angels. They delight to hear the simple songs of
praise sung in a natural tone. The songs in which every word is
uttered clearly, in a musical tone, are the songs that they join us in
singing. They take up the refrain that is sung from the heart with the
spirit and the understanding.—Evangelism, 510.
Solemnity and Awe—The melody of song, poured forth from
many hearts in clear, distinct utterance, is one of God’s instrumental-
ities in the work of saving souls. All the service should be conducted
with solemnity and awe, as if in the visible presence of the Master
of assemblies.—Testimonies for the Church 5:493.
Music a Part of God’s Worship Above—Music forms a part of
God’s worship in the courts above. We should endeavor in our songs
of praise to approach as nearly as possible to the harmony of the
heavenly choirs. I have often been pained to hear untrained voices,
pitched to the highest key, literally shrieking the sacred words of
some hymn of praise. How inappropriate those sharp, rasping voices
for the solemn, joyous worship of God. I long to stop my ears,
or flee from the place, and I rejoice when the painful exercise is
[417] ended.—Evangelism, 507, 508.
Chapter 67—Wrong Use of the Voice in Music
Bedlam of Noise—The things you have described as taking

place in Indiana, the Lord has shown me would take place just before
the close of probation. Every uncouth thing will be demonstrated.
There will be shouting, with drums, music, and dancing.
The senses of rational beings will become so confused that they
cannot be trusted to make right decisions. And this is called the
moving of the Holy Spirit.
The Holy Spirit never reveals itself in such methods, in such a
bedlam of noise. This is an invention of Satan to cover up his inge-
nious methods for making of none effect the pure, sincere, elevating,
ennobling, sanctifying truth for this time. Better never have the
worship of God blended with music than to use musical instruments
to do the work which last January was represented to me would
be brought into our camp meetings. The truth for this time needs
nothing of this kind in its work of converting souls. A bedlam of
noise shocks the senses and perverts that which if conducted aright
might be a blessing. The powers of satanic agencies blend with the
din and noise, to have a carnival, and this is termed the Holy Spirit’s [418]
working....
No encouragement should be given to this kind of worship. The
same kind of influence came in after the passing of the time in
1844. The same kind of representations were made. Men became
excited, and were worked by a power thought to be the power of
God.—Selected Messages 2:36, 37.
Satan’s Snare—The Holy Spirit has nothing to do with such a
confusion of noise and multitude of sounds as passed before me last
January. Satan works amid the din and confusion of such music,
which, properly conducted, would be a praise and glory to God. He
makes its effect like the poison sting of the serpent.
Those things which have been in the past will be in the fu-
ture. Satan will make music a snare by the way in which it is
conducted.—Selected Messages 2:37, 38.
271
Songs to Make Angels Weep—There has been a class of social

gatherings in of an entirely different character, parties of pleasure
that have been a disgrace to our institutions and to the church. They
encourage pride of dress, pride of appearance, self-gratification,
hilarity, and trifling. Satan is entertained as an honored guest, and
takes possession of those who patronize these gatherings.
A view of one such company was presented to me, where were
assembled those who profess to believe the truth. One was seated
at the instrument of music, and such songs were poured forth as
[419] made the watching angels weep. There was mirth, there was coarse
laughter, there was abundance of enthusiasm, and a kind of inspi-
ration; but the joy was such as Satan only is able to create. This
is an enthusiasm and infatuation of which all who love God will
be ashamed. It prepares the participants for unholy thought and
action. I have reason to think that some who were engaged in that
scene heartily repented of the shameful performance.—Counsels to
Frivolous Songs and Popular Sheet Music—I feel alarmed as
I witness everywhere the frivolity of young men and young women
who profess to believe the truth. God does not seem to be in their
thoughts. Their minds are filled with nonsense. Their conversation
is only empty, vain talk. They have a keen ear for music, and Satan
knows what organs to excite to animate, engross, and charm the
mind so that Christ is not desired. The spiritual longings of the soul
for divine knowledge, for a growth in grace, are wanting.
I was shown that the youth must take a higher stand and make
the Word of God the man of their counsel and their guide. Solemn
responsibilities rest upon the young, which they lightly regard. The
introduction of music into their homes, instead of inciting to holiness
and spirituality, has been the means of diverting their minds from
the truth. Frivolous songs and the popular sheet music of the day
seem congenial to their taste. The instruments of music have taken
[420] time which should have been devoted to prayer.
Music, when not abused, is a great blessing; but when put to
a wrong use, it is a terrible curse. It excites, but does not impart
that strength and courage which the Christian can find only at the
throne of grace while humbly making known his wants and with
strong cries and tears pleading for heavenly strength to be fortified
Chapter 67—Wrong Use of the Voice in Music 273
against the powerful temptations of the evil one. Satan is leading

the young captive. Oh, what can I say to lead them to break his
power of infatuation! He is a skillful charmer, luring them on to
perdition.—Testimonies for the Church 1:496, 497.
Worship of Music As an Idol—Eternal things have little weight
with the youth. Angels of God are in tears as they write in the roll the
words and acts of professed Christians. Angels are hovering around
yonder dwelling. The young are there assembled; there is the sound
of vocal and instrumental music. Christians are gathered there, but
what is that you hear? It is a song, a frivolous ditty, fit for the dance
hall. Behold the pure angels gather their light closer around them,
and darkness envelops those in that dwelling. The angels are moving
from the scene. Sadness is upon their countenances. Behold, they
are weeping. This I saw repeated a number of times all through the
ranks of Sabbathkeepers, and especially in _______.
Music has occupied the hours which should have been devoted
to prayer. Music is the idol which many professed Sabbathkeeping
Christians worship. Satan has no objection to music if he can make [421]
that a channel through which to gain access to the minds of the
youth.
Anything will suit his purpose that will divert the mind from
God and engage the time which should be devoted to His service.
He works through the means which will exert the strongest influence
to hold the largest numbers in a pleasing infatuation, while they are
paralyzed by his power.
When turned to good account, music is a blessing; but it is often
made one of Satan’s most attractive agencies to ensnare souls. When
abused, it leads the unconsecrated to pride, vanity, and folly. When
allowed to take the place of devotion and prayer, it is a terrible curse.
Young persons assemble to sing, and, although professed Chris-
tians, frequently dishonor God and their faith by their frivolous
conversation and their choice of music. Sacred music is not con-
genial to their taste. I was directed to the plain teachings of God’s
Word, which have been passed by unnoticed. In the judgment all
these words of inspiration will condemn those who have not heeded
them.—Testimonies for the Church 1:505, 506.
Forbidden Pleasures—What a contrast between the ancient
custom and the uses to which music is now too often devoted! How
many employ this gift to exalt self, instead of using it to glorify

God! A love for music leads the unwary to unite with world-lovers
in pleasure-gatherings where God has forbidden His children to go.
Thus that which is a great blessing when rightly used, becomes one
[422] of the most successful agencies by which Satan allures the mind
from duty and from the contemplation of eternal things.—Patriarchs
and Prophets, 594.
Ambition for Display—Musical entertainments which, if con-
ducted properly, will do no harm, are often a source of evil. In
the present state of society, with the low morals of not only youth
but those of age and experience, there is great danger of becoming
careless, and giving especial attention to favorites, and thus creating
envy, jealousies, and evil surmisings. Musical talent too often fosters
pride and ambition for display, and singers have but little thought of
the worship of God. Instead of leading minds to remembering God,
it often causes them to forget Him.—Lt 6a, 1890.
Counsel to Music Leaders—I was taken into some of your
singing exercises, and was made to read the feelings that existed in
the company, you being the prominent one. There were petty jeal-
ousies, envy, evil surmisings, and evil speaking.... The heart service
is what God requires; the forms and lip service are as sounding brass
and a tinkling cymbal. Your singing is for display, not to praise God
with the spirit and understanding. The state of the heart reveals the
quality of the religion of the professor of godliness.—Evangelism,
507.
God’s Choice of Singing—Singing is just as much the worship
of God in a religious meeting as speaking, and any oddity or pe-
[423] culiarity cultivated attracts the attention of the people and destroys
the serious, solemn impression which should be the result of sacred
music. Anything strange and eccentric in singing detracts from the
seriousness and sacredness of religious service.
Bodily exercise profiteth little. Everything that is connected
in any way with religious worship should be dignified, solemn,
and impressive. God is not pleased when ministers professing to
be Christ’s representatives so misrepresent Christ as to throw the
body into acting attitudes, making undignified and coarse gestures,
unrefined, coarse gesticulations. All this amuses, and will excite the
curiosity of those who wish to see strange, odd, and exciting things,
but these things will not elevate the minds and hearts of those who
witness them.
The very same may be said of singing. You assume undignified
attitudes. You put in all the power and volume of the voice you can.
You drown the finer strains and notes of voices more musical than
your own. This bodily exercise and the harsh, loud voice makes no
melody to those who hear on earth and those who listen in heaven.
This singing is defective and not acceptable to God as perfect, soft-
ened, sweet strains of music. There are no such exhibitions among
the angels as I have sometimes seen in our meetings. Such harsh
notes and gesticulations are not exhibited among the angel choir.
Their singing does not grate upon the ear. It is soft and melodious
and comes without this great effort I have witnessed. It is not forced
and strained, requiring physical exercise. [424]
Brother S is not aware how many are amused and disgusted.
Some cannot repress thoughts not very sacred and feelings of levity
to see the unrefined motions made in the singing. Brother S exhibits
himself. His singing does not have an influence to subdue the heart
and touch the feelings. Many have attended the meetings and listened
to the words of truth spoken from the pulpit, which have convicted
and solemnized their minds; but many times the way the singing
has been conducted has not deepened the impression made. The
demonstrations and bodily contortions, the unpleasant appearance
of the strained, forced effort has appeared so out of place for the
house of God, so comical, that the serious impressions made upon
the minds have been removed. Those who believe the truth are not
as highly thought of as before the singing....
He [Brother S] has thought that singing was about the greatest
thing to be done in this world and that he had a very large and grand
way of doing it.
Your singing is far from pleasing to the angel choir. Imagine
yourself standing in the angel band elevating your shoulders, em-
phasizing the words, motioning your body and putting in the full
volume of your voice. What kind of concert and harmony would
there be with such an exhibition before the angels?
Music is of heavenly origin. There is great power in music. It
was music from the angelic throng that thrilled the hearts of the
shepherds on Bethlehem’s plains and swept round the world. It is in
[425] music that our praises rise to Him who is the embodiment of purity
and harmony. It is with music and songs of victory that the redeemed
shall finally enter upon the immortal reward.
There is something peculiarly sacred in the human voice. Its
harmony and its subdued and heaven-inspired pathos exceeds every
musical instrument. Vocal music is one of God’s gifts to men, an
instrument that cannot be surpassed or equaled when God’s love
abounds in the soul. Singing with the spirit and the understanding
also is a great addition to devotional services in the house of God.
How this gift has been debased! When sanctified and refined
it would accomplish great good in breaking down the barriers of
prejudice and hardhearted unbelief, and would be the means of
converting souls. It is not enough to understand the rudiments of
singing, but with the understanding, with the knowledge, must be
such a connection with heaven that angels can sing through us.
Your voice has been heard in church so loud, so harsh, accompa-
nied or set off with your gesticulations not the most graceful, that
the softer and more silvery strains, more like angel music, could not
be heard. You have sung more to men than to God.
As your voice had been elevated in loud strains above all the
congregation, you have been thoughtful of the admiration you were
exciting. You have really had such high ideas of your singing, that
you have had some thoughts that you should be remunerated for the
[426] exercise of this gift.—Manuscript 5, 1874.
Tendency Toward Extremes—Singing should not be allowed
to divert the mind from the hours of devotion. If one must be ne-
glected, let it be the singing. It is one of the great temptations of
the present age to carry the practice of music to extremes, to make
a great deal more of music than of prayer. Many souls have been
ruined here. When the Spirit of God is arousing the conscience and
convicting of sin, Satan suggests a singing exercise or a singing
school, which, being conducted in a light and trifling manner, results
in banishing seriousness, and quenching all desire for the Spirit of
God. Thus the door of the heart, which was about to be opened to
Jesus, is closed and barricaded with pride and stubbornness, in many
cases never again to be opened.
By the temptations attending these singing exercises, many who
were once really converted to the truth have been led to separate
themselves from God. They have chosen singing before prayer,

attending singing schools in preference to religious meetings, until
the truth no longer exerts its sanctifying power upon their souls.
Such singing is an offense to God.—The Review and Herald, July
24, 1883. [427]
Chapter 68—Singing That Is to God’s Glory
Music in Heaven—I saw the beauty of heaven. I heard the

angels sing their rapturous songs, ascribing praise, honor, and glory
to Jesus. I could then realize something of the wondrous love of the
Son of God.—Testimonies for the Church 1:123.
Angel Instrumentalists—I have been shown the order, the per-
fect order, of heaven, and have been enraptured as I listened to the
perfect music there. After coming out of vision, the singing here
has sounded very harsh and discordant. I have seen companies of
angels, who stood in a hollow square, every one having a harp of
gold. At the end of the harp was an instrument to turn to set the harp
or change the tunes. Their fingers did not sweep over the strings
carelessly, but they touched different strings to produce different
sounds. There is one angel who always leads, who first touches
the harp and strikes the note, then all join in the rich, perfect music
of heaven. It cannot be described. It is melody, heavenly, divine,
while from every countenance beams the image of Jesus, shining
[428] with glory unspeakable.—Testimonies for the Church 1:146.
Enchanting Music in Melodious Strains—Let those men and
women who are satisfied with their dwarfed, crippled condition
in divine things be suddenly transported to heaven and for an in-
stant witness the high, the holy state of perfection that ever abides
there—every soul filled with love; every countenance beaming with
joy; enchanting music in melodious strains rising in honor of God
and the Lamb.—Testimonies for the Church 2:266.
Influence of Songs on Lucifer—The angels joyfully acknowl-
edged the supremacy of Christ, and prostrating themselves before
Him, poured out their love and adoration. Lucifer bowed with them;
but in his heart there was a strange, fierce conflict. Truth, justice,
and loyalty were struggling against envy and jealousy. The influence
of the holy angels seemed for a time to carry him with them. As
songs of praise ascended in melodious strains, swelled by thousands
of glad voices, the spirit of evil seemed vanquished; unutterable
278
Chapter 68—Singing That Is to God’s Glory 279
love thrilled his entire being; his soul went out, in harmony with the
sinless worshipers, in love to the Father and the Son.—Patriarchs
and Prophets, 36, 37.
Angel Choir at Jesus’ Birth—Then was the melody of heaven
heard by mortal ears, and the heavenly choir swept back to heaven
as they closed their ever memorable anthem. The light faded away
... but there remained in the hearts of the shepherds the brightest
picture mortal man had ever looked upon, and the blessed promise
and assurance of the advent to our world of the Saviour of men,
which filled their hearts with joy and gladness, mingled with faith [429]
and wondrous love to God.—My Life Today, 363.
Singing at Jesus’ Resurrection—As Jesus came forth from the
sepulcher, those shining angels prostrated themselves to the earth in
worship, and hailed Him with songs of victory and triumph.—Early
Writings, 182.
Redeemed Souls a Subject for Song—The soul redeemed and
cleansed from sin, with all its noble powers dedicated to the service
of God, is of surpassing worth; and there is joy in heaven in the
presence of God and the holy angels over one soul redeemed, a joy
that is expressed in songs of holy triumph.—Steps to Christ, 126.
In Our Homes the Echo of Angel Songs—As our Redeemer
leads us to the threshold of the Infinite, flushed with the glory of
God, we may catch the themes of praise and thanksgiving from the
heavenly choir round about the throne; and as the echo of the angels’
song is awakened in our earthly homes, hearts will be drawn closer
to the heavenly singers. Heaven’s communion begins on earth. We
learn here the keynote of its praise.—Education, 168.
Thanksgiving the Keynote of Heaven—Difficulties will arise
that will try your faith and patience. Face them bravely. Look on the
bright side. If the work is hindered, be sure that it is not your fault,
and then go forward, rejoicing in the Lord. Heaven is full of joy. It
resounds with the praises of Him who made so wonderful a sacrifice [430]
for the redemption of the human race. Should not the church on
earth be full of praise? Should not Christians publish throughout the
world the joy of serving Christ? Those who in heaven join with the
angelic choir in their anthem of praise must learn on earth the song
of heaven, the keynote of which is thanksgiving.—Testimonies for
the Church 7:244.
Songs of Heaven—They [many professed Christians] know not

the language of heaven and are not educating their minds so as to
be prepared to sing the songs of heaven or to delight in the spiritual
exercises which will there engage the attention of all.—Testimonies
Praise to God—“Whoso offereth praise,” says the Creator, “glo-
rifieth Me.” All the inhabitants of heaven unite in praising God. Let
us learn the song of the angels now, that we may sing it when we
join their shining ranks. Let us say with the psalmist, “While I live,
will I praise the Lord: I will sing praises unto my God while I have
any being.” “Let the people praise Thee, O God; let all the people
praise Thee.”—Patriarchs and Prophets, 289, 290.
Worship in the Heavenly Courts—Music forms a part of God’s
worship in the courts above, and we should endeavor, in our songs
of praise, to approach as nearly as possible to the harmony of the
heavenly choirs. The proper training of the voice is an important
feature in education, and should not be neglected.—The Signs of
[431] the Times, March 14, 1900.
Songs of Saints and Angels—If the saints fixed their eyes upon
the prize before them and glorified God by praising Him, then the
angels would bear the glad tidings to the city, and the angels in
the city would touch their golden harps and sing with a loud voice,
“Alleluia!” and the heavenly arches would ring with their lovely
songs.—Early Writings, 39.
Mercy on Earth, Music in Heaven—As you open your door to
Christ’s needy and suffering ones, you are welcoming unseen angels.
You invite the companionship of heavenly beings. They bring a
sacred atmosphere of joy and peace. They come with praises upon
their lips, and an answering strain is heard in heaven. Every deed of
mercy makes music there. The Father from His throne numbers the
unselfish workers among His most precious treasures.—The Desire
of Ages, 639.
Preparation for Heaven—To the humble, believing soul, the
house of God on earth is the gate of heaven. The song of praise,
the prayer, the words spoken by Christ’s representatives, are God’s
appointed agencies to prepare a people for the church above, for
that loftier worship into which there can enter nothing that de-
[432] fileth.—Testimonies for the Church 5:491.
Chapter 69—Song a Part of Worship
An Act of Worship Like Prayer—Singing, as a part of re-

ligious service, is as much an act of worship as is prayer. The
heart must feel the spirit of the song, to give it right expres-
sion.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 594.
Meaning of Words in Songs—As a part of religious service,
singing is as much an act of worship as is prayer. Indeed, many a
song is prayer. If the child is taught to realize this, he will think more
of the meaning of the words he sings and will be more susceptible
to their power.—Education, 168.
Preparation for the Church Above—God is high and holy;
and to the humble, believing soul, His house on earth, the place
where His people meet for worship, is as the gate of heaven. The
song of praise, the words spoken by Christ’s ministers, are God’s
appointed agencies to prepare a people for the church above, for that
loftier worship.—The Youth’s Instructor, October 8, 1896.
Angels in Our Church Audience—Let us all bear in mind
that in every assembly of the saints below are angels of God, lis-
tening to the testimonies, songs, and prayers. Let us remember [433]
that our praises are supplemented by the choirs of the angelic host
above.—Testimonies for the Church 6:367.
Theme of Every Song—The science of salvation is to be the
burden of every sermon, the theme of every song. Let it be poured
forth in every supplication.—Evangelism, 502.
Sing With Spirit and Understanding—The evil of formal wor-
ship cannot be too strongly depicted, but no words can properly set
forth the deep blessedness of genuine worship. When human beings
sing with the spirit and the understanding, heavenly musicians take
up the strain and join in the song of thanksgiving. He who has
bestowed upon us all the gifts that enable us to be workers together
with God, expects His servants to cultivate their voices so that they
can speak and sing in a way that all can understand. It is not loud
singing that is needed, but clear intonation, correct pronunciation,
281
and distinct utterance. Let all take time to cultivate the voice so that
God’s praise can be sung in clear, soft tones, not with harshness and
shrillness that offend the ear. The ability to sing is the gift of God;
let it be used to His glory.—Testimonies for the Church 9:143, 144.
Beauty in Singing Not Everything—Many are singing beauti-
ful songs in the meetings, songs of what they will do, and what they
mean to do; but some do not do these things; they do not sing with
[434] the spirit and the understanding also. So in the reading of the Word
of God, some are not benefited, because they do not take it into their
very life; they do not practice it.—Evangelism, 508.
Hymns for the Occasion—Those who make singing a part of di-
vine worship should select hymns with music appropriate to the occa-
sion, not funeral notes, but cheerful, yet solemn, melodies. The voice
can and should be modulated, softened, and subdued.—Evangelism,
508.
Congregational Hymns—Another matter which should receive
attention, both at our camp meetings and elsewhere, is that of singing.
A minister should not give out hymns to be sung, until it has first
been ascertained that they are familiar to those who sing. A proper
person should be appointed to take charge of this exercise, and it
should be his duty to see that such hymns are selected as can be
sung with the spirit and with the understanding also. Singing is a
part of the worship of God, but in the bungling manner in which
it is often conducted, it is no credit to the truth, and no honor to
God. There should be system and order in this as well as every other
part of the Lord’s work. Organize a company of the best singers,
whose voices can lead the congregation, and then let all who will,
unite with them. Those who sing should make an effort to sing in
harmony; they should devote some time to practice, that they may
employ this talent to the glory of God.—The Review and Herald,
[435] July 24, 1883.
Song Service for Everyone—There should be in the meetings
nothing of a theatrical nature. The singing should not be done by
a few only. All present should be encouraged to join in the song
service. There are those who have a special gift of song, and there
are times when a special message is borne by one singing alone or
by several uniting in song. But the singing is seldom to be done by
a few. The ability to sing is a talent of influence, which God desires
Chapter 69—Song a Part of Worship 283
all to cultivate and use to His name’s glory.—Testimonies for the

Church 7:115, 116.
Sweet, Simple Singing—How can God be glorified when you
depend for your singing on a worldly choir that sings for money?
My brother, when you see these things in a right light, you will
have in your meetings only sweet, simple singing, and you will
ask the whole congregation to join in the song. What if among
those present there are some whose voices are not so musical as the
voices of others. When the singing is such that angels can unite
with the singers, an impression is made on minds that singing from
unsanctified lips cannot make.—Evangelism, 509.
Charm of Congregational Singing—In the meetings held, the
singing should not be neglected. God can be glorified by this part
of the service. And when singers offer their services, they should
be accepted. But money should not be used to hire singers. Often
the singing of simple hymns by the congregation has a charm that
is not possessed by the singing of a choir, however skilled it may [436]
be.—Evangelism, 509.
God’s Kingdom More Than Mere Form—Form and cere-
mony do not constitute the kingdom of God. Ceremonies become
multitudinous and extravagant as the vital principles of the king-
dom of God are lost. But it is not form and ceremony that Christ
requires. He hungers to receive from His vineyard fruit in holiness
and unselfishness, deeds of goodness, mercy, and truth.
Gorgeous apparel, fine singing, and instrumental music in the
church do not call forth the songs of the angel choir. In the sight
of God these things are like the branches of the unfruitful fig tree
which bore nothing but pretentious leaves. Christ looks for fruit,
for principles of goodness and sympathy and love. These are the
principles of heaven, and when they are revealed in the lives of
human beings, we may know that Christ is formed within, the hope
of glory. A congregation may be the poorest in the land, without
music or outward show, but if it possesses these principles, the
members can sing, for the joy of Christ is in their souls, and this
they can offer as a sweet oblation to God.—Evangelism, 511, 512.
Song Service Not a Concert---The presentation before me was
that if Elder _____ would heed the counsel of his brethren, and
not rush on in the way he does in making a great effort to secure
large congregations, he would have more influence for good, and

[437] his work would have a more telling effect. He should cut off from
his meetings everything that has a semblance of theatrical display;
for such outward appearances give no strength to the message that
he bears. When the Lord can cooperate with him, his work will not
need to be done in so expensive a manner. He will not need then
to go to so much expense in advertising his meetings. He will not
place so much dependence on the musical program. This part of his
services is conducted more after the order of a concert in a theater,
than a song service in a religious meeting.—Evangelism, 501.
God’s Preference in Music—The superfluities which have been
brought into the worship in ______ must be strenuously avoided....
Music is acceptable to God only when the heart is sanctified and
made soft and holy by its facilities. But many who delight in music
know nothing of making melody in their hearts to the Lord. Their
heart is gone “after their idols.”—Evangelism, 512.
Rubbish in the Church—When professing Christians reach the
high standard which it is their privilege to reach, the simplicity of
Christ will be maintained in all their worship. Forms and ceremonies
and musical accomplishments are not the strength of the church. Yet
these things have taken the place that God should have, even as they
did in the worship of the Jews.
The Lord has revealed to me that when the heart is cleansed and
sanctified, and the members of the church are partakers of the divine
[438] nature, a power will go forth from the church, who believe the truth,
that will cause melody in the heart. Men and women will not then
depend upon their instrumental music but on the power and grace of
God, which will give fullness of joy. There is a work to be done in
clearing away the rubbish which has been brought into the church....
This message is not only for the church at _______, but for every
other church that has followed her example.—Evangelism, 512.
Simplicity in Religious Services—True ministers know the
value of the inward working of the Holy Spirit upon human hearts.
They are content with simplicity in religious services. Instead of
making much of popular singing, they give their principal attention
to the study of the Word, and render praise to God from the heart.
Above the outward adorning they regard the inward adorning, the
Chapter 69—Song a Part of Worship 285
ornament of a meek and quiet spirit. In their mouths is found no

guile.—Evangelism, 502.
Work of the Holy Spirit—The hearts of many in the world as
well as many church members are hungering for the Bread of Life
and thirsting for the waters of salvation. They are interested in the
service of song, but they are not longing for that or even prayer.
They want to know the Scriptures. What saith the Word of God to
me? The Holy Spirit is working on mind and heart, drawing them
to the Bread of Life. They see everything round them changing.
Human feelings, human ideas of what constitutes religion, change.
They come to hear the Word just as it reads.—Evangelism, 501. [439]
Proper Balance in Camp Meetings—Improvements can be
made in our manner of conducting camp meetings, so that all who
attend may receive more direct labor. There are some social meetings
held in the large tent, where all assemble for worship; but these are
so large that only a small number can take part, and many speak
so low that but few can hear them.... In some instances much time
was devoted to singing. There was a long hymn before prayer, a
long hymn after prayer, and much singing interspersed all through
the meeting. Thus golden moments were used unwisely, and not
one-half the good was done that might have been realized had these
precious seasons been properly managed.—Evangelism, 511.
Instrumental Accompaniment—In our camp meeting services
there should be singing and instrumental music. Musical instruments
were used in religious services in ancient times. The worshipers
praised God upon the harp and cymbal, and music should have its
place in our services. It will add to the interest.—Testimonies for
the Church 6:62.
Care in the Conduct of Song Service—In the meetings held,
let a number be chosen to take part in the song service. And let the
singing be accompanied with musical instruments skillfully handled.
We are not to oppose the use of instruments of music in our work.
This part of the service is to be carefully conducted; for it is the [440]
praise of God in song. The singing is not always to be done by a
few. As often as possible, let the entire congregation join.—Gospel
Workers, 357, 358. [441]
Chapter 70—Singing a Means of Witness
Instrumentality for Salvation—The melody of song, poured

forth from many hearts in clear, distinct utterance, is one of God’s
instrumentalities in the work of saving souls.—Testimonies for the
Church 5:493.
Power for Winning Souls—There is great pathos and music in
the human voice, and if the learner will make determined efforts, he
will acquire habits of talking and singing that will be to him a power
to win souls to Christ.—Evangelism, 504.
Gifts From God—Your voice, your influence, your time—all
these are gifts from God and are to be used in winning souls to
Christ.—Testimonies for the Church 9:38.
Singing Evangelists—In the evening a large audience assem-
bled in the church to listen to a musical program rendered by Brother
Beardslee and his pupils. Good singing is an important part of the
worship of God. I am glad that Brother Beardslee is training the
students, so that they can be singing evangelists.—Fundamentals of
[442] Song in Home Visitation—Learn to sing the simplest of songs.
These will help you in house-to-house labor, and hearts will be
touched by the influence of the Holy Spirit. Christ was often heard
singing hymns of praise.... There was joy in His heart. We learn
from the Word that there is joy among the angels of heaven over
one repentant sinner and that the Lord rejoices over His church with
singing.—My Life Today, 238.
Youth Singing for Higher Classes—Students, go out into the
highways and the hedges. Endeavor to reach the higher as well as
the lower classes. Enter the homes of the rich and the poor, and
as you have opportunity ask, “Would you be pleased to have us
sing? We should be glad to hold a song service with you.” Then
as hearts are softened, the way may open for you to offer a few
words of prayer for the blessing of God. Not many will refuse. Such
ministry is genuine missionary work. God desires every one of us to
286
Chapter 70—Singing a Means of Witness 287
be converted, and to learn to engage in missionary effort in earnest.

He will bless us in this service for others, and we shall see of His
salvation.—The Review and Herald, August 27, 1903.
Song Service During Travel—On Sabbath we had a song ser-
vice. Brother Lawrence, who is a musician, led the singing. All the
passengers in the car seemed to enjoy the service greatly, many of
them joining in the singing.
On Sunday we had another song service, after which Elder
Corliss gave a short talk, taking as his text the words, “Behold, what
manner of love the Father hath bestowed upon us, that we should [443]
be called the sons of God.” The passengers listened attentively and
seemed to enjoy what was said.
On Monday we had more singing, and we all seemed to be
drawing closer together.—Evangelism, 503.
Angels As Teachers of Singing—Those who have the gift of
song are needed. Song is one of the most effective means of impress-
ing spiritual truth upon the heart. Often by the words of sacred songs
the springs of penitence and faith have been unsealed.... Church
members, young and old, should be educated to go forth to proclaim
this last message to the world. If they go in humility, angels of
God will go with them, teaching them how to lift up the voice in
prayer, how to raise the voice in song, and how to proclaim the
gospel message for this time.—My Life Today, 238. [444]
Chapter 71—Singing in Israel’s Experience
Song and Events of Human History—The melody of praise is

the atmosphere of heaven; and when heaven comes in touch with
the earth, there is music and song—“thanksgiving, and the voice of
melody.” Isaiah 51:3.
Above the new-created earth, as it lay, fair and unblemished,
under the smile of God, “the morning stars sang together, and all
the sons of God shouted for joy.” Job 38:7. So human hearts, in
sympathy with heaven, have responded to God’s goodness in notes
of praise. Many of the events of human history have been linked
with song.—Education, 161.
Red Sea Crossing—The earliest song recorded in the Bible
from the lips of man was that glorious outburst of thanksgiving by
the hosts of Israel at the Red Sea.—Education, 162.
Miriam As Choir Leader—Like the voice of the great deep
rose from the vast hosts of Israel that sublime ascription. [See
Exodus 15:1-16.] It was taken up by the women of Israel, Miriam,
[445] the sister of Moses, leading the way, as they went forth with timbrel
and dance. Far over desert and sea rang the joyous refrain, and the
mountains re-echoed the words of their praise—“Sing ye to Jehovah,
for He hath triumphed gloriously.”—Patriarchs and Prophets, 288,
289.
Song of Moses—These words [the song of Moses] were re-
peated unto all Israel, and formed a song which was often sung,
poured forth in exalted strains of melody. This was the wisdom of
Moses to present the truth to them in song, that in strains of melody
they should become familiar with them, and be impressed upon
the minds of the whole nation, young and old. It was important
for the children to learn the song; for this would speak to them,
to warn, to restrain, to reprove, and encourage. It was a continual
sermon.—Evangelism, 496, 497.
Songs as Prophecy—The more deeply to impress these truths
[In Moses’ farewell speech to the children of Israel, he set before
288
Chapter 71—Singing in Israel’s Experience 289
them the results of obedience versus disobedience, a choice between

life and death.] upon all minds, the great leader embodied them in
sacred verse. This song was not only historical, but prophetic. While
it recounted the wonderful dealings of God with his people in the
past, it also foreshadowed the great events of the future, the final
victory of the faithful when Christ shall come the second time in
power and glory. The people were directed to commit to memory this
poetic history, and to teach it to their children and children’s children.
It was to be chanted by the congregation when they assembled for
worship, and to be repeated by the people as they went about their [446]
daily labors.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 467, 468.
God’s Commandments in Song—As the people journeyed
through the wilderness, many precious lessons were fixed in their
minds by means of song. At their deliverance from Pharaoh’s army
the whole host of Israel had joined in the song of triumph. Far over
desert and sea rang the joyous refrain, and the mountains re-echoed
the accents of praise, “Sing ye to the Lord, for He hath triumphed
gloriously.” Exodus 15:21. Often on the journey was this song re-
peated, cheering the hearts and kindling the faith of the pilgrim
travelers. The commandments as given from Sinai, with promises
of God’s favor and records of His wonderful works for their deliver-
ance, were by divine direction expressed in song, and were chanted
to the sound of instrumental music, the people keeping step as their
voices united in praise.
Thus their thoughts were uplifted from the trials and difficulties
of the way, the restless, turbulent spirit was soothed and calmed,
the principles of truth were implanted in the memory, and faith
was strengthened. Concert of action taught order and unity, and
the people were brought into closer touch with God and with one
another.—Education, 39.
Words of the Law in Music—Moses directed the Israelites to
set the words of the law to music. While the older children played
on instruments, the younger ones marched, singing in concert the
song of God’s commandments. In later years they retained in their [447]
minds the words of the law which they learned during childhood.
If it was essential for Moses to embody the commandments in
sacred song, so that as they marched in the wilderness, the children
could learn to sing the law verse by verse, how essential it is at this
time to teach our children God’s Word! Let us ... do everything

in our power to make music in our homes, that God may come
in.—Evangelism, 499, 500.
Memorial Songs—The dealings of God with His people should
be often repeated.... Lest they should forget the history of the past,
He commanded Moses to frame these events into song, that parents
might teach them to their children.... We need often to recount God’s
goodness and to praise Him for His wonderful works.—Testimonies
Music in the Schools of the Prophets—The chief subjects of
study in these schools were the law of God, with the instruction given
to Moses, sacred history, sacred music, and poetry.... Sanctified
intellect brought forth from the treasure house of God things new
and old, and the Spirit of God was manifested in prophecy and sacred
song.—Education, 47.
Sacred Melody for Students—The art of sacred melody was
diligently cultivated. No frivolous waltz was heard, nor flippant
song that should extol man and divert the attention from God; but
sacred, solemn psalms of praise to the Creator, exalting His name
[448] and recounting His wondrous works. Thus music was made to serve
a holy purpose, to lift the thoughts to that which was pure and noble
and elevating, and to awaken in the soul devotion and gratitude to
God.—Fundamentals of Christian Education, 97, 98.
Music for a Holy Purpose—Music was made to serve a holy
purpose, to lift the thoughts to that which is pure, noble, and elevat-
ing, and to awaken in the soul devotion and gratitude to God. What
a contrast between the ancient custom and the uses to which music
is now too often devoted! How many employ this gift to exalt self,
instead of using it to glorify God! A love for music leads the unwary
to unite with world-lovers in pleasure-gatherings where God has
forbidden His children to go. Thus that which is a great blessing
when rightly used, becomes one of the most successful agencies by
which Satan allures the mind from duty and from the contemplation
of eternal things.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 594.
David’s Psalm a Continuing Inspiration—The communion
with nature and with God ... were not only to mold the character
of David, and to influence his future life, but through the psalms of
Israel’s sweet singer, they were, in all coming ages, to kindle love
and faith in the hearts of God’s people, bringing them nearer to the
ever-loving heart of Him in whom all His creatures live.—Patriarchs
and Prophets, 642.
David’s Worship in Song—Daily revelations of the character
and majesty of his Creator filled the young poet’s heart with ado-
ration and rejoicing. In contemplation of God and His works, the [449]
faculties of David’s mind and heart were developing and strengthen-
ing for the work of his after-life. He was daily coming into a more
intimate communion with God. His mind was constantly penetrating
into new depths for fresh themes to inspire his song and to wake the
music of his harp. The rich melody of his voice, poured out upon
the air, echoed from the hills as if responsive to the rejoicing of the
angels’ songs in heaven.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 642.
Music From Heaven for King Saul—In the providence of God,
David, as a skillful performer upon the harp, was brought before the
king. His lofty and Heaven-inspired strains had the desired effect.
The brooding melancholy that had settled like a dark cloud over the
mind of Saul was charmed away.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 643.
Consolation in Music—He [David] had been in the court of the
king, and had seen the responsibilities of royalty. He had discov-
ered some of the temptations that beset the soul of Saul, and had
penetrated some of the mysteries in the character and dealings of
Israel’s first king. He had seen the glory of royalty shadowed with
a dark cloud of sorrow, and he knew that the household of Saul, in
their private life, were far from happy. All these things served to
bring troubled thoughts to him who had been anointed to be king
over Israel. But while he was absorbed in deep meditation, and
harassed by thoughts of anxiety, he turned to his harp, and called
forth strains that elevated his mind to the Author of every good, and [450]
the dark clouds that seemed to shadow the horizon of the future were
dispelled.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 644.
David as Song Leader—The men of Israel followed, with ex-
ultant shouts and songs of rejoicing, a multitude of voices joining in
melody with the sound of musical instruments; “David and all the
house of Israel played before the Lord ... on harps, and on psalteries,
and on timbrels, and on cornets, and on cymbals.” [See 2 Samuel
6.]—Patriarchs and Prophets, 704, 705.
Music for the Ark Procession—The triumphal procession ap-

proached the capital, following the sacred symbol of their invisible
King. Then a burst of song demanded of the watchers upon the
walls that the gates of the holy city should be thrown open: “Lift up
your heads, O ye gates; And be ye lifted up, ye everlasting doors;
And the King of glory shall come in.” A band of singers and players
answered, “Who is this King of glory?” From another company
came the response, “The Lord strong and mighty, The Lord mighty
in battle.”
Then hundreds of voices, uniting, swelled the triumphal chorus,
“Lift up your heads, O ye gates; Even lift them up, ye everlasting
doors; And the King of glory shall come in.”
Again the joyful interrogation was heard, “Who is this King of
glory?” And the voice of the great multitude, “like the sound of
many waters,” was heard in the rapturous reply, “The Lord of hosts,
[451] He is the King of glory.”—Patriarchs and Prophets, 707, 708.
Songs of David’s Experience—The fifty-first psalm is an ex-
pression of David’s repentance, when the message of reproof came
to him from God.... Thus in a sacred song to be sung in the pub-
lic assemblies of his people, in the presence of the court—priests
and judges, princes and men of war—and which would preserve to
the latest generation the knowledge of his fall, the king of Israel
recounted his sin, his repentance, and his hope of pardon through
the mercy of God.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 724, 725.
Music a Means of Freedom From Idolatry—The service of
song was made a regular part of religious worship, and David com-
posed psalms, not only for the use of the priests in the sanctuary
service, but also to be sung by the people in their journeys to the
national altar at the annual feasts. The influence thus exerted was far-
reaching, and it resulted in freeing the nation from idolatry. Many of
the surrounding peoples, beholding the prosperity of Israel, were led
to think favorably of Israel’s God, who had done such great things
for His people.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 711.
Songs for Deep Trial—What were the feelings of the father
and king, so cruelly wronged, in this terrible peril [the rebellion of
Absalom]? “A mighty valiant man,” a man of war, a king, whose
word was law, betrayed by his son whom he had loved and indulged
and unwisely trusted, wronged and deserted by subjects bound to
him by the strongest ties of honor and fealty—in what words did
David pour out the feelings of his soul? In the hour of his darkest [452]
trial, David’s heart was stayed upon God, and he sang. [See Psalm
3:1-8.]—Patriarchs and Prophets, 741, 742.
Part of the Sanctuary System—In bringing to the temple the
sacred ark containing the two tables of stone on which were written
by the finger of God the precepts of the Decalogue, Solomon had fol-
lowed the example of his father David. Every six paces he sacrificed.
With singing and with music and with great ceremony, “the priests
brought in the ark of the covenant of the Lord unto his place.”...
As they came out of the inner sanctuary, they took the positions
assigned them. The singers—Levites arrayed in white linen, having
cymbals and psalteries and harps—stood at the east end of the altar,
and with them a hundred and twenty priests sounding with trumpets.
[See 2 Chronicles 5:7, 12.]—Prophets and Kings, 38, 39.
Songs for the Battle—“Jehoshaphat bowed his head with his
face to the ground: and all Judah and the inhabitants of Jerusalem
fell before the Lord, worshiping the Lord. And the Levites, of the
children of the Kohathites, and of the children of the Korhites, stood
up to praise the Lord God of Israel with a loud voice on high.”
Early in the morning they rose and went into the wilderness of
Tekoa. As they advanced to the battle, Jehoshaphat said, “Hear me,
O Judah, and ye inhabitants of Jerusalem; Believe in the Lord your
God, so shall ye be established; believe His prophets, so shall ye
prosper.” “And when he had consulted with the people, he appointed
singers unto the Lord, and that should praise the beauty of holiness.” [453]
2 Chronicles 20:14-21. These singers went before the army, lifting
their voices in praise to God for the promise of victory.
It was a singular way of going to battle against the enemy’s
army—praising the Lord with singing, and exalting the God of Israel.
This was their battle song. They possessed the beauty of holiness.
If more praising of God were engaged in now, hope and courage
and faith would steadily increase. And would not this strengthen the
hands of the valiant soldiers who today are standing in defense of
truth?—Prophets and Kings, 201, 202.
Nehemiah’s Record of the Levites’ Songs—The Levites, in
their hymn recorded by Nehemiah, sang “Thou, even Thou, art Lord
alone; Thou hast made heaven, the heaven of heavens, with all their
host, the earth, and all things therein, ... and Thou preservest them
all.” Nehemiah 9:6.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 115.
God’s Care for Israel—And the Levites’ hymn, recorded by
Nehemiah, vividly pictures God’s care for Israel, even during these
years of rejection and banishment: “Thou in Thy manifold mercies
forsookest them not in the wilderness; the pillar of the cloud departed
not from them by day, to lead them in the way; neither the pillar of
fire by night, to show them light, and the way wherein they should go.
Thou gavest also Thy good Spirit to instruct them, and withheldest
not Thy manna from their mouth, and gavest them water for their
[454] thirst. Yea, forty years didst Thou sustain them in the wilderness ....
Their clothes waxed not old, and their feet swelled not.” Nehemiah
9:19-21.—Patriarchs and Prophets, 406, 407.
Praise in Ezra’s Day—Then from the assembled throng [dur-
ing the Feast of Trumpets in Ezra’s time after the rebuilding of
Jerusalem’s wall], as they stood with outstretched hands toward
heaven, there arose the song: “Blessed be Thy glorious name, which
is exalted above all blessing and praise. Thou, even Thou, art Lord
alone; Thou hast made heaven, the heaven of heavens, with all their
host, the earth, and all things that are therein, the seas, and all that
is therein, and Thou preservest them all; and the host of heaven
worshippeth Thee” [Nehemiah 9:5, 6]. The song of praise ended,
the leaders of the congregation related the history of Israel, showing
how great had been God’s goodness toward them, and how great
their ingratitude.—Prophets and Kings, 666.
Songs on Journeys to Jerusalem—The journey to Jerusalem
[when Jewish families attended the feasts], in the simple, patriarchal
style, amidst the beauty of the springtime, the richness of midsum-
mer, or the ripened glory of autumn, was a delight. With offerings of
gratitude they came, from the man of white hairs to the little child,
to meet with God in His holy habitation. As they journeyed, the
experiences of the past, the stories that both old and young still love
so well, were recounted to the Hebrew children. The songs that had
[455] cheered the wilderness wandering were sung. God’s commandments
were chanted, and, bound up with the blessed influences of nature
and of kindly human association, they were forever fixed in the
memory of many a child and youth.—Education, 42.
Music at the Feast of Tabernacles—With sacred song and

thanksgiving the worshipers celebrated this occasion. A little before
the feast was the Day of Atonement, when, after confession of their
sins, the people were declared to be at peace with Heaven. Thus the
way was prepared for the rejoicing of the feast. “O give thanks unto
the Lord; for He is good: for His mercy endureth forever” (Psalm
106:1) rose triumphantly, while all kinds of music, mingled with
shouts of hosanna, accompanied the united singing.
The temple was the center of the universal joy. Here was the
pomp of the sacrificial ceremonies. Here, ranged on either side of
the white marble steps of the sacred building, the choir of Levites
led the service of song. The multitude of worshipers, waving their
branches of palm and myrtle, took up the strain, and echoed the
chorus; and again the melody was caught up by voices near and afar
off, till the encircling hills were vocal with praise.
At night the temple and its court blazed with artificial light. The
music, the waving of palm branches, the glad hosannas, the great
concourse of people, over whom the light streamed from the hanging
lamps, the array of the priests, and the majesty of the ceremonies,
combined to make a scene that deeply impressed the beholders. But
the most impressive ceremony of the feast, one that called forth great- [456]
est rejoicing, was one commemorating an event in the wilderness
sojourn.
At the first dawn of day, the priests sounded a long, shrill blast
upon their silver trumpets, and the answering trumpets, and the
glad shouts of the people from their booths, echoing over hill and
valley, welcomed the festal day. Then the priest dipped from the
flowing waters of the Kedron a flagon of water, and, lifting it on
high, while the trumpets were sounding, he ascended the broad steps
of the temple, keeping time with the music with slow and measured
tread, chanting meanwhile, “Our feet shall stand within thy gates, O
Jerusalem.” Psalm 122:2.
He bore the flagon to the altar, which occupied a central position
in the court of the priests. Here were two silver basins, with a priest
standing at each one. The flagon of water was poured into one, and
a flagon of wine into the other; and the contents of both flowed into
a pipe which communicated with the Kedron, and was conducted
to the Dead Sea. This display of the consecrated water represented
the fountain that at the command of God had gushed from the rock
to quench the thirst of the children of Israel. Then the jubilant
strains rang forth, “The Lord Jehovah is my strength and my song”;
“therefore with joy shall ye draw water out of the wells of salvation.”
Isaiah 12:2, 3.—The Desire of Ages, 448, 449.
Song at Jesus’ Triumphal Entry—From the multitudes gath-
[457] ered to attend the Passover, thousands go forth to welcome Jesus.
They greet Him with the waving of palm branches and a burst of
sacred song.—The Desire of Ages, 571.
Praise at the Last Supper—Before leaving the upper chamber,
the Saviour led His disciples in a song of praise. His voice was
heard, not in the strains of some mournful lament, but in the joyful
notes of the Passover hallel. [See Psalm 117.]—The Desire of Ages,
[458] 672.
Chapter 72—Song at Christ’s Resurrection and
Ascension
Heaven’s Welcome to the Risen Lord—At the resurrection

they [the soldiers guarding Jesus’ tomb] saw the brightness of the
angels illuminate the night, and heard the inhabitants of heaven
singing with great joy and triumph.—The Desire of Ages, 780.
Songs by the Angel Host—They [the soldiers guarding the
tomb] see Jesus come forth from the grave, and hear Him proclaim
over the rent sepulcher, “I am the resurrection, and the life.” As
He comes forth in majesty and glory, the angel host bow low in
adoration before the Redeemer, and welcome Him with songs of
praise.—The Desire of Ages, 780.
Praise to Christ at His Ascension—All heaven was waiting to
welcome the Saviour to the celestial courts. As He ascended, He led
the way, and the multitude of captives set free at His resurrection
followed. The heavenly host, with shouts and acclamations of praise
and celestial song, attended the joyous train.
As they drew near to the city of God, the challenge is given by
the escorting angels—“Lift up your heads, O ye gates; And be ye [459]
lift up, ye everlasting doors; And the King of glory shall come in.”
Joyfully the waiting sentinels respond—“Who is this King of
Glory?” This they say, not because they know not who He is, but
because they would hear the answer of exalted praise—“The Lord
strong and mighty, The Lord mighty in battle! “Lift up your heads,
O ye gates; Even lift them up, ye everlasting doors; And the King of
glory shall come in.”
Again is heard the challenge, “Who is this King of glory?” for
the angels never weary of hearing His name exalted. The escorting
angels make reply—“The Lord of hosts; He is the King of glory.”
Psalm 24:7-10.
Then the portals of the city of God are opened wide, and the
angelic throng sweep through the gates amid a burst of rapturous
music....
297
He presents to God the wave sheaf, those raised with Him as

representatives of that great multitude who shall come forth from the
grave at His second coming. He approaches the Father, with whom
there is joy over one sinner that repents; who rejoices over one with
singing....
With joy unutterable, rulers and principalities and powers ac-
knowledge the supremacy of the Prince of life. The angel host
prostrate themselves before Him, while the glad shout fills all the
courts of heaven, “Worthy is the Lamb that was slain to receive
power, and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and honor, and glory,
and blessing.” Revelation 5:12.
[460] Songs of triumph mingle with the music from angel harps, till
heaven seems to overflow with joy and praise. Love has conquered.
The lost is found. Heaven rings with voices in lofty strains pro-
claiming, “Blessing, and honor, and glory, and power, be unto Him
that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and ever.”
[461] Revelation 5:13.—The Desire of Ages, 832-835.
Chapter 73—Song in the Last Great Crisis
Song of the Angels Now—“Whoso offereth praise,” says the

Creator, “glorifieth Me.” Psalm 50:23. All the inhabitants of heaven
unite in praising God. Let us learn the song of the angels now, that
we may sing it when we join their shining ranks. Let us say with the
psalmist, “While I live, will I praise the Lord: I will sing praises unto
my God while I have any being.” “Let the people praise Thee, O
God; let all the people praise Thee.” Psalm 146:2; 67:5.—Patriarchs
and Prophets, 289, 290.
In Shadows of Affliction—In the full light of day, and in hear-
ing of the music of other voices, the caged bird will not sing the
song that his master seeks to teach him. He learns a snatch of this, a
trill of that, but never a separate and entire melody. But the master
covers the cage, and places it where the bird will listen to the one
song he is to sing. In the dark, he tries and tries again to sing that
song until it is learned, and he breaks forth in perfect melody. Then
the bird is brought forth, and ever after he can sing that song in the
light. Thus God deals with His children. He has a song to teach us,
and when we have learned it amid the shadows of affliction we can [462]
sing it ever afterward.—The Ministry of Healing, 472.
Hope in the Last Crisis—Amidst the deepening shadows
of earth’s last great crisis, God’s light will shine brightest, and
the song of hope and trust will be heard in clearest and loftiest
strains.—Education, 166.
Triumphant Song at Jesus’ Coming—Through a rift in the
clouds [in the time of the end, when God’s people are delivered],
there beams a star whose brilliancy is increased fourfold in contrast
with the darkness. It speaks hope and joy to the faithful, but severity
and wrath to the transgressors of God’s law. Those who have sac-
rificed all for Christ are now secure, hidden as in the secret of the
Lord’s pavilion. They have been tested, and before the world and
the despisers of truth they have evinced their fidelity to Him who
died for them.
299
A marvelous change has come over those who have held fast
their integrity in the very face of death. They have been suddenly
delivered from the dark and terrible tyranny of men transformed to
demons. Their faces, so lately pale, anxious, and haggard, are now
aglow with wonder, faith, and love. Their voices rise in triumphant
song: “God is our refuge and strength, a very present help in trouble.
Therefore will not we fear, though the earth be removed, and though
the mountains be carried into the midst of the sea; though the waters
thereof roar and be troubled, though the mountains shake with the
[463] swelling thereof.” Psalm 46:1-3.—The Great Controversy, 638, 639.
Chapter 74—Songs of the Redeemed
A Preview of Heaven—Then I was pointed to the glory of

heaven, to the treasure laid up for the faithful. Everything was
lovely and glorious. The angels would sing a lovely song, then they
would cease singing and take their crowns from their heads and cast
them glittering at the feet of the lovely Jesus, and with melodious
voices cry, “Glory, Alleluia!” I joined with them in their songs of
praise and honor to the Lamb, and every time I opened my mouth to
praise Him, I felt an unutterable sense of the glory that surrounded
me.—Early Writings, 66.
Songs of the Saints—And we all cried out, “Alleluia, heaven
is cheap enough!” and we touched our glorious harps and made
heaven’s arches ring.—Early Writings, 17.
Songs by the Sons of God—All nature, in its surpassing loveli-
ness, will offer to God a tribute of praise and adoration. The world
will be bathed in the light of heaven. The light of the moon will
be as the light of the sun, and the light of the sun will be sevenfold
greater than it is now. The years will move on in gladness. Over the [464]
scene the morning stars will sing together, and the sons of God will
shout for joy, while God and Christ will unite in proclaiming, “There
shall be no more sin, neither shall there be any more death.”—The
Choir of the Redeemed and the Angels—Stand on the thresh-
old of eternity and hear the gracious welcome given to those who
in this life have cooperated with Christ, regarding it as a privilege
and an honor to suffer for His sake. With the angels, they cast their
crowns at the feet of the Redeemer, exclaiming, “Worthy is the
Lamb that was slain to receive power, and riches, and wisdom, and
strength, and honor, and glory, and blessing.... Honor, and glory,
and power, be unto Him that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the
Lamb for ever and ever.” Revelation 5:12, 13.
There the redeemed ones greet those who directed them to the
uplifted Saviour. They unite in praising Him who died that human
301
beings might have the life that measures with the life of God. The
conflict is over. All tribulation and strife are at an end. Songs of
victory fill all heaven, as the redeemed stand around the throne of
God. All take up the joyful strain, “Worthy is the Lamb that was
slain” and hath redeemed us to God.—The Ministry of Healing, 506,
507.
Song of Moses and the Lamb—This song and the great deliv-
erance which it commemorates, made an impression never to be
effaced from the memory of the Hebrew people. From age to age
[465] it was echoed by the prophets and singers of Israel, testifying that
Jehovah is the strength and deliverance of those who trust in Him.
That song does not belong to the Jewish people alone. It points
forward to the destruction of all the foes of righteousness, and the
final victory of the Israel of God. The prophet of Patmos beholds
the white-robed multitude that “have gotten the victory,” standing
on the “sea of glass mingled with fire,” having “the harps of God.
And they sing the song of Moses the servant of God, and the song
of the Lamb.” Revelation 15:2, 3.
“Not unto us, O Lord, not unto us, but unto Thy name give glory,
for Thy mercy, and for Thy truth’s sake.” Psalm 115:1. Such was
the spirit that pervaded Israel’s song of deliverance, and it is the
spirit that should dwell in the hearts of all who love and fear God. In
freeing our souls from the bondage of sin, God has wrought for us a
deliverance greater than that of the Hebrews at the Red Sea. Like
the Hebrew host, we should praise the Lord with heart and soul and
voice for His “wonderful works to the children of men.” Those who
dwell upon God’s great mercies, and are not unmindful of His lesser
gifts will put on the girdle of gladness, and make melody in their
hearts to the Lord.
The daily blessings that we receive from the hand of God, and
above all else the death of Jesus to bring happiness and heaven
within our reach, should be a theme for constant gratitude. What
compassion, what matchless love, has God shown to us, lost sinners,
in connecting us with Himself, to be to Him a peculiar treasure!
[466] What a sacrifice has been made by our Redeemer, that we may be
called children of God! We should praise God for the blessed hope
held out before us in the great plan of redemption, we should praise
Him for the heavenly inheritance, and for His rich promises; praise
Chapter 74—Songs of the Redeemed 303
Him that Jesus lives to intercede for us.—Patriarchs and Prophets,

289.
The King in His Beauty—Those who, regardless of all else,
place themselves in God’s hands, to be and do all that He would
have them, will see the King in His beauty. They will behold His
matchless charms, and, touching their golden harps, they will fill all
heaven with rich music and with songs to the Lamb.—Evangelism,
503.
Anthems of the Blessed—Angels are looking forward with
earnest expectation to the final triumph of the people of God, when
seraphim and cherubim and the “ten thousand times ten thousand,
and thousands of thousands” shall swell the anthems of the blessed
and celebrate the triumphs of the mediatorial achievements in the
recovery of man.—My Life Today, 307.
The Victor’s Palm and Shining Harp—In every hand are
placed the victor’s palm and the shining harp. Then, as the com-
manding angels strike the note, every hand sweeps the harp strings
with skillful touch, awaking sweet music in rich, melodious strains.
Rapture unutterable thrills every heart, and each voice is raised in
grateful praise: “Unto Him that loved us, and washed us from our
sins in His own blood, and hath made us kings and priests unto God [467]
and His Father; to Him be glory and dominion for ever and ever.”
Revelation 1:5, 6.—The Great Controversy, 646.
Sound of Music in Heaven—The prophet caught the sound of
music there, and song, such music and song as, save in the visions of
God, no mortal ear has heard or mind conceived. “The ransomed of
the Lord shall return, and come to Zion with songs and everlasting
joy upon their heads: they shall obtain joy and gladness, and sorrow
and sighing shall flee away.” Isaiah 35:10. “Joy and gladness shall
be found therein, thanksgiving, and the voice of melody.” Isaiah
51:3. “As well the singers as the players on instruments shall be
there.” Psalm 87:7. “They shall lift up their voice, they shall sing for
the majesty of the Lord.” Isaiah 24:14.—Prophets and Kings, 730.
Song of the 144,000—These are they that stand upon Mount
Zion with the Lamb, having the Father’s name written in their fore-
heads. They sing the new song before the throne, that song which no
man can learn save the hundred and forty and four thousand which
were redeemed from the earth.—Prophets and Kings, 591.
Acclamation in the New Earth—Upon its summit His feet will

rest when He shall come again. Not as a Man of sorrows, but as
a glorious and triumphant King He will stand upon Olivet, while
Hebrew hallelujahs mingle with Gentile hosannas, and the voices of
[468] the redeemed as a mighty host shall swell the acclamation, Crown
Him Lord of all!—The Desire of Ages, 830.
Praise From One Sabbath to Another—When there shall be a
“restitution of all things, which God hath spoken by the mouth of all
His holy prophets since the world began” (Acts 3:21), the creation
Sabbath, the day on which Jesus lay at rest in Joseph’s tomb, will
still be a day of rest and rejoicing. Heaven and earth will unite in
praise, as “from one Sabbath to another” (Isaiah 66:23) the nations
of the saved shall bow in joyful worship to God and the Lamb.—The
Desire of Ages, 769, 770.
An Eternal Chorus of Praise—And the years of eternity, as
they roll, will bring richer and still more glorious revelations of God
and of Christ. As knowledge is progressive, so will love, reverence,
and happiness increase. The more men learn of God, the greater
will be their admiration of His character. As Jesus opens before
them the riches of redemption, and the amazing achievements in the
great controversy with Satan, the hearts of the ransomed thrill with
more fervent devotion, and with more rapturous joy they sweep the
harps of gold; and ten thousand times ten thousand and thousands
of thousands of voices unite to swell the mighty chorus of praise.
“And every creature which is in heaven, and on the earth, and
under the earth, and such as are in the sea, and all that are in them,
heard I saying, Blessing, and honor, and glory, and power, be unto
[469] Him that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and
ever.” Revelation 5:13.
The great controversy is ended. Sin and sinners are no more.
The entire universe is clean. One pulse of harmony and gladness
beats through the vast creation. From Him who created all, flow life
and light and gladness, throughout the realms of illimitable space.
From the minutest atom to the greatest world, all things, animate
and inanimate, in their unshadowed beauty and perfect joy, declare
that God is love.—The Great Controversy, 678.

The Voice in Speech and Song

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

The Voice in Speech and Song

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

The Voice in Speech and

About the Author

End User License Agreement

The Trustees of the

Chapter 30—Care in Speaking of Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

A Supreme Blessing for Good—The power of speech is a talent

With the talent of speech we are to communicate the truth as

Words the Expression of Thought—Our words index the state

Holy Spirit; for they are working at cross-purposes with God.—The

ated than the gift of speech. It is to be used to declare God’s wisdom

Speech for Witnessing—God has given us the gift of speech

Means of Exalting Sacred Themes—He who teaches the Word

Purity of Language—As you seek to draw others within the

make him more intelligent. Is he downcast and discouraged? Let [28]

opportunity presents itself, we may have the right word to speak at

Most Important Branch—The talent of speech is to be care-

Home a School for Speech Culture—It is the work of parents

spoken will be pure and incorruptible. The proper conversation of a

A Message of Eternal Import—Every Christian is called to

way; walk ye in it,” will be heard and obeyed.—Fundamentals of

was just what He desires His servants to follow.—Fundamentals of

Speech As Influenced by the Truth Within—If students will

rectly the English language in reading, writing, and speaking, a

Need of Improving Tones of the Voice—Students, God has

is an unruly member, but it should not be so. That member which

Tongue Control by Divine Grace—My brethren and sisters,

Christ’s Way—God’s servants in this age have been given most

Blessing or Curse—Day by day we are sowing seeds for the

impulse, prompted by Satan, they give utterance to jealousy or evil

A Thoughtless Word, a Soul’s Eternal Destiny—Let none

Denial of Christ by Evil Speaking—He who would confess

Sanctified Speech the Greatest Blessing—Of all the gifts

in preaching a living personal Saviour in so simple and earnest a

Influence of Harsh Words—Do you dislike to have harsh

Distinct Enunciation—Jesus is our example. His voice was

Natural Key—Had He raised His voice to an unnatural key, ...

A Unique Voice—They beheld the hands and feet marred by the

Every Word a Savor of Life—Wherever He was, in the syna-

hardened ruler trembled at the call to repentance.—Gospel Workers,

Impression of His Appearance and Words—The appearance

Tact, Not Severity—The Saviour never suppressed the truth,

Assurance of Truth—The words of the Master were clear and

No Hasty, Angry Words—Through the help that Christ can

Most Simple Language—Christ always used the most sim-

truths, clothing them with freshness and power.—The Review and

Positive Authority—The practical truths He uttered had a con-

the command from the most excellent glory. As He summoned the

fanciful or sentimental. He presented no sophistries, no human opin-

Encouragement in Love and Tenderness—They heard Him in

Truth Clearly Defined—The only-begotten Son of God came

He separated from the companionship of error; and showing them

Right to the Point—Christ seldom attempted to prove that truth

Facial Expressions—The world’s Redeemer went about doing

Truth As People Could Bear It—Christ drew the hearts of His

Lessons Adapted to Need—The respect shown to Christ at

Well-Chosen Illustrations—Jesus was the greatest teacher the

properties that were peculiarly His own. In nature, as in the sacred

Christ Our Example—What Christ was on this earth, the Chris-

to the understanding of those who sought Him a knowledge of self,

Our Saviour the Topic of Conversation—Do not talk of the

noble aspirations. The sensual, the earthly, is interpreted by such to

Seeds of Love and Kindness—Some are seen to come forth

Modest and Elevated Language—Our language should be

A Positive Testimony—It is our duty to be very jealous of the